Magix Video Pro X4 User Guide ENG

User Manual: magix Video Pro - X4 - User Guide Free User Guide for Magix Video Pro Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 426 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2 Copyright
http://pro.magix.com
Copyright
This documentation is protected by law. All rights, especially the right of
duplication, circulation, and translation, are reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in the form of copies, microfilms
or other processes, or transmitted into a language used for machines,
especially data processing machines, without the express written consent of
the publisher.
All copyrights reserved.
All other product names are trademarks of the corresponding manufacturers.
Errors in and changes to the contents as well as program modifications
reserved.
Copyright © MAGIX AG, 2008 - 2012. All rights reserved.
MAGIX is a registered trademark of MAGIX AG.
Created under license from Dolby Laboratories
Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories.
© 1992 - 2012 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
Other mentioned product names may be registered trademarks of the
respective manufacturer.
This product uses MAGIX patent pending technology.
Preface 3
http://pro.magix.com
Preface
Thank you for choosing MAGIX Video Pro X4! Your new software offers video
editing and postproduction on a professional level, comprehensive format
support, powerful performance, high-end audio editing and all options for DVD
authoring and export.
The fully developed MAGIX Video Pro X4 operating concept helps you get top
results after only a short familiarization period. This documentation offers you
an overview and a quick start at the beginning. The sections at the end provide
a detailed and systematic description of the numerous functions.
Have fun with your projects and MAGIX Video Pro X4 from
Your MAGIX Team
4 Table of Contents
http://pro.magix.com
Table of Contents
Copyright 2
Preface 3
Support 10
Before You Start 12
Package Contents 12
Printed and PDF manuals 12
Installation 12
Serial number 13
System requirements 14
Introduction 15
What is MAGIX Video Pro X4? 15
Features 15
Notes for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro users 17
Quick Start 20
Program start 20
Select, load and play videos 21
Import video material from memory card 24
Video editing 27
Publish videos 33
Work screens 35
Activate main screen 35
"Edit" screen 36
The "Burn" screen 62
Basic mode 63
Switching between standard and basic modes 64
Storyboard mode 64
Export 66
Video recording 67
Select the recording method 67
AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra 68
HDV camera 71
DV camera 71
Video 79
Table of Contents 5
http://pro.magix.com
Audio 82
Single frame 85
Screen 88
Editing after recording 89
Objects 91
Insert object into the project 91
Select and group objects 94
Duplicate objects 95
Move Objects 95
Extract sound from videos 95
Object handles 96
Trim Objects 97
Transitions (fades) 101
Search for gaps 103
Simple cut 104
Two-point cut 104
3-point editing 106
Four-point editing 108
Zoom 109
Working in fullscreen mode 109
Markers 110
Playback marker 110
Project markers 111
Ranges (in and out points) 111
Chapter markers 112
Scene markers 114
Multicam editing 115
Preparation 115
Source tracks and preview images 116
Multicam edit functions 117
Synchronize video objects using the sound track 119
Title 120
Creating titles using a template 120
Create titles without a template 120
Edit titles retroactively 121
Position titles 121
Advanced settings 122
3D text 123
Fade in date as title 123
Effects 124
6 Table of Contents
http://pro.magix.com
Apply effects to objects 124
Preview rendering 126
Video effects in the Media Pool 129
Movement effects in the Media Pool 138
Stereo3D in the Media Pool 145
Audio effects in the Media Pool 145
Design elements in the Media Pool 146
My Presets in the Media Pool 147
Additional Effects 147
Animate objects, effect curves 150
Create effect masks 156
Create overlay graphic/animation 159
Attach to picture position in the video 161
Image stabilization 161
Image improvements for the entire movie 163
Image improvements for individual objects 165
Stereo3D 166
3D basics 166
Record 3D 167
Prepare 3D editing 168
Set playback mode for 3D 169
Align videos and pictures for 3D 170
Turn camera movements into 3D videos 172
Create titles for 3D videos 172
Export and burn 3D videos 172
Audio editing 174
Load and edit audio files 174
Audio effects 175
Audio CDs 191
Mixer 195
5.1 Surround 198
Set multiple sound tracks 204
Scrubbing 208
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker 209
Mixdown of audio objects 211
Edit disc menu 212
Preview and editing 212
Menu 213
Templates 214
Edit disc menu 215
Edit DVD menus with Xara Xtreme Pro or Photoshop 222
Create PC show 231
Table of Contents 7
http://pro.magix.com
Burn disc 231
Burning wizard 232
The burn dialog 233
Disk space 235
Encoder settings 237
Export movie 240
Video as AVI 240
Video as DV-AVI 240
Video as MPEG video 241
Video as MAGIX video 241
Video as QuickTime movie 241
Uncompressed movie 242
Video as MotionJPEG AVI 242
Movie as a series of individual frames 242
Windows Media Export 242
Video as MPEG-4 video 243
Audio as MP3 244
Audio as wave 245
Export as transition... 245
Single frame as BMP file 245
Single frame as JPG 245
Animated GIF 245
Export movie information as EDL 246
Upload to Internet 247
Upload to Internet (MAGIX Online Album) 248
Export to device 248
Export as Media Player 249
Settings for and management of video projectors 250
Movie and project settings 250
Program settings 260
Preview rendering 269
Backup copy 270
Load backup project... 271
Importing & exporting EDL files 271
Clean-up wizard 272
Special functions and wizards 274
Automatic scene detection 274
Musical cut adjustment 275
Travel route animation 283
Slideshow Maker 290
Produce panorama pictures 294
8 Table of Contents
http://pro.magix.com
Batch conversion 296
Blackmagic Design video cards 298
Menus 299
File Menu 299
Edit Menu 307
Menu effects 316
Windows menu 322
Help Menu 325
Context menu (right click) 328
Video objects 328
Image objects 332
Transitions 335
Audio objects 336
Text objects 339
MAGIX 3D Maker objects 342
Project folder 344
Track 345
Problems and solutions 346
File will not load 346
Choppy or uneven playback 346
Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto Remix Assistant 346
Activation problems 347
Online functions 348
Integrated browser 348
MAGIX News Center 350
Embed Flash videos into your own web page 350
Keyboard shortcuts 352
Playback functions 352
Monitors 353
Arranger view 353
Move view 354
Mouse modes 354
File menu 355
Edit menu 356
Effects menu 357
Windows menu 358
Help menu 359
Edit keyboard shortcut 359
Table of Contents 9
http://pro.magix.com
Activate codecs 361
Free activation of codecs 361
Fee-based DVCPRO and AVC-Intra activation 362
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 363
Video Editing on the PC 363
MPEG Compression 363
General notes on AVI videos 364
Overview of the different disc types 365
MPEG-4 encoder settings 371
MPEG-4 372
MPEG-4 H.264 377
AMR 383
AAC 384
Multiplexer 385
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings 387
General settings 387
Video settings 388
Advanced video settings 389
Audio settings 390
MPEG glossary 392
Motion estimation 392
Bit rate 392
Block 393
Chroma format 393
Field 394
Frame 394
GOP 394
I frames 395
Interlace 395
P frames and B frames 396
Prediction 397
Quantization scaling 398
Glossary 400
If you still have questions 417
Tips for program help 417
Index 418
10 Support
http://pro.magix.com
Support
Dear MAGIX customer,
Our aim is to provide fast, convenient, solution-focused support at all times. To
this end, we offer a wide range of services:
Unlimited web support:
As a registered MAGIX customer, you have unlimited access to web support
offered via the convenient MAGIX service portal on http://support.magix.net,
including an intelligent help assistant, high-quality FAQs, patches and user
reports that are constantly updated.
The only requirement for use is product registration at http://pro.magix.com
The online community, on-the-spot support and a platform for exchange:
MAGIX customers have free and unlimited access to the online community at
www.magix.info, which includes approx. 120,000 members and offers the
opportunity to ask members questions concerning MAGIX products as well as
use the search function to search for specific topics or answers. In addition to
questions & answers, the knowledge pool includes a glossary, video tutorials
and a discussion forum. The multiple experts, found round-the-clock at
www.magix.info guarantee quick answers, which sometimes come within
minutes of a question being posted.
Email support for MAGIX products:
For every new MAGIX product you will receive, as of date purchase, 12
months of email based customer service.
Premium email support:
For priority support, or if you want the MAGIX support team to help with non-
MAGIX related hardware problems you can purchase a Premium email support
ticket. Log in at http://support.magix.net and click on "Purchase access
code", the ticket is for a specific problem, and is valid until it is solved, it is not
restricted to an email.
Please note: To be able to use the Premium email support and free product
email support via the Internet, you have to register your MAGIX product using
the serial number provided. This can be found on the CD case of your
installation CD or on the inside of the DVD box.
Additional telephone service:
Besides the large number of free customer service offers, we also offer a fee-
based telephone customer service.
Here you can find a summary of our technical support telephone numbers:
http://support.magix.net/
Support 11
http://pro.magix.com
Mail (Europe): MAGIX Development Support, P.O. Box 20 09 14, 01194
Dresden, Germany
Mail (North America): MAGIX Customer Service, 1105 Terminal Way #302,
Reno, NV 89502, USA
Please make sure you have the following information at hand:
Program version
Configuration details (operating system, processor, memory, hard drive, etc.),
sound card configuration (type, driver)
Information regarding other audio software installed
MAGIX Sales Department
You can reach the MAGIX Sales Department workdays for help with the
following questions and problems:
Orders
Product consulting (pre-purchase)
Upgrade requests
Returns
Europe
Monday - Friday, 09:00-16:00 GMT
U.K.: 0203 3189218
Denmark: 45 699 18763
Sweden: 46 852 500713
Finland: 35 89 42419023
Norway: 47 210 35843
North America
9 am to 4 pm EST Mon-Fri
Phone: 1-305-722-5810
12 Before You Start
http://pro.magix.com
Before You Start
Package Contents
Installation & multimedia content DVD
The MAGIX Video Pro X4 installation manager is included on the installation
DVD.
Manual
The printed manual explains most of the basics of MAGIX Video Pro X4. In
addition to the printed manual, there is also more detailed documentation
which is copied to your hard drive during installation. This electronic PDF
manual describes all program functions. The electronic manual on your
computer is located under "Start -> Program -> MAGIX -> MAGIX Video Pro
X4 -> Documentation".
Printed and PDF manuals
The printed manual contains an overview of the most important functions of
MAGIX Video Pro X4.
If you have further questions, please read the complete documentation and a
shortcut pdf located in the program folder of MAGIX Video Pro X4. To read it,
you will require the free Foxit Reader program.
Installation
Step 1: Insert the program disc into the drive. The installation program starts
up automatically in Windows. If the disc doesn't run automatically,
open the Windows Explorer and click the letter of the CD/DVD drive.
Now double-click on "Start.exe" to start the installer.
Step 2: To begin the installation of MAGIX Video Pro X4, click on "MAGIX Video
Pro X4". The MAGIX Video Pro X4 installation program will appear.
Simply follow the instructions on screen to complete the installation process
and then click on "Continue". All files are copied onto the hard drive.
Before You Start 13
http://pro.magix.com
Step 3: Once the installation is complete, confirm the message by pressing
"Finish". You will then be able to start the program at any time from the
Windows "Start" menu.
If you would like to uninstall MAGIX Video Pro X4, you can do so via the control
panel under "Software". Or go to "Programs > MAGIX > MAGIX Video Pro X4 >
Service and Support > Uninstall MAGIX Video Pro X4".
Serial number
A serial number is included in each product. This serial number is required for
the installation of the software and enables usage of additional bonus services.
Please store this number in a safe place.
What can a serial number do?
With a serial number your MAGIX Video Pro X4 is clearly assigned to you and
only you. This way improved and more targeted customer service is made
possible. Abuse of the software can be prevented with a serial number, which
ensures that optimum the price/performance ratio continues is guaranteed.
Where can the serial number be found?
The serial number can be found on the reverse side of your CD/DVD case. If
your product is packed in a DVD box, then you'll find the serial number on the
inside.
For the versions that have been especially optimized for the Internet (download
versions), you'll get your serial number for activating the software directly after
purchasing the product via email.
When will you need the serial number?
The serial number is required when you start or register MAGIX Video Pro X4
for the first time.
Note: We explicitly recommend registering your product (free), since only then
are you entitled to download updates and use MAGIX support (view page 9)
services.
Unlocking MAGIX Video Pro X4
After MAGIX Video Pro X4 has been installed and the serial number has been
entered, the software can be used for 30 days. After these 30 days have
expired, MAGIX Video Pro X4 must be activated.
14 Before You Start
http://pro.magix.com
System requirements
For Microsoft® Windows® XP | Vista® | 7
Minimum configuration:
Processor: Intel® Core™ Duo with 1.83 GHz, AMD® Dual-Core with 2.0 GHz
RAM: 1GB
Graphics card: Onboard graphics card with a screen resolution of at least
1024 x 768
Sound card: Internal sound card
Hard drive space: 1 GB (for minimum installation)
Optical drive: DVD drive
Minimum requirements for HD/3D editing:
Processor: Intel® Core™ 2 Quad-core processor with 2.83 GHz (Intel®
Core™ i7 recommended), AMD® Quad-core processor with 2.8 GHz
RAM: 4 GB
Graphics card: Dedicated graphics card with 512 MB VRAM or more
Sound card: Multi-channel sound card recommended for Surround sound
editing
Hard drive space: 4 GB
Optical drive: Blu-ray burner to create Blu-ray Discs
Introduction 15
http://pro.magix.com
Introduction
What is MAGIX Video Pro X4?
MAGIX Video Pro X4 is a professional video editing program for Windows PC.
All common video formats can be imported directly without any conversion into
a proprietary format in an open timeline. The Hybrid Video Engine supports
GPU processing with OpenCL, CUDA and QuickSync. Editing options include
realtime effect editing, efficient three- and four-point cuts, intelligent mouse
modes for fast editing and a Multicam mode with auto synchronization on up
to nine tracks. Based on the high end audio engine from Samplitude, perfect
synchronization of audio and image is realized in realtime. Finished projects
can be exported using efficient batch rendering into broadcast formats to
DVDs, AVCHD- and Blu-ray discs or uploaded directly to common video
portals and mobile devices.
Features
Recording
MAGIX Video Pro X4 features the following recording options:
AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra/Video-DSLRs/XDCAM/NXCAM (and other
drives)*
HDV camera: HDV camcorder
DV camera: Mini DV camcorder or DV video recorder
Video: Analog TV, video input, VCR, webcam
Audio: Microphone, cassette recorder, MiniDisc player, record player
Screen: PC monitor.
Single frame: Single and series images from webcams, video recorders, video
cameras, or TV cards
*Import of AVC-Intra and DVCPRO possible after fee-based activation (view
page 362)
Analog capture requires capture cards compatible with DirectShow. DV
capture can be performed through an OHCI-compatible IEEE 1394 host
adapter (FireWire or iLink). A TV card can be used to record programs from TV
or from your video recorder.
16 Introduction
http://pro.magix.com
Import/Export formats
Supported import formats:
Video: AVI, DV-AVI, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, MXV, MXF, MKV, MJPEG,
QuickTime, WMV(HD)
Audio: WAV, MP3, OGG, WMA, Dolby Digital Stereo, Dolby Digital 5.1
Images: JPEG, BMP, GIF, TIF, PNG, PSD, TGA
Supported export formats:
Video: AVI, DV-AVI, MJPEG, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, QuickTime,
WMV(HD)
Audio: WAV, MP3, Dolby Digital Stereo, Dolby Digital 5.1
Photo: JPEG, BMP
Note: MPEG-4, MPEG-2 and Dolby Digital require a free activation for
copyright reasons. MP3 export requires Windows Media Player installation
version 10 or higher.
Multicam editing
MAGIX Video Pro X4 allows multicam editing on up to nine tracks. Various
camera recordings can be played back in synch and then edited together.
Editing
Program and source monitors: To provide an optimal overview, these two
separate preview monitors are integrated for the source material and movie
arrangement respectively.
The project folder is used for storing your material. It's useful for selecting the
necessary media for your current project. Use it to store video, audio, titling
files, and even edited versions or sections of films for use later in your projects.
Picture optimization: This includes color improvement (RGB, saturation),
sharpness (focus, feathering), brightness regulator (brightness, contrast), and
the anti-flicker filter.
Sound optimization: The equalizer allows you to manipulate the frequency
spectrum, which is useful for reducing peaks, for example. The compressor
limits the signal's dynamics. The StereoFX processor controls the position of
the sound within the stereo panorama. The De-noiser and De-hisser are
professional noise reduction tools for removing noise and hisses.
Introduction 17
http://pro.magix.com
Video effects: Such as creative filters, distortion, video mix (chroma key),
movement effects (e.g. camera/zoom or rotation), cropping, picture-in-picture
collages, video effect plug-in support, etc.
Automatic scene recognition
Slideshow Maker turns photo collages into spectacular multimedia shows
automatically.
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker creates background music automatically.
Burnable disc formats
DVD
Blu-Ray disc
AVCHD disc (on DVD and Blu-ray Discs)
MultiDisc (DVD + WMV HD)
Project backups, backup copies, and 1:1 copies of DVDs
Multimedia editable disc menus
Included are many disc menu templates which offer selection options for
movies and chapters on the screen. Many of these are also available in 16:9
format. They can be included during burning and give the disc a professional
appearance.
Every menu template may be customized with personal photos, thematic
animations, 3D captions, sound, intro videos, etc.
Notes for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro users
If you are used to working with MAGIX Movie Edit Pro, you can change the
window appearance to MAGIX Video deluxe "classic" view by going to
"Window"> "Window appearance" > "Minimal".
For all those who haven't used MAGIX Movie Edit Pro before, we recommend
the "Standard" window appearance. You have the most options available in
this mode.
Below you will find a rough overview of the differences between MAGIX Video
Pro X4 and MAGIX Movie Edit Pro.
Video monitors
In the "Minimal" mode you will see only one preview monitor like in MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro, which is used as both a program and a source monitor. When
the project is stopped, you can select files in the Media Pool and play them
18 Introduction
http://pro.magix.com
back using the transport controls. To play the arrangement again, you first
must click on the arranger.
The "Standard" appearance offers two preview monitors: a program monitor
for project preview in the arranger and a source monitor for preview of Media
Pool files. Both preview monitors have separate transport controls, so that
Media Pool preview and project playback can be controlled separately. For
additional information about the preview monitors, please read the
corresponding section of the "Interface" (view page 58) chapter.
Keyboard layout
The preset keyboard shortcuts are different and can be displayed in both
modes via "File -> Settings -> Keyboard shortcuts". MAGIX Video Pro X4 also
allows familiar shortcuts from Movie Edit Pro to be loaded if they are easier to
work with. More information about keyboard shortcuts can be found in the
chapter "Keyboard shortcut" (view page 351) and in the shortcut pdf located in
the program folder of MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Load files
In MAGIX Video Pro X4, files are dragged (drag&drop) to the desired position
in the arranger or loaded via the commands from the insert menu. To learn
more about the paste menus, please read the "Paste Modes" (view page 43)
section in the "Interface" chapter.
In Movie Edit Pro, files can also be loaded form the Media Pool by double
clicking them. Videos and images are placed in the first track at the position of
the playback marker. If another object is already located there, the new object
will be placed after the last object in the first track. Titles will appear on tracks
3 and 4, additional audio material on track 5.
You may also change this behavior under "File -> Settings -> Program" via the
tab "System" and under "Behavior on double click".
Space bar behavior
In either program, use the space bar on your keyboard to start and stop.
Pressing the space bar again produces different effects according to the
respective program:
In Movie Edit Pro, the playback marker is placed at the last stop position.
In MAGIX Video Pro X4, the playback marker is kept at the current position.
This corresponds with the functionality of a tape recorder when stopped.
Playback behavior may be switched via "File -> Settings -> Program" and then
the "Playback" tab.
Introduction 19
http://pro.magix.com
Project folder
In Movie Edit Pro, the project folder function is not available.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 features the project folder as a separate folder on the
right side, which serves as an intermediate store or catch-all for all kinds of
project material. More information about this is available in the section "Project
folder (view page 57)" in the chapter "Workspaces".
Video objects with sound tracks
In MAGIX Video Pro X4, there are combined objects. An object's audio and
video track are by default displayed on one track. They can be separated into
two tracks and therefore into two objects via the object's context menu.
In Movie Edit Pro, video objects are always displayed as two grouped objects
in two tracks. These objects are grouped by default.
20 Quick Start
Quick Start
This chapter explains the basic functions of MAGIX Video Pro X4 with a step-
by-step introduction. A systematic description of the program functions can be
found in the chapters and in the extensive PDF manual.
Tip: Take advantage of the introductory video and tutorials, which can be
opened with the help of the Task Assistant.
Program start
When you start MAGIX Video Pro X4 for the first time, the start dialog will
appear.
This dialog allows you to either "Load an existing project" or "Create a new
project". You can also "Create a new project folder". All files belonging to this
movie will be saved there.
Additionally, you can also use movie templates. Movie templates offer a
structure for quickly developing certain standard projects with the help of
included placeholders.
If you are looking for a quick start into the basic functions of MAGIX Video Pro
X4, we recommend switching into the "Basic mode" (view page 62), which can
be found under "Editing mode".
We're still at the very beginning, so let's stick with keeping an overview of
everything. Click "OK" to end the dialog and continue.
http://pro.magix.com
Quick Start 21
Select, load and play videos
In the beginning, it's probably best to load a video file for test purposes and to
get to know the program's functions.
The Media Pool appears to the top right; four tabs provide access to all
important elements that are required for video projects. The first tab displays
all usable files (besides movies, also photos, images, audio files, and even RTF
text files for captions) in the current folder.
http://pro.magix.com
Navigation works exactly like with other file managers: Folders can be opened
with a double click. Arrow buttons take you one level up or down. You can
also let your files be displayed as a folder tree with a hierarchy and use the
search function (view page 51) to look for files according to various criteria.
All files displayed in the file list may be loaded and used. Find a video file, e. g.
in the format *.mpg, *mxv, or *.avi.
22 Quick Start
In the upper-left area, you will see two preview monitors.
The left program monitor is responsible for playback of objects in the arranger.
The right source monitor displays a preview of files in the Media Pool.
To play a video file from the Media Pool in the right source monitor, double
click on the file in the file list. Double clicking loads the file in the monitor first.
To play the video, click the play button on the transport
control under the source monitor to the right.
This method lets you select and play back different video files. Drag the
selected file (hold down the mouse button) from the Media Pool down into the
arranger. An object appears at the location on the track where you release the
mouse button to represent this video file.
All objects in the arranger can be moved with the mouse - either horizontally
on a track or vertically between tracks. Drag the video object on the first track
all the way to the left to the beginning of the track.
http://pro.magix.com
Quick Start 23
Note: If the video also has a sound track, it will be displayed here in the same
track. To learn how to separate sound and video, read the "Objects" (view
page 95) chapter.
Now you have loaded the first file into the arranger, where it can be cut, edited
and exported. You can now load additional files and combine videos, audio
and photos with each other on all tracks.
To play back the arranger, click the play button on the transport control under
the program monitor to the left.
Tip: By the way, playback and stopping is easier with the space bar.
A vertical line travels back and forth over the arranger during playback: This is
the playback marker that indicates the current position. You can reposition it
by clicking at different locations in the movie as desired.
You can also define playback ranges, e. g. to freeze a certain position
independent of the playback marker. You can define an in-point by clicking in
the position bar above the first track, indicating the starting point of the
playback area. If you right-click to the right in the position bar, an out-point will
appear, which indicates the end point of the playback area. The length of the
playback area is shown in the center of the section display.
http://pro.magix.com
In- and out-points can be moved or placed directly with the mouse: A left click
sets the in-point, and a right-click sets the outpoint.
To play back the range, click the "Play back range" button on the
transport control under the program monitor.
Now you know how to load and play back media files in different ways. Would
you like to try to make your own movie now?
If you would like to continue with your own film material, select "New project"
in the "File" menu and read the following section about video import.
24 Quick Start
If you would like to first continue using the test file, skip the import tutorial and
read the next section called "Video editing" (view page 27).
Import video material from memory card
Connect your memory medium (camera, USB stick, SD card or other) to the
PC. You may have to first turn your camera on.
Click on the red button below the source monitor to open the record dialog.
http://pro.magix.com
Quick Start 25
In the record dialog, click on "AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra".
http://pro.magix.com
26 Quick Start
The AVCHD import assistant will then open. Select your connected storage
devices as "video source". A file list will appear.
In the file list, select all the recordings that you've imported from the device.
You can preview all your recordings using the preview monitor in the middle of
the dialog in order to decide if they are suitable for your movie.
After selecting all videos, in "Import options" you can select whether the
recordings should be directly placed into your movie project or simply copied
to your computer's hard drive (you can select the location in the next dialog).
You can also automatically delete your recordings after import.
http://pro.magix.com
Quick Start 27
Video editing
Timeline mode
All editing takes place in the arranger. All movies and scenes are represented
in accordance to their duration in the "Timeline mode": The longer the symbol
is, the longer is the scene represented by it.
http://pro.magix.com
Handles: All objects may be shortened by placing the mouse on one of the
lower object corners until the mouse cursor turns into a stretch symbol. You
can now squash the object as much as you like. At the top corners of every
object you’ll find two fade handles that can be adjusted to fade an object in or
out. The handle at the top center can be used to adjust the volume of audio
objects and the transparency of video objects.
Note: Video objects with a sound track will automatically be displayed on one
track. These have six, not five handles. For more information, read the
"Objects" chapter.
Object selection: For advanced effects editing, the objects must be selected
first. Individual objects can be selected with the mouse. Objects will change
28 Quick Start
color to show that they have been selected. Multiple objects can be selected
by holding down the "Shift" key. If you click next to an object, you can draw a
rectangle with a held-down mouse key. All objects contained therein will be
selected.
Effect editing: Selected objects may be edited with the help of effects sound in
the Media Pool.
Settings for each effect may be found directly in the Media Pool. Most effects
can be controlled using keyframe animation or effect curves. Effect intensity is
controlled dynamically using single points (keyframes) or a drawable curve
(effect curve). All buttons for keyframe and effect curve animation can be found
in the lower part of the Media Pool after selecting the effect.
Note: To activate the effect curve, the first keyframe must be set first.
Context menu: The context menu also offers a number of object editing
options. It is opened by right-clicking on an object. Different trim editors can
be opened which enable an exact cut with different transition parameters. For
video objects, there is another context menu than for audio and title objects.
http://pro.magix.com
Quick Start 29
Remove unusable scenes
One of the most important work steps during import of your footage is cutting
out unusable scenes from the material. There are two options for this:
Variant 1: The complete material is loaded into your project first and the
unusable scenes are cut out.
Variant 2: Cut the material prior to importing it, and then proceed to import
only the scenes you need. This process is recommended for long movies with
a lot of editing; it functions either via the Media Pool or the project folder.
Cut videos in the project
Let's assume that you have already imported your film material into a project
and would now like to edit it.
Play back your video by clicking "Play" on the program monitor's transport
control (or simply press the space bar on the keyboard).
If during playback you have reached a scene which you would like to cut out,
click on the playback button again. The playback marker stays near the start
of the scene to be removed.
Tip: For long movies or for quick browsing, you can let the movie play fast
forward and follow the action on the program monitor. To do so, drag the
playback marker while holding down the mouse key across the timeline (but
not too fast!).
http://pro.magix.com
Set the playback marker at the start of the unused material. To get a better
view, we recommend using the zoom function (the +/- buttons at the bottom
right of the arranger).
Press "T" on the keyboard. This will have the effect of cutting the current
scene into two sections at the position of the payback marker.
30 Quick Start
Repeat these steps for the end of the unusable scene. Find the end of the
scene, place the play marker as close as possible to the end point, and then
press the "T" key on the keyboard again.
Now you have "isolated" the unusable scene and can simply delete it from the
movie using the "Del" key. Before this, the scene must be selected by clicking
it with the mouse.
If you didn't work accurately during cutting, then don't worry; you can use the
object handles to stretch or shorten the remaining objects to recover or
exclude material from the deleted section.
After deleting, a gap remains in your movie where the removed scene once
was. How do you remove gaps out of the film? Easy: You can drag the
following scenes back until the end of the first scene "docks" to the later
material. Remember to "take" all objects that are further behind, otherwise the
gap will just be "passed" to the end. To pull up later objects, use "All tracks"
http://pro.magix.com
Quick Start 31
mouse mode, since this automatically takes the objects on all tracks found
later on the timeline along with the object being moved.
Note: If your project has both a video and an audio track, it is usually
necessary to cut both tracks synchronously. After camera import, image and
sound tracks are combined into one object, so all cut and move actions effect
both in the same manner. However, if you have created a separate sound
track, which isn't connected to the image material, it is recommended that you
create a group before your editing operations. To do so, select the video
object and the audio object via "Ctrl" + click, and in the "Edit" menu select the
"Group" option (or click the group tool).
http://pro.magix.com
All cutting functions (as well as all other editing processes in MAGIX Video Pro
X4) are non-destructive. This means that the original material on your hard
drive will not be altered.
Importing individual scenes from longer movies
If you have saved a longer video as a file on your hard disk and only want to
use a section of it for your project, then proceed as follows:
Double click the desired file in the Media Pool. Double-click the file to load it in
the source monitor and play it back using the transport controls.
Find the range which you would like to import. Position the playback marker
above the transport control at the start position of the range and click the "Set
in point" button.
32 Quick Start
Next, position the playback marker at the end of the section and click the "Set
out point" button.
The currently selected range appears highlighted in blue in the range display.
You can playback this range separately with the "Playback range" button.
All range limits can be moved by holding down the mouse button and
dragging. Once the range matches the section that you want to import, click
on the preview monitor and drag the section onto the track. An object will
appear featuring the material you wanted to import. If you're not sure where
you would like to use the section in the project, you can drag it into the project
folder instead of onto the track.
Tip: You can also edit files that are located in the project folder in the same
way. A shortened file also contains information in the project folder about in
and out points so that you don't always need to reset these in case the video
needs to be re-imported at a later time. You can also drag each file directly
from the Media Pool into the project folder.
Regroup scenes
You will often want to move specific scenes or even groups of scenes to a
different place within a film. This happens completely intuitively: Single scenes
can be selected in any view by clicking them and moving them to the desired
position (drag & drop). You can also create scene groups which can be moved
together: "Ctrl" + mouse click lets you select more than one scene, "Shift" +
mouse click lets you select all of the scenes that lie in between.
Finally, here are three tips for more extensive arranger work:
With the mouse modes "All tracks" or for "One track" (view page 40) doesn't
just move the selected scene, but all objects that are located behind the
object (one track) or all tracks (all tracks).
http://pro.magix.com
Quick Start 33
http://pro.magix.com
The commands "Group" (view page 311) and "Ungroup" (view page 311) let
you combine any scenes into groups which can then be moved together as a
block.
If cutting and moving around parts of your project has left it a little
unorganized, try using the project folder. The project folder is better suited for
intermediate storage of all of the objects you want to use in your movie. You
can either move all of the objects directly from the arranger into the project
folder by dragging them there (they will be removed from the corresponding
track), or you can copy the objects and paste them into the project folder.
Hold down "Shift" while you click to select multiple files. You can also drag
sections of files or files from the Media Pool and drag them directly into the
project folder.
Note: Please ensure that the project folder is reserved for the respective
project at hand. The contents will be saved together with the project and made
available the next time the same project is opened, but not when another
project is opened.
Publish videos
Burn DVDs and Blu-ray discs with interactive menus
You can burn your projects onto DVD or Blu-ray discs with an interactive
menu.
Note: Authoring for DVDs and Blu-ray discs is the same for both formats.
For multiple films that are subdivided into individual chapters, the disc selection
menu becomes even more important, allowing you to jump to each movie or
chapter using your remote control. To make sensible chapter divisions in your
movie, it should be split into sensible sections. Place the play marker where
you'd like to have it and choose the option "Chapter marker" from the "Edit"
menu (keyboard shortcut: Shift + Enter). If you select the option "Automatic
chapter markers", a chapter marker is automatically placed at the beginning of
every scene.
34 Quick Start
You can switch to the "Burn" screen by pressing the corresponding button at
the top right.
The "Burn" screen has two views: "Preview" and "Edit". The "Preview" screen
provides fast loading for a menu template followed by burning. More detailed
editing such as activation/deactivation of menu entries, creation of new menu
pages, or individualization of templates takes place via the "Edit" screen.
Once the menu is finished, you may burn a disc to watch via your player.
Export video as file
Besides burning the project, it may also be exported as a video file. During
export, the entire arrangement will be recalculated into a single file, which will
be saved in the indicated folder on the hard drive. The available export formats
are listed in the menu "File -> Export film".
To place a video on the Internet, you fill find a direct connection to MAGIX
Online Album and platforms such as YouTube, Vimeo, Facebook and
Videocloud under "File" > "Online".
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 35
Work screens
This chapter will provide an overview of the the screens that available in MAGIX
Video Pro X4.
Activate main screen
MAGIX Video Pro X4 contains two views where all work is executed:
The "Edit" screen is the main view. Load the videos here and edit them in a
project window.
http://pro.magix.com
The "Burn" screen is a special view for burning discs. This especially involves
design on a selection menu, for example as used by DVDs and other storage
devices.
The above right allows you to switch between these screens.
36 Work screens
"Edit" screen
1 Top toolbar (view page 37): Here you will find buttons for quick access to
important commands.
2 Menu bar: This contains important MAGIX Video Pro X4 functions.
3 Program and source monitor (view page 58): Video and image objects are
displayed here.
4 Media Pool (view page 50): Using the four tabs, you can reach your PC's
folders, various transitions, titles and effects.
5 Switch for overview mode and Multicam mode: Here you can switch into
overview mode. In it, all objects on the first track are displayed, allowing
quick scene re-sorting. The right button activates the Multicam mode (view
page 115).
6 Lower toolbar (view page 38): In Timeline mode, here you can select
between various mouse modes for various edits, among others.
7 Timeline: Here you can define the playback range. It is equipped with a
time scale.
8 Peakmeter: The peakmeter shows the sum soundtrack volume at the
moment.
9 Project clipboard (view page 57): Here you can collect all files needed for
the project.
10 Arranger (view page 45): All files can be dragged from the Media Pool or
project clipboard via Drag & Drop onto the tracks.
11 Scroll bars: The lower scroll bar can be stretched and contracted for
zooming with the mouse. The right scroll bar zooms into the tracks
vertically. Click on the edge of the scroll bars while holding the mouse
button to change the visible part in the arrangement window.
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 37
Note: Various interface elements are only available in the default, "Standard"
display mode ("Window" > "Window arrangement").
Toolbars
Upper button bar
The upper button bar can be found in the monitor to the top left. It has the
following functions:
New project
Creates a new MAGIX Video Pro X4 project. A dialog with settings for a
new disc project or a new film (view page 258) opens to get started.
Shortcut: Ctrl + N
Load project
With this option you can load a project or a media file. Please note that
all media files associated with it must be loaded along with a project.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 will search for all used sounds and video files in
the folders in which they were located when the move was saved.
Shortcut: Ctrl + O
http://pro.magix.com
Save project
The current movie is saved with the name displayed in the project
window. If you have not yet specified a name for your project, a dialog
will open wherein MAGIX Video Pro X4 asks you to do so.
Please note: In the project file (*.MVP), all information about the used media
files, cuts, effects, and titles are saved, but not the picture and sound material
itself. This is found in the recorded or imported media files that remain
unchanged during the entire MAGIX Video Pro X4 editing process. To save the
full movie into a dedicated directory, for instance to continue editing on a
different PC, please use the command "Copy movie and media into directory".
Shortcut: Ctrl + S
38 Work screens
Program settings
Opens the program settings (view page 260).
Shortcut: Y
Context help
The mouse cursor will turn into an arrow with a question mark.
Click on any button of the main screen, to open program help which will
describe the control element in question.
Shortcut: Alt + F1
MAGIX News Center
The MAGIX News Center features links to current online tutorials and tips &
tricks on the software application examples. The "News" is indicated by color
according to content:
Green indicates practical tips & tricks for the software
Yellow reports the availability of new patches and updates
Red for special offers, contests and questionnaires
If no new messages are present, the button will appear gray. When the MAGIX
News Center is clicked, all of the available information will be displayed. Click
the messages to reach the corresponding website.
Lower toolbar
The following buttons are available:
Select a movie to edit
Using the dropdown menu, you can control various movies within a
project.
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 39
Undo
With this command you can undo the last changes you made. This
way, it's no problem if you want to try out critical operations. If you
don't like the result, then you can always revert to the previous state by
using "Undo".
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until
now, allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings
(view page 260). In general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Z
Redo
This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until
now, allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings
(view page 260). In general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Shortcut: Shift + Y
http://pro.magix.com
Delete items
This command deletes the selected objects.
Shortcut: Del
Title editor
Opens the Title editor for the selected photo, video, or title object.
Shortcut: Ctrl + T
40 Work screens
Set chapter marker
Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This
creates a chapter entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being
burned to disc.
You can rename the chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename".
The new name will appear in the chapter menu (view page 213).
Shortcut: Shift + Enter
Object grid
Use this button to switch the object grid on and off. When the object
grid is switched on, the objects snap into place beside one another so
that everything fits in seamlessly.
Form group
All selected objects are assigned to a group which may then be selected
and edited jointly by clicking the mouse.
Shortcut: G
Ungroup objects
This command splits an object group into separate objects.
Shortcut: Shift + G
Mouse modes
MAGIX Video Pro X4 offers special mouse modes for different kinds of
editing. These may be selected using the small arrow next to the
button.
Object
This is the preset mouse mode for individual objects that is used the
most often.
Left clicking selects an object. Holding down the mouse button moves the
selected object. Right clicking opens the context menu.
Shortcut: 6
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 41
All tracks
This mouse mode behaves similar to "Object" mouse mode.
During movement of objects, all of these will be moved behind the selected
object. The complete background component of the arrangement, i.e. all
objects and gaps on all tracks, will therefore be maintained during any
movement.
This is practical in order to move a complete arrangement, e. g. to insert new
opening credits or to close gaps.
Shortcut: 7
One track
This mouse mode behaves similar to the mouse mode "All tracks".
When moving objects, only those objects will be moved that are located on the
same track behind the selected object.
Shortcut: 8
Curve
This mouse mode is used especially for drawing effects curves.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects curves control the level of the effect: The higher the curve point is, the
more intense the respective effect parameter will be at this position. These may
be used for the video and image objects of the image tracks as well as for the
audio objects of the sound tracks.
More information about this can be found in the chapter "Animate objects",
section "Editing object effects curves".
Shortcut: 9
Stretching
This special mode enables the length of objects to be adjusted. The
object is played back completely and the playback speed is adjusted to
the stretched object length.
42 Work screens
Video objects are therefore accelerated or decelerated accordingly. Audio
objects are stretched or pinched via timestretching, but without creating any
changes to the pitch itself.
Attention: If the object is to be animated with effects curves, then the option
"Connect curve length with object length (view page 153)" should also be set.
Shortcut: 0
Preview audio
This mode allows you to preview audio objects (as long as the mouse
button is held down).
In this mode, objects cannot be moved or changed.
Shortcut: Alt + 6
Cut button
You can split objects with the cut button, you can remove the object start or
object end or divide the film up. Select the object you want to edit and place
the playback marker at the desired position. Clicking on the cut button cuts the
object in two. You can reach extra options using the drop-down menu.
Split
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker
is positioned. This way, two free-standing objects are created.
Shortcut: T
Remove start
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker is
positioned and removes the material before the playback marker.
Shortcut: Z
Remove end
This command cuts a selected object at the playback marker position
and removes the material behind the playback marker.
Shortcut: U
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 43
Hint: If the commands "Split" and "Remove beginning/end" are applied without
a selection, all objects at the position of the playback marker are cut.
Remove scene
This command allows you to completely remove selected objects. The
parts that follow will be automatically moved to the end of the object in
front of the object to be removed.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Del
Split movie
Splits movie at the playback marker position into two sections within
one project. These can be individually controlled using the "Window"
menu or the button "Select movie for editing" (see above).
Shortcut: Alt + Y
Special functions to insert new objects
MAGIX Video Pro X4 offers various possibilities how an object selected in the
Media Pool will be pasted into the project.
Apply automatically
Pastes the file selected in the Media Pool into the arranger. Video and
image objects will always be placed behind the last object into the first
track; audio and text objects are separated into different tracks.
http://pro.magix.com
Single-track ripple
Inserts an object from the Media Pool at the position of the playback
marker and simultaneously moves the objects on the track following it.
In contrast to automatic placement, with track ripple, all objects will be placed
at the position of the playback marker. Objects on the target track are
automatically moved behind the inserted object. Bordering tracks are
unchanged.
Videos and images will be loaded to the first track, as usual. If another object
is found at the playback marker position, then it will be cut continued at the
end of the inserted object (so that the inserted object can start exactly at the
point of insertion).
44 Work screens
Multitrack ripple
The object selected in the Media Pool will be inserted on the target
track at the position of the playback marker. All objects found at the
playback marker position will be split and moved down the length of the
inserted object. All objects on the track located further on will also be
moved.
In contrast to automatic insertion, all objects will be inserted at the position of
the playback marker.
Videos and images will be loaded to the first track, as usual. If another object
is found at the playback marker position, then it will be cut continued at the
end of the inserted object (so that the inserted object can start exactly at the
point of insertion).
If other objects are located at the playback marker position, these will also be
separated and moved further along the track.
Objects lying further along on all tracks will be moved further down.
Replace
Replaces the selected object with an object selected in the Media Pool.
Overwrite
Overwrites the object in the target track at the position of the start
marker with the object selected in the Media Pool.
Hint: In contrast to "Replace", no length adjustment takes place. With
"Replace", any downstream objects are moved, while "Overwrite" overwrites
downstream objects as well (sometimes only partially), depending on the length
of the object being inserted in comparison to the object being overwritten.
Preview rendering
You can access the preview rendering options by pressing this
button.
Mute button
This button mutes the sound output. Clicking the triangle provides
access to settings for scrubbing (view page 208) and selection of the
audio track for multi-audio tracks.
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 45
Mixer
With this option you can open and close the real-time mixer. Further
information can be found in the Mixer (view page 195) chapter.
Shortcut: M
Arranger
The arranger offers a professional editing screen for post-production.
Tracks
The arranger offers tracks for multimedia material positioning and editing. The
number of displayed tracks can be defined in "File" > "Settings" > "Movie".
In principle, any object type may be placed on any of the tracks. Video and
image objects may also be combined with MIDI and audio objects on any of
these tracks. The maximum length of a movie is restricted to 6 hours.
http://pro.magix.com
At the start of every track there is a track header.
Lock symbol: With this symbol you can lock the complete track and all
objects located on it.
Track number: For quick orientation, all tracks are numbered.
46 Work screens
Maximize track: Enlarges the track. This way, you can easier edit details,
such as edit transitions.
Solo: Switches the track into "solo". Only this track will be played during
arrangement playback.
Hide video, image and title objects: All visible objects become
transparent. Audio objects remain audible.
Transparency slider: Here you can set the transparency for the entire
track.
Mute: Switches all audio objects on the track to mute. Video, image and
title objects will continue to be played back.
Volume control: Sets the volume for all audio objects on the track.
Track name: The name of the track. You can freely select the name by
clicking on the name field and typing the name. To apply, press the enter
key.
A right-click on the track header opens the context menu, where you will find
the following options:
MultiCam > Source track: Here you can activate/deactivate a track as a
source track.
Multicam > Master audio track: Here you can define the master audio track for
Multicam editing (view page 117).
DVD audio track: If you are planning to burn several audio tracks (for example,
for multiple languages) to a DVD or Blu-ray, for tracks containing only audio,
you can determine the position on which the current track should be found. As
soon as you select an option from a submenu, a dialog opens, where you
must give your audio track a name (such as "English"). For more information,
read the "Audio editing".
Track height: Set whether the selected track or all tracks should be displayed
as small, large or in standard size.
You can also adjust the size using your mouse. To do so, drag the lower
border of a track box downward using a mouse.
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 47
Zooming
The vertical zoom function sets the number
of visible tracks. With many tracks, zooming
is useful to be able to selectively edit a track
or an object in full view.
Use the horizontal zoom functions to set up the visible section of the
arrangement on the timeline.
Object zoom: Vertical and horizontal zoom stages are enlarged so
that all of the selected objects are displayed at maximum size.
Optimize view: Displays the complete arrangement in full width.
Zoom will be set to 100%.
When the function is turned off, the old zoom level will be reactivated.
Scroll
The scroll bars serve to navigate in the arrangement. This enables the visible
section of the arranger to be moved.
http://pro.magix.com
The zoom level may be changed via the horizontal scroll bar by clicking the
bar's edge and dragging.
Tip: To zoom and scroll, it is recommended to use keyboard shortcuts.
Grid
The arranger surface features a frame-exact snap grid. This ensures that video
and image objects snap exactly to the borders of a frame.
The snap stages depend on the frame rate specified in the movie settings ("File
-> Settings -> Movie"). Choose between Europe's conventional frame rate for
48 Work screens
PAL (25 frames per second) and America's and Japan's conventional frame
rate NTSC (29.97 frames per second) or any other manually set frame rate.
When moving an object, the position display indicates at which frame the first
image of the object is shown.
The position is displayed in the form of
a tooltip when moving the object.
It indicates
"Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames".
Note: Audio objects may be moved sample-precise. That means that they do
not move along a frame grid if they are not grouped with a video object.
In addition to the constantly active frame grid, an object grid may also be
activated. This ensures that two consecutive objects will seamlessly snap
together even if they are on different tracks. This avoids undesired gaps or
overlaps.
The object grid may be activated/deactivated via the magnet symbol in
the lower toolbar.
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 49
Overview mode
The “Scene overview” mode is a special view that improves manageability and
categorization of scenes. All scenes are listed one after the other (in multiple
lines, like in a text program) and can be copied, cut, moved, deleted and
inserted.
"Overview" mode does not indicate start, playback, or end markers. The scene
which is currently being played has a frame around it.
The zoom slider enables the
view to be enlarged or reduced.
This controller also specifies how many scenes are displayed. The smaller the
preview pictures, the more will fit onto the overview.
http://pro.magix.com
Maximize: Use this button to maximize the scene overview to fullscreen
mode.
50 Work screens
Media Pool
The structure and workflow of the Media Pool is similar to that featured by
Windows Explorer; however, the difference is that only the used files are
displayed. This is used to access and load multimedia files of all kinds: video
files, audio files, fades, effects, and also complete projects.
Preview function
A preview function for all of the files in the Media Pool can be started by double
clicking or by pressing the playback button on the source monitor.
The transport control function in the source monitor allows you to select
sections from a longer video file in the Media Pool and load them. Read the
"Add objects into the project" (view page 58) section.
Importing
Navigation buttons
The navigation buttons let you navigate through your computer’s drives and
folders.
Forward/
back
These buttons access the previously viewed
folders.
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 51
Higher
directory
This button accesses the next highest folder level.
Folder tree Here you can activate a folder tree to navigate
through your computer system.
Search
The search function allows you to find specific files
quickly. You may specify your search according to
file type, date, or certain folders.
Browse
history list
and path
details
The path information for the current
folder is displayed in the center
above. Use the arrow button to open
the menu to find the folders you
previously visited.
Options All functions of the context menu (switch
views, rename, or delete files, etc.) can also be
accessed via the options button.
Display
options Settings for how detailed the entries should be
listed may be specified here.
Zoom
A zoom slider can be used to set the number and
size of visible symbols in the "Large symbols" view.
Search
http://pro.magix.com
The Media Pool has an easy search function for finding files on the computer. It
may be activated and turned off again with the shown button.
File name: Enter any part of the name of the file you are looking for in the "File
name" field. The X symbol deletes the entry. A "?" may be used as a
placeholder for a single character, and "*" for any number of characters.
File type: Here you can enter a file name extension. Multiple entries are
separated using a semicolon. Below the entry field, various presets may be
selected for often-used file name extensions.
52 Work screens
http://pro.magix.com
Date: Here, you can set time period limits on your search. Choose an entry
from the list.
Folder: If you don't want to search the entire computer, but only look on
certain drives or in a single folder, you can define a certain search path.
Search depth: Here you have various options that determine whether
additional locations should be searched.
Search indexed locations and the selected folder
Search indexed locations, the selected folder and personal files.
Search indexed locations, the selected folder, personal files and the project
file.
"Indexed locations" are folders, which are searched and cataloged in Windows
via the index list. If the index list is activated, the files in the indicated folders
will be indexed while the computer is idling, so that the user's search query
may be completed faster.
Note: In Microsoft Windows XP, the indexing service is usually deactivated by
default. The search functions in Windows Vista may be installed with the
current version of "Windows Search". They make it possible to easily add to
the indexing service. Please refer to the installation instructions from Microsoft.
Computer
The link button "Computer" displays the drives in the Media Pool. All drives will
be listed along with their drive letters and can be opened with a double click.
User directory
The second button featuring the user's name opens their personal folder in the
Media Pool.
My media
The "My media" button lets you select "Projects", "My videos", "My music",
"My images", and "Recordings".
Projects: Here you can switch to the folder where your projects and films are
usually stored.
You will find the "Show project contents" function in the context menu of a
project. Using this function, you can display all objects of a project and copy
Work screens 53
http://pro.magix.com
them into the current project, retaining the editing and effect state of the
object. This means that you don't have to edit the objects again to keep the
status of the "old" project. But you can certainly continue editing the
transferred object. These changes will be then saved in the current project.
My videos: Displays all usable files found in "My documents\My videos."
My music: Displays the contents of the "My Documents\My Music" folder.
MAGIX Music Manager also suggests this folder for importing your music
collection into the database.
Slideshow music: This features the music that is included for dubbing.
My pictures: Switches to the "My documents\My pictures" folder. This folder is
often used by digital cameras and scanners to store transferred images by
default. The included MAGIX Photo Manager program also uses this folder
(e.g. during image import).
Recordings: MAGIX Video Pro X4 specifies standards for all recordings.
MAGIX tools
The "MAGIX tools" link selects links to "Downloads", "Database", "Online
Album", and "Internet Media".
XAR animations: Here you will find various elements, which you can design
with the help of Xara Designer Pro and use in your projects. As soon as you
drag one of the elements into the Timeline, Xara Designer Pro will automatically
open with the corresponding element. You can find additional information
about Xara Designer Pro at http://pro.magix.com.
Downloads: This buttons gives you access to media files downloaded with
Catooh.
Data base: This button opens the program-spanning database view. Right
clicking opens the database search. The database first has to be created using
the supplied additional program, MAGIX Photo Manager.
Online Album: With this button you can access MAGIX Online Album directly.
This provides a shortcut to uploading and deleting data. To do this, you must
first register on MAGIX Online Album.
54 Work screens
http://pro.magix.com
There are many ways to upload data:
While holding "Ctrl" down, select the data to be uploaded in the Media Pool,
and select "Copy" in the context menu (opened by right clicking). Switch to the
MAGIX Online Album screen, open the desired folder, and select "Paste" in the
context menu.
In the Media Pool, click on "Online Album", and go to the desired directory.
Open the Windows Explorer, select the desired data with "Ctrl" held down,
and drag it into the Media Pool.
Both options will result in your desired data being uploaded to your MAGIX
Online Album.
Note: This function requires Internet access. To gain access, make sure you
have your log in information (email address and password) ready.
Internet media: Opens the integrated browser (view page 348) from MAGIX
Video Pro X4. It offers you the option of collecting media directly from the
Internet, for example for use in your current project.
Fades
Here you can find all fades from MAGIX Video Pro X4, sorted into various
categories. One click on a category displays all of the fades that are contained.
To load a fade, drag it with a held-down mouse key onto the object, into which
you would like to fade.
You can find additional information in the "Fades" section of the "Objects (view
page 101)" chapter.
Title
This displays the title settings and the title editor. These presets are sorted into
different categories and may be loaded by double-clicking or drag & drop. The
3D title templates are also located here.
The text featured by title objects may be changed directly in the program
monitor by double-clicking.
Effects
This provides access to the effects that are sorted into the various categories.
Read more about this in the chapter "Effects" (view page 123).
Work screens 55
http://pro.magix.com
Video effect templates
Here you can find pre-configured effect templates that can be dragged-and-
dropped onto a video or image object. These effect templates consist of a
combination of various effect settings which you can adjust in the appropriate
effect dialogs.
In the "Video mix effects" subfolder you will find templates for mixing two video
or image objects. To do so, two video or image objects have to lie on two
tracks directly above or below the other. To use a mix effect template, drag on
the lower object.
Video effects
Here you can find adjustable effects for video and photo objects. The effects
can be set only after selecting an object in the respective effects dialog. For
more information, go to the "Video effects in the Media Pool" (view page 128)
section in the "Effects" chapter.
Movement effects
These are movement effects you can use to animate the frame by using zoom
or camera movements. For more information go to the "Effects" chapter,
section "Movement effects in Media Pool" (view page 138).
Stereo3D
This accesses the program's Stereo 3D functionality. Please read the
corresponding chapter "Stereo 3D". (view page 166)
Audio effects
Here you will find many audio effect templates such as echo, reverb, equalizer,
compressor, etc. Read the "Audio editing" (view page 174) for more
information.
Design elements
Collages: work similarly to picture-in-picture effects, but employ multiple
objects. Depending on the collage, arrange the selected objects one after the
other and drag the collage onto the first object.
Test images: Professional test images are available to calibrate your system.
56 Work screens
Backgrounds: The color fields are a collection of various backgrounds that can
be used to create your own color fades or as backgrounds for text. The special
"User" template opens a color selection dialg where you can choose the
desired color.
Image objects: Here you will find various image objects such as black bars,
arrows and symbols for illustrations.
You can find additional information in "Effects" chapter, in the section "Design
element in Media Pool".
My Presets
Here you will find the folder for your own effect templates. For more details,
please read the "My Presets in Media Pool" section in the "Effects" chapter
(view page 147).
Additional Effects
Here you will find all available effect plug-ins. Please read the "Additional
effects in the Media Pool" section in the "Effects" chapter.
Various file list view modes
All supported multimedia files and subfolders of the currently selected folder
are displayed in the file list. Three different views (list, detail, large symbols)
can be set by right-clicking on the Media Pool context menu.
List: Only file names are listed. This
view mode displays the most files
simultaneously.
Details: For each media file, its type,
size and date of last change will be
displayed next to its name.
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 57
Large symbols can be quite useful because
they show a preview frame for each movie
and picture file. This allows you to sort
through the material quicker.
As soon as you activate this display, the
zoom function will appear. With it, you can
additionally magnify thumbnail images.
Project folder
The project folder may be considered an intermediate store for files or objects.
http://pro.magix.com
The possible applications in this case
are diverse:
Material storage: Interesting files
from the Media Pool may be
combined in the project folder to
load them from there into the
project.
Cutting: You may cut different
sections from longer videos in the
project folder in order to use them
as separate objects in the
arrangement.
Exchange: You may move finished
objects from the arranger into the
project folder in order to use them
in other projects.
58 Work screens
As an alternative to drag & drop via the Media Pool, this
dialog enables a file to be loaded into the project folder.
This adds a virtual folder to the project folder. Folders
cannot be created within folders.
Save or load the contents of the entire project here in
order to use it in other projects.
This button accesses the next highest folder level.
Search field: MAGIX Video Pro X4 searches through all
file names in the project folder for the text entered and
then lists the results.
Settings for how detailed the entries in the project folder
should be listed may be made here.
The project folder supports drag & drop in either direction, so you may move
elements from the project folder into the arrangement or move objects or
object groups from the arrangement into the project folder.
The context menu (view page 344) for project folder elements enables these to
be saved individually as takes (*.tk2) in order to use them in other projects
again; the entries may also be renamed.
Program and source monitor
MAGIX Video Pro X4 features two video monitors: a program monitor for object
image output in the arranger and a source monitor for previewing files in the
Media Pool or project folder.
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 59
http://pro.magix.com
Setting up the preview monitor
Program and source monitors may be set up in various ways:
Each monitor can be adjusted in size. This can be accomplished by clicking
the screen with the right mouse button and selecting the desired size from the
context menu, either from the presets submenu or self-defined ("Other
resolution").
Each monitor may be freely positioned. To do so, click on the top bar of the
monitor window and drag it with a held down mouse key to the desired
position. This may be a separate monitor, for example, where you may
maximize the window.
With the "Display play time" option you can create a large time display on the
program monitor. This displays the current position of the playback marker.
You can set up foreground and background colors as well as transparency of
the overlay in the context menu.
Fullscreen view
The option "Video monitor fullscreen" in the context menu maximizes the
monitors. Alternatively, you can simply double-click on one of the monitors or
select the desired monitor with a mouse click and press Alt + Enter.
You can also shift the monitors in full screen mode and access the context
menu (right mouse button). There, you can also hide and display the transport
control, apart from the regular entries.
Tip: Using the "Edit video effects" option in the context menu you can display
Media Pools effect settings and edit effects directly inside the fullscreen
display.
"Esc" returns you to the normal view (or click on "smaller" button to the right in
the fullscreen mode).
Movie Overview
The option "Movie Overview" in the "Window" menu enables an overview of the
entire Arranger. All objects in the Arranger will be displayed in the program
monitor. The overview display is especially recommended for work with long
movies because the reduced overview in the program monitor and the zoomed
detailed view in the Arranger present a good combination.
The movie overview can be used for moving around in the movie and for
editing certain parts:
60 Work screens
When you click on a certain object in the program monitor, the Arranger will
zoom into that object.
You can use the mouse to draw a frame in the preview monitor – the
corresponding section will be zoomed in the Arranger.
When you move the playback marker in the program monitor, the Arranger
playback marker will also move correspondingly.
Tip: If you use this option very often, then try using the corresponding
keyboard shortcut ("Shift + A").
Monitor zoom
The preview images of both monitors may be zoomed in and out to examine
specific details in the image more closely (zoom in) or to reduce the image so
that black edges result for use of animations (view page 155).
Click on the preview monitor and zoom out of the video image by holding
down "Ctrl" and using mouse wheel.
Transport control
Both transport controls enable the video material to be played back.
Range: Change the range between the in and out
points by clicking above the playback functions.
Playback marker: This marker indicates the location of the
image currently displayed on-screen.
Set in/out points: Defines the start and end of the playback
range.
To the start: This button sets the playback marker to the start of
the current area.
Playback by a frame: This button sets the playback marker just
behind the current frame and plays it back.
Play/stop (pause): The playback button in the middle starts
playback. A second click ends playback.
http://pro.magix.com
Work screens 61
Tip: In the menu "File -> Settings -> Program -> Playback", you can set
whether the playback marker will go back to the start position (stop) after the
second click or following the appropriate shortcut (space bar), or if it should
stay at the current position (pause function).
Range playback: This button plays back the current range.
To the end: This button sets the playback marker to the end of the
current range.
Jog wheel: Using this wheel, you can move by
single frames within the video and position the
playback marker exactly at high zoom levels.
Shuttle control: The further the slider control is
moved to the side, the quicker the arrangement is
played in the corresponding direction. This way a
certain position can be reached quickly.
Adjusting the workspace
http://pro.magix.com
The source and program monitors, the project folder, the arranger, and the
Media Pool can be shut off completely or freely repositioned. Some "Edit"
screen configurations can be saved and recalled at any time via "Window" >
"Window arrangement" > "Save".
The first three user-defined window arrangements will automatically be
assigned to F10, F11 and F12 keys, and by going to "File" > "Settings" > "Key
shortcuts..." you can assign Keyboard shortcuts (view page 359) to any
additional ones.
Tip: You can switch between the last used window, even if it's unsaved, and
the current view using the Ctrl + F9 shortcut.
62 Work screens
The "Burn" screen
1 Menu preview: Here you can see a selection menu preview. For more
information, read the "Edit disc menu" (view page 298) chapter.
2 Switch views: Here you can switch between preview and edit views.
3 Remote control: Here you can check how your future disc will react when
you press the buttons of your player's remote control.
4 Output:Before burning the project, select the desired format (view page
231).
5 Play preview: Play the preview menu and test how it works with the
remote control.
6 Template category: Select the desired section from various categories
with different menus.
7 Menu templates: Switch between different templates for designing your
menus.
8 Use templates: Here you can select whether a template should be
assigned to a page, the menu or all menus on a disc.
You will find more information in the "Burning" section.
http://pro.magix.com
Basic mode 63
Basic mode
MAGIX Video Pro X4 offers a wide range of menus, toolbars and control
elements, which may confuse those who are new. For simple video editing
tasks such as a rough cut or format conversion, MAGIX Video Pro X4's full
function range isn't necessary.
For this reason, by going to "Window" > "Editing mode", MAGIX Video Pro X4
can be switched into a simplified, or basic mode. In this mode all operating
elements, menus and toolbars are reduced to the very basics.
http://pro.magix.com
The window arrangement is similar to that of Movie Edit Pro, with a program
monitor, Media Pool and project.
The arranger is replaced with a one-track Storyboard (view page 64). Here,
imported movie material can be split into individual scenes and arranged.
Control elements and menu commands for effect and audio editing are
hidden.
Only standard fades and simple titles with preset fonts are possible.
Media Pool may be used only for file import. Fades, titles and effects tabs are
hidden.
In addition to the buttons for switching between the main screens Edit and
Burn, there is an additional button Export. With the corresponding export
dialog, the finished movies can be saved in various formats and uploaded to
various Internet platforms.
In the Burn window the control elements for menu template editing are
missing.
64 Basic mode
Switching between standard and basic modes
To switch MAGIX Video Pro X4 into basic mode, select "Window" > "Editing
mode" > "Basic mode".
Note: If you switched into basic mode by accident and your MAGIX Video Pro
X4 project contains cut and edited audio and video material on multiple tracks,
this arrangement will not be changed. However, it is not recommended to work
in basic mode because the effects on other tracks during editing in Storyboard
aren't predictable. For this reason, in this case you should switch back into
standard mode.
Tip: If you switch from basic mode back into standard mode, by going to
"Window" > "Window arrangement" > "Resent window arrangement" you can
restore the previous arrangement of MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Storyboard mode
In the "Edit" screen, the Arranger has been replaced with a Storyboard.
Pictures and video footage (including the audio track) are displayed as scenes
in the Storyboard. The scenes are all displayed the same way, irrespective of
how long they really are in the movie.
Note: In this type of display, the playback marker moves at different rates
through the length of the film. Correspondingly, it moves slower in longer
scenes.
You can load a video or image file by dragging it from the Media Pool into the
Storyboard using the mouse. To generate a preview of the video, drag the file
into the program monitor. Monitor transport control will not work on the
storyboard, but will play the video from the Media Pool.
A file you load is made up of a single long "scene", which can be split into
several smaller scenes. This can take place manually or using the cut button
http://pro.magix.com
Basic mode 65
(view page 42) functions on the lower tool bar or via automatic scene
recognition (view page 274) (shortcut: Shift +Z)
You can then re-arrange the scenes via drag & drop and delete unwanted
scenes.
The following buttons are found on each scene:
http://pro.magix.com
Add text and titles: Click on the "T" button to add a title. Enter
your text straight into the program monitor. You can also
change the title's size. The title will be added at the beginning
of the scene and displayed for 5 seconds.
Set volume: The volume in the soundtrack of each scene can
be set via the loudspeaker button.
Effects menu: This menu takes you to copy/paste functions, a
few special functions ("scene recognition", "audio video offset"
for videos, "automatic cropping to fill frame" and "change photo
duration" for stills) and Object properties.
Transitions/fades: Click on the large button between the
scenes to select a scene transition ("Fade"). You can choose
between a "Crossfade" and a "Thru black" that each last one
second. Selecting "Cut (no fade)" removes the fade.
Rotate image (only for stills): Click on this button if a photo or
a still frame is flipped on its side or upside down. It will rotate
the photo by 90 degrees.
Display duration: Indicates the display duration of the scene in
[minutes]:[seconds]:[frames]. With image files, you can click the
time display and adjust the display duration in the dialog that
appears. This duration can be applied to all photos in the
movie.
66 Basic mode
Export
The "Export" button opens a dialog containing the most
important export functions. With it, the finished movie can
be saved in various formats, exported to various devices
and uploaded to Internet platforms.
Save on computer (view page 239)
Place on MAGIX Online Album (view page 248)
Export to device
Upload to Internet (view page 247)
Export as Media Player (view page 249)
http://pro.magix.com
Video recording 67
Video recording
Select the recording method
To start recording, click on the red "Record" button below the preview
monitor.
The following selections are possible:
http://pro.magix.com
AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra for AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra cameras, as well
as for digital cameras or video DSLR with memory cards or hard drives as well
as P2 memory cards for XDCAM. This option may also be used to import
media from removable storage devices, USB devices, or hard drives as a
clearly laid-out alternative to the Media Pool.
HDV camera: For HDV cameras
DV cameras: For mini DV cameras and DV video recorders
Video for analog video cameras, analog TV, VCR, webcams and others.
Audio for microphones, cassette recorders, MiniDisc players, record players
and others.
Screenshot: Records directly from the computer monitor.
68 Video recording
http://pro.magix.com
Frame for snapshots or image series from analog video cameras, analog TV,
VCRs, webcams and others.
AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra
This option accesses a universal import dialog that is not only suitable for
AVCHD, DVCPRO, or AVC-Intra cameras, but also for external hard drives, P2
memory cards, photo, and movie cameras that contain usable files equally.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 automatically recognizes the file structures and shows
only individual takes, making import convenient and easy.
Alternatively, these drives may also be controlled directly via the Media Pool.
The import dialog also features its own display filters and additional options for
convenience.
Note: DVCPRO and AVC-Intra import is optional and must be activated (view
page 360) for a fee.
Connect camera
Suitable cameras are essentially available in three varieties:
Cameras featuring removable data storage: These cameras have a slot for a
memory card. Your computer should have a card reader for the corresponding
memory card, which you can then remove from the camera and insert into the
card reader. Different camera models can also be connected via USB.
Cameras which burn DVDs directly (usually 80 mm diameter instead of the
regular 120 mm): The DVD can simply be taken out of the camera and
inserted into the computer. For so-called "Slot in DVD" drives, look beforehand
in the operational manual whether or not 80 mm DVDs (also called 3" DVDs or
MiniDVDs) are acceptable.
Cameras with built-in hard drives: The camera will respond as a drive as
soon as it is connected via a USB cable to the PC. This additional drive will
appear in Media Pool.
Hint: The listed options and procedures reflect our experience with what
works. Still, we recommend you read the camera's manual for the exact
sequence of actions and contact the manufacturer in case of problems.
Video recording 69
Import
The option "AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra" does not produce a recording as
such, but rather "only" the transfer of the already created video file and its
integration into the existing project.
On older systems, it may be helpful to transfer AVCHD files into MPEG-2
format during import. A corresponding query appears automatically as these
files are imported.
Note: Before AVCHD import it is necessary to activate (view page 360) the
MPEG-4 codec and Dolby®Digital Stereo codec for copyright reasons. MAGIX
Video Pro X4 offers this option as soon as the codec is required.
After you have selected a recording option, the following dialog opens.
http://pro.magix.com
Video source: Here you can select the drive that corresponds to your
connected camera.
Save in folder: Here you can select the folder where the imported files are to
be stored.
70 Video recording
http://pro.magix.com
Advanced settings: Adjust various settings affecting the name and date of the
files to be created.
Preview monitor and transport control: Play and rewind the clips in the file list
here.
Medium/general: An info area for the files is provided to the right next to the
preview monitor.
File list: The contents of the selected drive are shown here. Use the display
filters to reduce the types of files shown. You can select every file separately
using the little check boxes in order to import them later. At the top right of the
list you can find options for displaying the files.
Note: The files are color-coded. The colors indicate recording times, so that
you can quickly recognize which recordings were made at the same time.
Select: This offers self-explanatory options for file display ("all", "only new", or
"none").
Display filter: Here you can select whether you want to view "Movies" or
"Photos". With the option "Show only selected", all non-selected elements will
be hidden. You should only use this option if you've already selected elements.
Insert into movie: With this option active, media will be inserted directly into
the MAGIX Video Pro X4 Arranger as objects. When inactive, they will be
simply copied into the target folder and may be selected from the Media Pool
at any time.
Delete all media after camera import: This option deletes the selected media
after importing from the camera.
Import: Starts the import process of the selected files into the target directory.
Cancel: closes the dialog without import.
Tip: In theory, the AVCHD import dialog is a universal import dialog, which can
be used for external drives, photo and movie cameras, containing usable files.
If you find the display filters useful for your camera a s well, nothing stands in
the way of connecting the camera to the computer and then activating AVCHD
recording in MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Video recording 71
HDV camera
Use this option to open the HDV camcorder record dialog. To do this, you
have to connect an HDV camcorder.
The options in this dialog can also be found above in DV recording.
http://pro.magix.com
DV camera
DV devices
MAGIX Video Pro X4 supports continuous editing of DV (digital video) files. A
DV recorder or camcorder and a computer with a FireWire interface are
required.
To record digitally, the digital output of the Mini-DV camcorder or DV video
recorder must be connected to the DV interface of the PC, yet switched off.
You must also have Microsoft’s DirectX8a (or higher) installed on your PC. Now
switch your camcorder to “video recorder” or “playback” mode (depending on
your particular device) and open the DV capture dialog.
72 Video recording
Connect a DV or HDV camera
Connect the digital output of the switched-off camera with the computer's DV
interface (also called FireWire or iLink).
Insert a DV cassette or the storage device into the camera.
Switch your camera’s operating mode to "Video recorder" or "Playback".
The camera is now ready to transfer video to the computer.
Note: You may also use a HDV camera in DV mode to, for example, transfer
recordings in the old DV format. We have noted problems with this mode in
many cameras, and therefore recommend that the Record mode of the
camera is also switched to DV, switching the camera off and then on again.
Capturing DV recorders or cameras
To start recording, click the "Record" button below the source
monitor.
Select "DV camera" from the recording dialog. Uncompressed DV capture
requires approx. 220 MB per minute of video. If you would instead like to
record using the more space-saving MPEG format, then you should first
activate the "Record DV as MPEG" option.
http://pro.magix.com
Video recording 73
This opens the actual recording dialog. Check to see if a DV camera driver has
been selected.
Name your recording. It's worth choosing a logical name which will allow you
to find it easily again on the hard drive.
You can access the appropriate place on the camcorder tape by using the
remote control buttons: shuttle forwards, backwards, and start/stop playback.
To start recording, click on the "Record" button. Keep an eye on the remaining
hard drive space.
Cease capturing with the "Stop" button and exit the record dialog. You can
see the recording in the film-strip in the lower third of the screen.
Tip: In the DV recording dialog, you can set clips from the DV video which then
will be recorded one after the other (batch capturing). Read more on this in the
chapter "Batch processing" (view page 74).
"DV capturing" dialog
http://pro.magix.com
Note: Keep an eye on the available hard drive space before each recording. DV
capture requires approx. 220 MB per minute of video!
74 Video recording
http://pro.magix.com
Select DV device driver: The device driver for your DV device should be listed
here. If "Record audio" is deactivated, then video without sound is recorded
only. "Audio preview" activates the audio output of the recording.
Note: The audio preview is deactivated at first, since DV cameras usually
include built-in speakers.
Save movie file as/save in folder: Enter the name of the movie to be recorded.
You can also select the folder where you wish to store your video file. The
default recording directory is set by default, but you can change the Path
settings under menu item "File -> Program settings -> Path settings".
Edit after recording: This provides access to the automatic editing options.
Start the DV device automatically: Starts the DV recorder or DV camera
automatically when the "Record" button is pressed. This does not function with
all digital cards/video devices.
Video preview: On the preview monitor you can see a preview of your movie.
Original size: This option allows you to preview the video in the original size.
To return to the dialog use the "Esc" key.
Recording list
Set the start and end points for the capture here. This allows you to search the
entire video for all captures to be used and list them for planned batch capture.
This is then processed in sequence when the recording starts (via the red
button). That way, you don't need to record each scene individually. Simply
specify the recording time points and the computer takes care of the rest. To
set precise start and end points, click "Enter start/end point (view page 76)
Video recording 75
Record list: Press this button to view the available
list of already recorded videos and scheduled
recordings. All entries from the list may be
selected and deleted.
Every batch recording is automatically logged.
Conversely, every "manual" DV and HDV recording
is transferred into the recording list in order to
restore lost recordings without much effort.
Batch recording: Here the start and end points can be set for the capturing.
This allows you to search the entire video for all captures to be used and list
them for planned batch capture. This is then processed in sequence when the
recording starts (via the red button). That way you don't need to record each
scene individually. You simply determine recording time points, and the
computer takes care of the rest. To set the start and end points precisely, click
"Enter start/end point (view page 76)"
http://pro.magix.com
Record: Starts the recording process. Also contains the list of scheduled
recordings. These are processed step-by-step (batch capturing).
Stop: Stops the recording process.
Snapshot! With the Snapshot! button, you can create a frozen image directly
from the preview monitor. Start the camcorder and watch the preview window.
When the image you want appears, click "Snapshot". Or you can navigate
using the remote control to the position you want, and stop there in Pause
mode. Stopped playback on the DV camera will not deliver an image! The
images are saved in the record directory as graphics files in the set resolution.
Remote control
MAGIX Video Pro X4 also supports remote controls for most digital
camcorders. This does not function with all digital cards/video devices. If your
76 Video recording
hardware does not support the remote control function, the buttons will not be
usable.
The transport controls required for this are featured in the DV or HDV recording
dialog.
Tape title: Enter a name for your tape here. MAGIX Video Pro X4 requires this
name for the DV logging feature.
Recording information: Displays various information about your recordings.
Set recording start/end point: Enter the exact start and end point or the
recording length for a scene.
Both values can be entered as ATN
(absolute track number) or as a timecode
in hours:minutes:seconds:frames.
http://pro.magix.com
Video recording 77
DV as MPEG
This recording selection dialog option allows you to transfer DV recordings
directly into the space-saving MPEG format on the harddisk.
From the "DV as MPEG" dialog window you can
find MPEG encoder settings options under
"Advanced".
You can also burn your DV material direct to disc
without any intermediate steps.
Recording list
Set the start and end points for the capture here. This allows you to search the
entire video for all captures to be used and list them for planned batch capture.
This is then processed in sequence when the recording starts (via the red
button). That way, you don't need to record each scene individually. Simply
specify the recording time points and the computer takes care of the rest. To
set precise start and end points, click "Enter start/end point (view page 76)
http://pro.magix.com
78 Video recording
Record list: Press this button to view the available
list of already recorded videos and scheduled
recordings. All entries from the list may be
selected and deleted.
Every batch recording is automatically logged.
Conversely, every "manual" DV and HDV recording
is transferred into the recording list in order to
restore lost recordings without much effort.
Logging
Logging means that MAGIX Video Pro X4 also saves the original save location,
position and additional information (metadata, e.g. scene, take, rating,
comments, etc.) about DV video and audio files.
Everything copied using DV recording, DV to MPEG recording and HDV
recording appears in the recording lists of the corresponding recording dialog.
Recordings for which the corresponding video material is no longer on the hard
disk will appear as "planned recordings".
If MAGIX Video Pro X4 does not find the corresponding DV and WAV files
during the loading of a video, it will ask that the corresponding DV tape is
inserted into the connected camcorder again for automatic scene import.
You no longer have to save DV AVI and audio files (which can be very large). If
at a later time you would like to work on a film again, but do not have the
space to keep the material for it on your hard disk, then you can simply delete
the bulky DV AVI and audio files.
http://pro.magix.com
Video recording 79
Video
This option allows a video recording to be made from analog sources.
Connect analog video source
Connect the video out of your video camera, DVD player or VCR to the video in
(TV, video, or video-in graphics card) of your computer, and the audio out to
the line in of your sound card.
Due to the variety of device configurations, it is difficult to say which cable will
function best with your setup. If you’re not sure, check the manual of your VCR
or your TV-, video- or graphics cards.
Example: Many VCRs have a SCART output and most DVD players have three
RCA outputs (two for the stereo track, one for the image). In such cases, you
will need a SCART to RCA adapter, a cable with 3 RCA plugs at each end.
SCART/RCA adapter Scart/RCA adapter with 3
RCA jacks
Stereo RCA/mini phone
jack adapter
http://pro.magix.com
Most sound card inputs are mini stereo jacks. To connect the audio out of your
VHS recorder to the sound card audio in, you will need a stereo RCA/ mini
phone plug adapter.
You will have to purchase a cable with three RCA plugs and a stereo RCA/mini
phone plug adapter.
80 Video recording
Record dialog
Video/audio driver: Here you can make settings to you video or sound card
before recording. In practically every case the driver software supplied with the
hardware must be installed.
Input/tuner settings: Supports your video recording card with multiple
sources; in cases when a TV tuner or multiple inputs (SVHS, composite...) are
available, you can select the source to be recorded and the correct TV
channel.
Save video file as/save in following folder: Enter the name of the movie to be
recorded. You can also select the folder where your video file should be saved.
The standard recording folder is set as default. The location of this folder may
be changed via "Path settings" under "File -> Program settings -> Folders".
Edit after recording: This provides access to the automatic editing options.
Recording quality: You can select among various recording qualities
depending on intended use of the material and computer performance. These
are sorted according to picture quality. Use Configuration to fine-tune the
quality for the preset. Presets you have created yourself appear in this list as
long as you use the default folder provided as the save location.
Presets displayed with MPEG record directly in MPEG format.
http://pro.magix.com
Video recording 81
http://pro.magix.com
The preset "AVI: user-defined" enables AVI videos to be recorded via the
codecs included with MAGIX Video Pro X4. There are several codecs for
various applications, e.g. "MSU Screencapture Lossless Codec", which is
used for screen capturing. Please pay attention to the general advice for AVI
videos (view page 364).
Tip: Use MPEG presets if you want to burn your recordings immediately after
recording, because thanks to the so-called "Smart Encoding" additional
lengthy encoding after recording won't be necessary.
Advanced...: Opens the video driver settings dialog.
Recording control: Here you will find the red record button and the stop
button. Using them, you can start and stop recording.
Timer recordings active/time limit: Specify the recording start time and length
to turn your PC into a fully functioning VCR.
Snapshot!: With Snapshot! you can create a still frame directly from the
preview monitor. The images are saved in the recordings folder as graphics
files in the resolution you have set.
Recording information: Here you will find statistics about recording time,
available disk space, recorded frames and "dropped frames". Dropped frames
are frames that have been left out because the computer is too slow for the
selected image format and recording quality and cannot accept all incoming
frames.
Preview: With some graphics cards, system strain can be reduced by
switching video preview off. If you hear an "echo", deactivate the audio
preview.
Advanced configurations in the video capturing dialog
Here you can adjust certain settings for the video recording driver.
These dialog boxes, so-called “property sheets,” come with the video card
drivers. These driver-specific performance properties may deviate depending
on the cards. We also have a very limited influence on the behavior of these
drivers. If you encounter any difficulties, please contact the video card
manufacturer for the latest driver updates.
82 Video recording
http://pro.magix.com
Source: Sets the crossbar of the video card.
The crossbar determines which video and audio input signal will be recorded.
The crossbars are connected in series to the video recording chip itself. In the
output field, the video output (for the crossbars) is the input for the recording
chip (video or audio decoder-in) of the video card. In the “Input” field, select
the signal source that will be used by the video card to capture for this input.
Many video cards have separate crossbars for audio and video. If you have a
problem, try out the different configurations until the right sound matches the
right image.
Composite-in = the normal video input (typically a cinch jack)
S-video = S-video input (mini-din jack)
SVHS-in = SVHS input (special cable)
Tuner-in = TV signal of the integrated tuner
Display
Video decoder: If the picture only appears in black & white or it flickers, the
video standard may be set incorrectly. In mainland Europe, PAL_B is used.
VideoProcAmp: Fine-adjustment of colors, brightness, contrast etc. We
recommend against changing any of the manufacturer’s settings.
Format: Please do not change anything here. The capturing format is set in the
"Recording quality" option in the video recording dialog.
Station selection
This option is only available if a TV tuner is integrated into your video card.
Audio
Songs, noises, or instruments can be easily recorded in MAGIX Video Pro X4
using the audio recording function. A hooked-up microphone or various audio
devices (especially a stereo system) can be used as recording sources.
Connecting the source for recording
First of all, the source of the audio material must be connected to the sound
card input. Again, there are several possibilities which primarily depend on the
type of equipment you have.
If you are recording from a microphone, then please connect the microphone
to the microphone jack on your sound card (usually red).
Video recording 83
http://pro.magix.com
If you want to record material from a stereo system, then you can use the line-
out or AUX out jacks on the back of your amplifier or tape deck. This involves
connecting them to the sound card input (usually red).
If your amplifier has no separate output (other than for the speakers), then you
can use the connection intended for headphones for your recordings. In most
cases, you will need a cable with two mini-stereo jacks. This type of
connection has the advantage of being able to set the headphone input signal
level with a separate volume. As headphone connections generally are not the
best, it is advised that you use the line outputs if possible.
When recording cassettes from a tape deck, you can connect the tape deck's
line out directly to the sound card input.
When recording from vinyl records, you should not connect the record player's
output directly with the sound card because the phono signal needs to be pre-
amplified. A more suitable method would be to use the headphone connection
or an external pre-amp.
Adjusting the Signal Level
Adjusting the signal level to the sound card is also recommended to get the
best sound quality during digital recording.
Once a recording source is connected to the sound card, the "Record" button
opens the recording dialog and starts the recording source.
You can now adjust the recording level with the help of the LED display in the
recording dialog. For this, you must first check off "Show Levels".
If the adjustment is set too high, distortion occurs and the incoming signal
must be reduced. If you have connected the source through either an amplifier
or tape deck output to the sound card, you can only reduce the signal level in
your sound card’s software mixer interface. You can access the mixer directly
from within the recording dialog via the “Recording Level” button.
If you reduce input sensitivity by using the input fader, the resolution at which
the analog signal is digitized is also reduced. Try to set these automatic
controllers to the loudest sound level possible.
The maximum setting for an optimal level is the loudest part of the material.
The loudest part should be adjusted to be the maximum. The actual recording
begins when you press the "Record" button. At the end of the the recording
you will be asked if you want to use the recording. Upon confirmation, the
84 Video recording
newly-recorded material will be placed at the next free position of the start
maker in the arrangement.
Audio record dialog
Audio driver: Selects the sound card for the recording.
Save audio file as/ Save in folder: Here you can select the title of the audio file
you wish to record. You can also select the folder where you wish to store the
file.
Recording quality: Sets the sound quality of the recording. In the preset menu
you can choose between medium wave radio ("AM tuner"), UKW ("FM Radio"),
DAT (Digital Audio Tape) and CD quality.
Display Volume control: Using the peakmeter, you can monitor the level of the
incoming signal. Please read more on this in the chapter "Adjusting levels"
(view page 83)
Record: This button starts the actual recording.
Stop: Click this button to stop recording
http://pro.magix.com
Video recording 85
http://pro.magix.com
Normalize after recording: With this option activated, your material's volume is
raised to a proper level after recording is completed. In order to achieve good
results, you should try to record the source as loud as possible without
overmodulating it. To do so, refer to the peak meter reader in the recording
dialog.
Play while recording: This option is particularly important for spoken
commentary, etc. If activated, the selected movie (or selected scene if
recorded in the "Edit" screen) is played while recording. This acts as orientation
for the movie.
Advanced: Use this button to open a window where you can select from
special features:
Advanced settings for audio recordings
Mono recording: Activate to record in mono. This reduces the required
memory space in half. Mono recordings are recommended for voice
recordings made using only one standard mono microphone.
Real-time resample to project's current sample rate: Automatically matches
the sample rate of a new file to be recorded with the sample rate of the current
movie's sound track (set in the video recording).
Automatic volume reduction of other audio tracks ("ducking"): To add
narration or other sound material to a video that already has sound volume
levels set, activate the option ”Automatic reduction of sound volume of
remaining audio tracks”. This automatically reduces the volume of audio
objects in the arrangement during the recording session (”ducking”). This is
achieved using an automatically configured volume curve: Before and after the
recording, other tracks will be faded in or out, resulting in a homogeneous
total volume level. (Lowering of volume level during spoken comments is also
called "Ducking".)
Single frame
Single frame recording may be used to record snapshots from the connected
video source. This requires a DirectShow compatible video recording or TV
card or a corresponding USB device (e.g. a webcam).
The time control function allows you to automatically take snapshots. This is
useful for the following applications:
to create slideshows using videos
for animation films (stop-motion recording)
for video surveillance
86 Video recording
or in time-lapse photography
The recorded images are added to the current arrangement.
Recording dialog
Video source: You may set the video card used to take pictures here.
Save picture as: Enter the title of the snapshot to be recorded here.
Snapshots are saved under this name and numbered consecutively. You may
also select the file path for storage.
Recording quality: Set the solution for the recording here. This corresponds
with the resolution options offered on the camera. Use the slider to set the
image quality. Using higher resolutions results in larger file sizes for each
recording. "Reset" resets the image quality to the preset value.
Advanced...: Opens the video driver settings dialog.
Camera sound during recording: This causes the program to play a clicking
sound each time a snapshot is taken.
Record controls: The red record button triggers a snapshot or alternatively a
series of recordings when using the time control function.
Timer-controlled recording
Recording interval: When active, starting recording produces a sequence of
images. Snapshots are saved according to the selected time interval and
http://pro.magix.com
Video recording 87
http://pro.magix.com
numbered sequentially. For example, if snapshots are taken every two seconds
and then inserted every five frames into the slideshow, then a ten times
accelerated time lapse recording will result.
Photo length in frames: Specifies how long the photos appear in the
slideshow.
Enhanced single-frame recording dialog settings
You can adjust certain settings for the video recording driver.
These dialog boxes, so-called "property sheets", come with the video card
drivers. The driver-specific features may slightly vary from driver to driver. The
MAGIX team has little direct influence on the performance of the various
drivers. If you encounter any difficulties, then please contact the video card
manufacturer for the latest driver updates.
Input: Sets the crossbar switch of the video card. This lets you define what
video and audio signal is used in the recording. The crossbars are connected
in series to the video recording chip itself.
Output: In the "Output" field, the video output (for the crossbars) is the input
for the recording chip (video or audio decoder in) of the video card. In the
"Input" field, you select the signal source to be used for this input by the video
card during recording.
Composite in = the normal video input (typically a cinch jack)
S-VHS in = S-VHS input (special cable)
Tuner in = the TV signal of the built-in tuner
Video decoder: If the picture only appears in black & white or it flickers, then
the video standard may be set incorrectly. PAL_B is used in Germany and
most European countries (France: SECAM; US/CAN: NTSC).
VideoProcAmp: For fine tuning of colors, brightness, contrast, etc. We
recommend against changing any of the manufacturer's settings.
Format: Do not change anything here! The capture format settings can be
changed under "Resolution" in the "Recording" dialog box.
88 Video recording
Screen
Use screen capturing to record everything that moves on your monitor. This
process is called "screen capturing".
Use this feature to record your screen content. This process is called "screen
capturing".
Under Recording quality, you will find
various presets for different
applications. You can either record
the entire monitor ("fullscreen"), a
frame of variable size (e.g. to film the
Windows Media Player display), or a
different video player. Click
"Configuration" to make custom size
adjustments.
Hint: Because many video players work
with overlay, it is recommended to
open each player before starting the
capture! This way switching into
"Overlay" mode can be prevented.
Tip: Use the fullscreen preset under "Recording quality". MXV, a video codec
especially well suited for screen capturing, will be used.
Click on the record button in the record dialog. An additional dialog with a red
record button, a black stop button as well as a frame with dashed bordering
appears.
Activate the option "Record mouse pointer" to record the movements of the
mouse pointer.
If you like, you can deactivate "Animate mouse click", if you don't want to
visually record it.
http://pro.magix.com
Video recording 89
Now select the screen area you wish to record, i.e. the screen of the video
player in which the video is playing. Drag the frame over the area you wish to
record and adjust its size as required by dragging the edges and corners.
Note: If you previously selected "Fullscreen", the window will be hidden.
To start recording, press the red record button. The recording starts; the
record symbol appears in the task bar (tray).
If you are finished with everything, click on the record button or the stop
button to stop recording. Recording ends and the recording dialog is visible
once again.
Editing after recording
http://pro.magix.com
You can open the "HDV camera",
"DV camera" and "Video" record
dialogs from the "Edit after recording"
dialog.
90 Video recording
http://pro.magix.com
The dialog offers the following options:
Automatic scene recognition: This function separates material into individual
scenes. Please also read the section "Automatic scene recognition" (view
page 274).
Automatically set chapter markers: Please also read the section "Set chapter
marker automatically (view page 113)" in the chapter "Edit" in the PDF manual
(press "F1").
Burn project directly after recording: With this option, you can record and
burn in one go. Simply select the format you would like to burn, insert a
suitable blank disc into the drive, and press record.
Note: Make sure that the preset corresponds to the disc type (e.g. for DVDs
the "MPEG:DVD" preset).
If you use your own presets for MPEG encoding (e.g. half image resolution for
long play DVDs), make sure that they are the same for recording and burning,
so that no repeat encoding has to take place (smart encoding).
After recording the program automatically switches to the "Burn" screen, the
burn window opens and the disc is burned. The last set layout is used for the
menu layout for the DVD.
Tip: This function is suited to finish long projects in one go: For example, you
can start recording in the evening and have the finished DVD the next morning.
Export for mobile device: Recorded footage will be directly converted into the
format of the selected mobile device and transferred to the device. Preset in
the list field is the device which has been selected in the Export video/audio
dialog.
Settings: Opens the export settings (view page 239) dialog for the selected
target device.
Objects 91
Objects
Objects are used while in MAGIX Video Pro X4's "Timeline" mode. The general
term "object" includes all media types that are present on the arranger's
tracks. The following object types exist in MAGIX Video Pro X4.
http://pro.magix.com
Video objects: You can quickly recognize
video objects by their header. They have
file extensions, typical for video files (e. g.
*.mpg, *.avi, *.mxv). The longer a video
object is, the more frames that show
various positions of your video you will
see.
Picture objects: Picture objects are
photos or other static images. They have
file extensions typical for images (e. g.
*.jpg, *.png, *.bmp). In contrast to video
objects, you will always see only one
frame.
Audio objects: All objects that contain
sounds are considered audio objects.
They have file extensions typical for audio
objects (e. g. *.ogg, *.mp3, *.wav). With a
right-click, you can display audio objects
in waveform.
Title objects: Title objects are created
using the title editor and include text
displayed in your project. They have no file
extension.
In the following chapter you can read about what you can do with these
objects. The workflow for all object types is the same.
Insert object into the project
Select files in the Media Pool
The source monitor allows material to be viewed prior to exporting it. A preview
function is also provided for all of the files in the Media Pool.
First, double click the desired file in the Media Pool which you would like to
preview. Image files are displayed immediately; video files must be loaded first.
A preview is also provided for special objects like titles or fades.
92 Objects
http://pro.magix.com
Use the playback button in the source monitor to start the preview. Audio files
may also be listened to beforehand via the play button, and a level display will
activate in the source monitor.
Load files
Media files can be loaded into the Arranger from the Media Pool in several
different ways:
The fastest way: Drag the desired file from the Media Pool into the desired
track. If an object is already present at this position, the file is inserted at the
desired time position on the next empty track below.
Load several files: If you would like to load several files, hold down the "Ctrl"
key while clicking on the entries you would like to use. If you would like to load
a sequence of files, hold the "Shift" key and click the first entry, then on the
last. All entries present in between will be selected. Every file can be moved
from the Media Pool to the Arranger via drag & drop.
Insert via menu command: You can also use the menu commands of the
"Insert modes" button. For more about this, read the section "Insert modes
(view page 43)" in the chapter "Workspaces".
Project folder: If you would like to combine your material separately, then
using the project folder is recommended. It can be used as a sort of clipboard
where files that may be used in the project are sorted ahead of time. This
creates a better overview and saves repetitive, annoying navigation through
folders in the Media Pool.
Files with multiple audio tracks
MAGIX Video Pro X4 also loads VOB files that contain multiple audio tracks.
After the VOB file has been loaded, simply click the audio object created and
select the desired audio track.
Note: To view and select audio objects in the arrangement, Timeline mode
must be active.
Objects 93
Scene overview
The “Scene overview” mode is a special view that improves manageability and
categorization of scenes. All scenes are listed one after the other (in multiple
lines, like in a text program) and can be copied, cut, moved, deleted and
inserted.
"Overview" mode does not indicate start, playback, or end markers. The scene
which is currently being played has a frame around it.
The zoom slider enables the
view to be enlarged or reduced.
This controller also specifies how many scenes are displayed. The smaller the
preview pictures, the more will fit onto the overview.
http://pro.magix.com
Maximize: Use this button to maximize the scene overview to fullscreen
mode.
Importing parts of longer movie files
For longer videos, it is recommended to define the areas which should be
loaded into the project before importing. An in and out point is set to define the
area for this purpose. To do so, proceed as follows:
Select a file from the Media Pool by double-clicking it. Play it back using the
play buttons on the source monitor to indicate the section which you want to
use in the project.
94 Objects
Either move the range markers directly by dragging them with the mouse or
set them using the buttons or the shortcuts "I" and "O". The shortcuts are
especially useful for exact positioning using the shuttle and the jog wheel
Left-click on the monitor image and drag it to the arranger. An object will
appear on the track and in the project folder simultaneously, corresponding
with the selected area.
You can also drag your selection into the project folder and use it in your
project later by dragging it from the project folder onto the arranger. The file in
the project folder has the same name in this case as the original file but
includes only the selected range.
You can also drag a file from the Media Pool into the project folder first and
then cut it from there with the help of the source monitor. The in and out
points that result are saved directly when the range is stretched.
Alternatively, objects may be moved the opposite direction from the arranger
into the project folder. In case the object should appear in the project folder
and in the arranger, hold down "Ctrl". This adds all object-associated settings
(fades, effects, animations) and enables different editing work to be done on
an object which then can be saved in the project folder for later usage.
Note: For all operations involving insertion from the source monitor into the
arrangement, MAGIX Video Pro X4 features a variety of insert (view page 43)
modes.
Select and group objects
To edit or delete objects using menus, you must first select them. To do so,
simply click on the object you wish to select. Objects will change color to show
that they have been selected.
When the Shift key is pressed, multiple objects are selected. You can open up
a rectangle positioning the mouse over the object, then holding down the
mouse button and marking all objects within the rectangle (”elastic band
selection”) by left-click-dragging.
Any object can be combined with others to make up a group, to avoid the
objects being unintentionally moved out of relation to each other. Once they
are combined, clicking on one object of a group will select the entire group. To
http://pro.magix.com
Objects 95
group or ungroup objects, use the buttons in the tool bar or the corresponding
commands in the "Edit" menu.
Duplicate objects
Objects may be duplicated very easily. Click on the object to be copied with
the mouse while holding down the "Ctrl" key. This generates a copy, which you
can immediately drag to the desired position or cut separately.
Move Objects
Hold down the mouse button to move selected objects to any tracks and
positions via drag and drop. It is recommended to place objects that belong
together on neighboring tracks and to create separate tracks for audio and
video objects. For this reason, videos that should overlay each other should
usually be placed on the same track.
If the Shift key is pressed, objects can be moved from one track to another,
without the time position being changed.
Extract sound from videos
Videos with audio material appear in the arranger as combi objects (audio
object and video object in one track).
http://pro.magix.com
In order to edit the audio and image material separately from each other, right-
click on the object and select in the context menu the "Audio and waveform
display" > "Video/audio on separate tracks". Audio and video objects will then
be shown separately, grouped with themselves on two tracks. Then, using the
"Ungroup" (view page 311) function in the "Edit" menu, or with the
corresponding button in the arranger, the objects can be separated from one
another.
Now you can replace the audio or the video track, or process each file
separately. Re-join/regroup the tracks with the "Group" function.
96 Objects
Object handles
All objects can be re-sized with their lower edge “object handles”. Move the
mouse over one of the lower corners of the object until the mouse pointer
becomes a double arrow. Move the mouse over one of the lower corners of
the object until the mouse pointer becomes a stretch symbol.
5 "handles": Length, fade, transparency (volume)
An object can be faded in or out with the handles to the left and right upper
corners of the object. Cross-fades between different objects can be created by
overlapped positioning of objects that are fading in and out. The length of the
cross-fade can be adjusted with the handles.
Using the transparency/volume handle located centrally at the top of the
object, adjusts the transparency of video and Bitmap objects, or the volume of
audio and image objects.
If you adjust the middle handle of a video object all the way down, the object
will become transparent. If a second object is located on a track above it, a
black color will appear from below it, so that brightness will be reduced.
http://pro.magix.com
Objects 97
Object handles for combi objects
Combi objects have an additional, sixth handle.
The four outer handles have the same function as with regular objects.
The lower middle handle regulates the object's track volume.
The top middle handle controls the transparency of the object's image track.
Trim Objects
Trimming provides exact placement of object borders or transitions. MAGIX
Video Pro X4 has two different trimmers, and these can be opened using the
context menu for a video or image object.
General advice for operating both trim editors
http://pro.magix.com
Play functions: The trim window contains its own play functions that allow the
object to be played individually or in relation to the arrangement.
The right play button plays the arrangement normally. Replays can sometimes
appear shaky because the processor may be over-worked. Those frames that
the processor cannot calculate quickly enough are left out.
The middle play button plays the arrangement “frame by frame”, which means
no frames are left out. Depending on the processor load, playback may thus
be slower, but still smooth.
The left play button renders material before playing, i.e. the current settings
are calculated first and then exported. This method ensures a smoother
playback.
98 Objects
With the fast forward and rewind functions you can change the range start in
the timeline. This allows for complete control of transitions between two
videos.
Increments: A click on the arrow buttons in both trim editors moves the
handle or the material within an object exactly by one frame. With the Ctrl key
you can increase the frame rate gradually to 5 frames per mouse-click.
Object trimmer
A schematic display of the selected object and its handles can be found in the
center of the trimming window.
Fade in/out (4, 5): These buttons adjust the upper fade handles of an object.
Object content (3): Here you can move the video material to be played without
changing the object length.
Position (2): Moves the object on the track.
First frame/End fade-in (7): Toggles the left monitor between the first frame of
the object and the end of the transition.
Start fade-out/Last Frame (8): Toggles the right monitor between the start of
the transition and the last frame of the object.
Left/right arrow buttons (1, 6): Here you can adjust the lower object handles.
Next object/cut (9, 10): The buttons below and to the right skip to the
next/previous object and/or cut in the arranger. These buttons make it easy to
move and trim objects in the arrangement without having to leave the trimmer.
Keyboard Shortcut: Shift + N
http://pro.magix.com
Objects 99
Cut trimmer
A schematic display of the selected transition and its handles can be found at
the center of the trimming window.
Left arrow buttons (1): These buttons move the last frame of the first object
while adjusting the second. The length of the transition remains. The display
indicates the relative change in comparison with the starting situation when the
trimmer was opened.
Position (2): Moves the second object. The length of the transition is changed.
This corresponds with shifting an object in the arranger.
Object content (3): Moves the movie under the second object. The length of
the object and the object itself are not changed.
http://pro.magix.com
Crossfade (4): Changes the transition’s length between both objects. The
objects remain of equal length. The length can be numerically entered.
Middle arrow buttons (5): Shifts the existing transition. Both objects remain in
their positions, but the transition’s center point moves.
Transition (6): Displays the type of transition. A mouse click opens a popup
window from which you can select a transition.
Right arrow buttons (7): Move the first frame of the second object. The first
object and the transition remains. Only the length of the second object
changes.
Start fade-out/Last frame (8): Switches the left monitor between the start of
the transition and the last frame of the object.
100 Objects
http://pro.magix.com
First frame/End fade-in (9): Switches the right monitor between the first frame
of the following object and the end of the transition.
Next cut (10)/Next object (11): The buttons below and to the right skip to the
next/previous object and/or cut in the arranger. These buttons make it easy to
move and trim cuts in the arrangement without having to leave the trimmer.
Keyboard shortcut: N
Objects 101
Transitions (fades)
When importing video files into the arranger, individual objects usually follow
directly after one another. This is called a "hard cut". However, you can make
scenes blend or “transition” into each other.
This means that for the duration of a transition, two objects are shown at once
and can be mixed "faded" together in different ways. You will find numerous
blends in the Media Pool’s transition directory.
Simple crossfade
A simple transition can be created in the arranger by dragging one object over
another. A crossfade will be automatically created. During this standard
transition, the brightness of both objects is increased, i.e. the first clip fades
out while the second clip fades in. The duration of the crossfade is displayed in
the arranger by white crossing lines. You can adjust the length of the crossfade
by dragging the upper handle of the second object to the left or to the right.
http://pro.magix.com
To select a different fade click on the transition symbol displayed when an
object is selected.
The fade menu opens. The transition icon will change, depending on your
selection.
Fades from the Media Pool
To open the fade folder, click on the "Fades" button.
A double click on a file shows a fade preview.
Simply drag the desired fade onto the border between the two objects. Only
when the mouse pointer is placed over a scene change will it turn from a lock
symbol into an object symbol, i.e. you can place the fade at that position. The
object at the back will be shifted to the front to accommodate the transition.
The length of a transition is decided by you, if a transition is shortened, it
means that the resulting effect is speeded up.
102 Objects
http://pro.magix.com
Some transitions can be adjusted even more exactly. To do so, click on the
fade symbol again and select "Settings" at the bottom of the menu. Thus, a
fade symbol in the Media Pool can represent an entire group of different
effects.
The so-called alpha blends (in the "Shapes and objects", "Iris", "Random", etc.
subfolders) are pre-produced black-and-white videos, which can be used as
fades in combination with the alpha keying effect.
Other fades use sound effects. Look around at all the contents to form an idea
of what you can use in future projects.
Note: Use transitions economically! Most professional movies or TV shows use
hard cuts as the rule and transitions less frequently. Videos appear
unprofessional and too ornate if fade effects are added to every change of
scene.
Custom fades with alpha keying
You can add additional transition effects to MAGIX Video Pro X4 by producing
videos containing a transition from black to white in any which way. You can
create such a video from any (including color) video material by exporting it as
a fade ("File" > "Export movie" > "Export as fade").
The loaded movie is then exported as a black and white video in mxv format
and stored in the fade directory. It will be available in the Media Pool and in the
fade menu.
3D fades
General
3D effects offer exciting and varied opportunities to create transitions between
two videos. You can find 3D effects under "Fades" > "Spatial fades" in Media
Pool.
Settings
The fade settings enable the behavior and appearance of the 3D fades to be
influenced. Click the corresponding fade symbol for the object and choose
"Settings" to do this.
You have the following options:
Objects 103
http://pro.magix.com
Anti-Aliasing: A bothersome jagged edge sometimes appears on the borders
of 3D objects. Anti-aliasing reduces this effect, but also requires more
computer power. The setting applies globally to all 3D fades, switching on anti-
aliasing during 3D fades has the effect that all other 3D fades are also affected
by this setting.
Mirror X / Y: You can change the movement trajectory of 3D objects inside the
fade. The option "X-axis mirror" mirrors the movement of the object horizontally
(along the X-axis). The option "Y-axis mirror" mirrors the movement of the
object vertically (along the Y-axis).
3D series
The 3D series are a further development of 3D fades (view page 102), where
the transitions are thematically sorted. For instance, you can let photos pop up
and disappear on a notice board or make it look as if the photos were hung on
the walls of a gallery.
You have the following options to open 3D sequences for photos or scene
transitions:
In Media Pool, click on "Fades" > "Spatial Fades" > "3D Sequences". Select
the desired 3D series and drag it onto the first scene or image transition where
the 3D series should start.
You can select how many of the subsequent fades should be replaced by the
3D series in the dialog.
Search for gaps
MAGIX Video Pro X4 enables you to locate gaps between objects where no
image material is located. This hinders unintentional black spots from
appearing. This option is located under "Edit -> Find gaps". A corresponding
dialog opens.
Optimize view: Zooms to the selected gap.
Mark gap as range: Spans a section over the selected gap.
Edit selected gaps: The selected settings are applied but no additional action
is taken.
Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + C
104 Objects
Simple cut
All objects can be split. Each object section then becomes a completely
independent object.
First, select the object to be split.
Position the playback marker at the position where the movie is to be cut.
Click on the "cut" button or select the "cut" option in the "Edit" menu,
or just press "T" on the keyboard.
In order to combine these split objects again later, simply select the individual
parts and then choose the command "Form group" to join the selected objects
together into a group.
Note: If the commands "Split" and "Remove beginning/end" are applied
without a selection, all objects at the position of the playback marker are cut.
Tip: You can find detailed step-by-step instructions, on how to remove
unusable scenes from video material in the "Quick start" chapter on the print
manual.
Two-point cut
Two-point cut makes importing files easy in order to insert new material at
certain positions quickly into complex projects. One point is placed in the
arranger and another is placed in source monitor, and these are used in either
of the following variations:
Variation 1: Source in/destination in
The point in the arranger specifies the location where the new material should
be inserted into the project ("destination in") and the point in the source
monitor where the new material should be inserted ("source in").
Place the playback marker at the position in the arranger where the new
material should be inserted.
http://pro.magix.com
Objects 105
Click in the program monitor on
the button in the transport control
for the start of the section (in
point).
Double click the desired file in the Media Pool to load it into the source
monitor.
Find the position in the source monitor where the material should be inserted.
Click the button in the source's
monitor's transport control for the
start of the section (in point).
Note: To insert the complete material, an in point doesn't need to be inserted
into the source monitor. Source in will now be the start of the source material.
Select the insert mode "Overview (view page 44)" to overwrite the
material in the arranger behind the in point.
Or use one of the two ripple modes (single-track ripple or multi-
track ripple (view page 43)) in order to cut the material at the
position of the in point and move it to back.
"Overwrite" mode does not change the total length of the project. The new
material is only inserted at the position of the in point:
http://pro.magix.com
106 Objects
The ripple modes move the old material in the range together with the objects
behind it to the end of the inserted material. This changes the total length
according to the length of the object:
Variation 2: Destination in/destination out
This variation functions based on exactly the same principle, only instead of
setting in points in both monitors, out points are placed. The new material is
placed in the arranger prior to the out point in this way. This variation enables
you to work from back towards the front to define the scene transition.
3-point editing
The three-point editing is an insert process that operates based on three
reference points. This functions in three variations, which will now be explained
in more detail.
Variation 1: Destination in/destination out/source in
This variation defines a range in the arranger where the new material will be
inserted.
Initially, the program monitor is used to set an in and out point to stretch out a
range in the arranger.
A third point is then set in the source monitor to define the beginning ("source
in") of the material to be inserted.
Finally, the range in the arranger is filled with the new material. The new
material is cut automatically at the end of the range.
Variation 2: Destination in/destination out/source out
This variation functions similar to variation 1, with the difference that the point
in the source monitor is not the beginning, but rather the end of the new scene
("source out"). This means that the scene transition at the end is specified and
the new material moves into the front of the range. The new material is cut
automatically at the start of the range.
http://pro.magix.com
Objects 107
Variation 3: Source in/source out/destination in
This variation defines a range in the new material that should be inserted at a
certain position in the arranger.
Initially, a range is spanned out in the source material via an in and an out
point in the source monitor.
A third point is specified in the program monitor which defines the beginning of
the material to be inserted.
Finally, the range from the source monitor is inserted completely at the
position of the in point.
Variation 1 is illustrated according to this precise step-by-step illustration:
In the arrangement, determine an area that corresponds to the time window
and position of the video to be imported (destination in/out).
Tip: For the sake of clarity, it's recommended at the start to cut the material
within the range and then to drag is backwards or to delete it from the range
so that a gap is present.
http://pro.magix.com
Load the new material that you want to display inside the range by double
clicking in the source monitor.
Position the playback cursor in the
source monitor at the start position
where the video should be
imported into the arrangement
(source in).
If you want to cut at the scene
end, set the playback cursor in the
source monitor at the position
where the end of the scene should
be and click the button for the end
of the range (source out).
108 Objects
Select the insert mode "Overview (view page 44)" to fill the
range in the arranger with the new material, replacing it with
the existing material.
Or use one of the two ripple modes (single-track ripple or
multi-track ripple (view page 43)) in order to cut the material at
the start of the range and move it to the end of the range.
"Overwrite" mode does not change the total length of the project. The new
material is only inserted at the start of the specified range:
The ripple function moves the material in the range together with the objects
behind. This changes the total length according to the length of the range:
Four-point editing
The four-point editing places new material into the project with the help of a
total of four marker points.
The motto: "whatever doesn't fit will be made to fit". A range is set in both the
source material as well as in the project, and one of the insert modes
described above is used. The function is the same for each mode (overwrite
and ripple): the section from the source material is inserted precisely into the
range specified in the arranger.
If both ranges are coincidentally the same size (which is normally the
exception), then the new material will be stretched or pinched automatically.
The playback speed of the video is changed analog to the timestretching
applied to the audio track.
http://pro.magix.com
Objects 109
Because timestretching for an audio track is only possible and sensible to a
certain degree, the audio is removed from larger changes (above a factor of 2).
A corresponding confirmation dialog appears first so that the procedure may
also be canceled when in doubt, e.g. to carry out a three-point cut.
Zoom
The video image of both monitors
can be enlarged or minimized with
the help of the zoom buttons.
Note: This zoom applies only to the
current display on the corresponding
monitor and will not be applied as a
video effect.
Working in fullscreen mode
You can enlarge the monitor displays using the context menu (right click) until
they reach fullscreen size. A double click on a monitor automatically enlarges it
to a fullscreen display. This comes into use (view page 150) especially during
effect animation.
http://pro.magix.com
To display the Media Pool effects in fullscreen, right-click on the video image
and select in the context menu the "Edit video effects" option.
110 Markers
Markers
In MAGIX Video Pro X4 you can set various types of markers within your
project.
The Lock button (at the very front, next to the time ruler) lets you
lock all markers (jump markers, chapter markers) against accidental
moving or deleting.
Playback marker
The playback marker indicates the point from which the
material – either the arrangement or a selected file from the
Media Pool – will be played back. There is a playback marker
below each preview monitor and an additional one above the
timeline in the arranger.
The playback marker is displayed as a red triangle below the monitors. In the
arranger it is displayed as a red triangle.
In order to move the playback marker, simply double click on the desired area
below the monitor. Alternatively, you can click on the playback marker and
move it by dragging it with the mouse. While being moved, the current image
will appear on the monitor, letting you see exactly where in the material you are
located.
The playback marker in the video monitor can also be moved by clicking on the
lower section of the time scale in the arranger. The playback marker will also
be moved on the program monitor, as both markers are coupled to each other.
The exact position of the playback marker can be seen in the time display at
the top left, below the corresponding monitor. There, you can change the
displayed values (Hour:Minute:Second:Frame) per mouse click to reach a
certain point in time. Simply enter the desired value and the playback marker
will jump to the corresponding position.
Tip: In the "Playback" tab under "File -> Settings -> Program", you can set
whether repeatedly pressing the space bar resets the playback marker to the
current position or moves it to the original position.
http://pro.magix.com
Markers 111
Project markers
The "Edit" menu or the keyboard shortcut "Shift + numerical keys 1-0 (0 for the
tenth marker) allow you to set a project marker (view page 313) at the current
position of the playback marker. They function as a mental marker or indicate
certain positions or events within the project.
After selecting the menu item, a dialog appears to input a name for the marker
to be created. The first ten project markers may be accessed via Ctrl + number
keys 1-0. This allows you to jump to a particular position of a longer video
immediately, without scrolling and searching.
Project markers may be deleted or renamed via the context menu at any time.
This does not provide direct influence on the result, but they do make the
workflow much easier.
Ranges (in and out points)
Range markers are the "in points" (range start) and "out points" (range end).
They mark a certain range for playback that can be viewed by pressing the
"Range Playback" button at the bottom of the corresponding monitor.
http://pro.magix.com
To the left, you can see an in point (range start), and an out point is visible
(range end) to the right
Hint: The value between both markers shows the length of the selected area
according to the pattern Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames.
There are various options for changing the playback range, and with it the
project start and end markers.
Set the playback marker at the desired position and press "Set start of range
(in-point)" or "Set end of range (out-point)" underneath the monitor to set the
in and out points of the range.
Click on one of the markers below the preview monitor and move it with the
held-down mouse key to the desired position.
Click one of the markers in the upper-most bar in the arranger and drag it.
112 Markers
A right click on the bar moves the range end to the position of the mouse
cursor. A left click moves the start of the range. The area grows or shrinks in
size correspondingly.
You can adjust the position of the entire range by clicking the blue bar
between the markers and moving it by dragging while holding down the Crtl
button.
Range markers in the source monitor
You can set the in and out points in the source monitor in the following
manner:
Set the playback marker at the desired position and press the "Set range start
(in point)" or "Set range end (out point)" buttons below the monitor to define
the start and end points of your range.
Click on one of the markers below the monitor and move it to the desired
position by dragging it.
The position of the entire range can be changed by clicking on the blue bar
between the two markers with the Ctrl button held down and moving the bar.
For the exact functions of the range markers in the source monitor, please read
the section "Loading ranges from longer film files (view page 93)".
Chapter markers
The chapter marker defines the start of a new chapter. Chapters
serve to improve navigation when burning the project to disc (view
page 231).
The following options are provided via "Edit -> Marker" or by right-clicking on
the playback marker.
Set chapter markers
Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This
creates a chapter entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being
burned to disc.
You can rename the chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename".
The new name will appear in the chapter menu (view page 213).
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Enter
http://pro.magix.com
Markers 113
Set chapter markers automatically
This option automatically sets chapter markers in the arrangement according
to specific rules that will then appear in the film menu of a disc as chapters.
This is useful if a disc should be burned immediately after recording.
There is a selection of options available for automatic chapter generation:
http://pro.magix.com
At beginning of movie: The movie only contains one chapter in this case.
At beginning of object in track: Every object in a track creates a chapter; track
1 is preset.
At position of existing title objects: Subtitles, for instance, as faded-in
subheadings, give the position of the chapter markers.
Specified interval (minutes)/Specified amount: If the chapters are separated
without any particular method and are just needed for quicker navigation,
chapter markers may also be inserted in pre-defined intervals or as a pre-
defined number of chapter markers.
Naming of chapter markers: To title the chapter markers, a user-defined name
featuring consecutive numbers or the object name or text from the text objects
may be used.
114 Markers
Optionally, existing chapter markers may be deleted and the automatic chapter
marker function may be limited to the area between the start and end markers.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + Enter
Delete chapter markers/delete all chapter markers
Delete one or all chapter markers. This removes chapter entries in the disc
menu if the film is burned to disc.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + Enter
Scene markers
Scene markers separate a complete video into scenes. You can load any video
into MAGIX Video Pro X4 and have it divided into scenes.
Simply drag the desired video into the arranger. Next, right click on the video
and select "Scene recognition". The following dialog will appear:
After clicking "Start search", an overview of the detected scenes will be
displayed underneath the scene control.
Delete scene marker: Delete individual markers from the list as required.
Delete all markers: Deletes all project markers.
http://pro.magix.com
Multicam editing 115
Action on OK: This provides three options. Either MAGIX Video Pro X4 splits
your video into individual scenes ("Cut at all markers"), a scene is selected and
cut only at this position ("Cut at selected marker"), or all scenes are added to
the project folder.
After deciding in favor of one of these options, red scene markers
will appear on the timeline in the arranger. The scenes can then be
split according to the selected option and edited.
Note: An important difference between a scene and a chapter marker is that a
scene marker can be set only within a continuous video, while a chapter
marker may include several consecutive videos.
Additional information about scene recognition is provided in the chapter "Edit
objects (view page 274)".
Shortcut for scene recognition: Shift + Z
Multicam editing
Multicam editing enables easy cutting of various recordings of the same scene
from different camera perspectives. The preview monitor displays image
material from up to nine sources in sequence, from which the "program" can
be cut in real-time using your mouse, just like in a real studio.
http://pro.magix.com
Preparation
Multicam editing is a special arranger mode. The top two tracks serve as target
tracks; sound and video may copied from up to nine different source tracks.
The two top tracks must be empty when switching to "Multicam" mode, since
otherwise existing objects will be moved to a different track.
Next, load various video recordings of the same scene one under the other
starting on track 3 in the arranger.
It is important that the individual sources are synchronized to each other
exactly. It is best to find a noticeable movement, or a prominent sound, if audio
was recorded.
116 Multicam editing
Note: To localize the sound in the audio track exactly, you may have to create
a wave display of the track. Right click on the sound track and choose "Create
wave form display".
You can use a clapperboard during filming, since this offers both sound and
motion; an actor's clapping in front of running camera before the start of the
scene is also helpful. Set a grid point at this position in the object ("Alt + Shift +
P"). You can now move the source objects over each other so that the grid
points are aligned.
Two video sources with sound tracks may be synchronized automatically via
their audio material. To do this, use the "Align with other audio objects (view
page 119)" function in the audio objects context menu.
It is also important that you make all effect settings for the output material (e.g.
video or audio cleaning) before the multicam edit on the objects on the source
track and on the master audio track (view page 118). These effects will be
transferred to the objects in the target track with the edit. Otherwise, you will
have to apply the effects from every single object to the target track.
You can activate "Multicam" mode with this button or with the
"Multicam" command in the "Edit" menu.
Source tracks and preview images
The assignment of tracks as source tracks for the multicam cut takes place
automatically. A maximum of 9 tracks may be used as source at the same
time. When the multicam mode is activated, the source tracks will be assigned
to all tracks containing video objects starting from track 3.
You can also conduct or change the assignment manually. To do so, right click
on the trackbox of the corresponding track to active or deactivate a track as a
source track.
http://pro.magix.com
Multicam editing 117
The source tracks are marked using color. This can be accomplished by users
if more than 9 source tracks are used.
For every assigned track, a preview appears in the source monitor, and the
frame's color corresponds to the color of the track, letting you assign each
preview image to the corresponding track.
If the objects created using multicam cut are located on the target track, a
preview image of the corresponding source track highlighted with a yellow
frame will be shown for length of playback.
Multicam edit functions
You can edit various sources in the the target track during playback in real time
or during stopped playback.
Real-time Multicam editing
You can edit various sources together during playback in real time:
http://pro.magix.com
Start playback.
Click on the desired source in the preview monitor. The corresponding video is
added into the target track starting from this time point.
To switch the source, click in the source monitor on another source. A new
object will be created using the new source from this point in the target track.
You can repeat this process as often as you like.
For precise editing in the target track, use the usual edit functions or the
Trimmer. Keep in mind that as long as you are in Multicam mode, only the
object borders are moved, and not the objects themselves. Otherwise, gaps or
image jumps could form while you use the Multicam edit function again later.
118 Multicam editing
http://pro.magix.com
Replacing an object's source
Replacing an object's video material in the target track with another source:
Select the object for which the source is to be replaced in the target track.
Click the source you want to replace the video material with in the source
monitor object.
The video material will now be replaced by the new source. The project length
is not changed.
Insert cut
Insert material from one of the sources between any position on the target
track and the next object.
Place the playback marker at the desired position.
Click on the desired source in the preview monitor.
The material from this source will now be inserted into the target track. The
new object ends at the next object. The portion below an existing object is
overwritten in the process.
Overwrite range
You can overwrite a selected area of the target track with one of the source
videos.
At the upper edge of the arranger, select an area to edit by determining the in
point by clicking and the out point by right clicking. Or use the corresponding
buttons in the transport control.
Click on the desired source in the source monitor.
The target track will be overwritten with the video material from the selected
source in the selected area.
Master audio track
Normally, videos in the source track are edited together with their audio tracks.
Since the original sound can differentiate from camera to camera due to
different camera positions, you will probably prefer using either the soundtrack
from only one camera for all settings, or to replace the soundtrack completely
(for music videos, for example, you will use the studio version of the original
track).
Right click on the track box of one of the source audio tracks or a different
audio track and select "Multicam: Master audio track" from the context menu
Multicam editing 119
http://pro.magix.com
to assign a master audio track for multicam editing. The master audio track will
be appear in a dark color.
Now, during every multicam cut, material from the master audio track will be
inserted on track 2, independent of the source track used.
Synchronize video objects using the sound track
Video objects can be synchronized using their sound tracks. For this, their
soundtracks are compared for similarities. If videos come from the same
recording environment, the same acoustic events will be found on their
soundtracks (e.g. clapping the clapper board).
Synchronization of multiple objects on one track is possible. First, on the
reference track, select all audio objects that are to act as reference positions.
Then, on another track, select all audio objects that should be moved.
Select the "Align other audio objects on this track" function from the audio
object context menu.
Note: If the desired audio track is found in a combi object, you can find the
"Align other audio objects on this track" option in the sub menu of the "Audio
in waveform" function.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 attempts to locate the acoustic events in the reference
objects of the second track and to move these to the corresponding position.
Because the audio objects in your video objects are grouped or comprise a
common object, videos will be synchronized with them.
120 Title
Title
Titles can be used for many applications: as a running text (ticker), subtitles,
speech and thought bubbles, to display date and time, and much more.
Creating titles using a template
The Media Pool includes the tab "Title" with folders filled with additional,
thematically named title templates.
Open one of these entries and select any title template. By double clicking,
you will se a preview. You can drag the titles as usual into the timeline with the
mouse key held down.
Note: Templates may be applied to an existing title object. The text remains,
while all formatting is discarded.
Create titles without a template
Here's how to produce a title without a template:
Place the playback marker at the position where the title should appear.
Try clicking the "General" entry under "Title" in the Media Pool.
Click in the program monitor at the location where the title should be
positioned.
Next, simply enter the text via your keyboard.
After the desired text has been entered, click the check mark in the program
monitor to confirm this.
You can format your title later via the title editor in the Media Pool.
http://pro.magix.com
Title 121
They can be displayed in
all kinds of fonts and
colors.
If you want to format
individual words or
letters, select them with
the mouse and choose a
different format or color.
Without any selection,
the entire text will be
formatted.
You can open the title editor by pressing "T".
Edit titles retroactively
Double click on a title in the program monitor (or the title object while in
"timeline" mode).
Now change the text however you like.
Confirm your entry by clicking the check mark next to the positioning frame.
http://pro.magix.com
Position titles
Click in the program monitor once on the title to access the positioning frame.
Simply move the positioning frame via drag & drop.
The size of the positioning frame may be adjusted via the corners, and the size
of the text will also change accordingly.
122 Title
Click once on the button in the Media Pool under "Title ->
General" to center the title horizontally or vertically in the monitor.
Advanced settings
Only use visible TV area: The text will be zoomed so that it will always be
within the TV's limits, which is specified in the Movie effect settings (view page
164).
Background: Specify here whether the text's background should appear black
or white. This is only meaningful if no other video or image object is in the
background.
Text effects: Here you can edit different text effects in detail. One color may be
set for each effect.
Shadow: The position of the shadow may be set on the horizontal and vertical
axes.
Transparency makes the background "shine through" more or less.
Soften: Makes the edge of the shadow harder or softer.
Outline: A border appears around the letters in the text.
Width: You can enter the width of the frame in points.
Color: Clicking on this button opens a color selection dialog, where you can
set the frame color.
http://pro.magix.com
Title 123
Filled in: The text will be filled with the color selected in the Title Editor. If the
option is deactivated, only the frame will be visible, and the background will
appear instead of the color fill.
3D: The text appears with a 3D-style outline. The width and thickness of the
3D contour (H) can be set in points.
3D text
3D text can be created directly from the title editor.
Click the title editor and then press the 3D Title button.
The title object will now be turned into a MAGIX 3D Maker object. If you have
also installed MAGIX 3D Maker, the program will open for you to work on the
text. Presets are also located in the Media Pool under "Titles -> 3D". You can
enter or edit text here.
Note: For more information about MAGIX 3D Maker, read its Help file. You can
open it by pressing "F1" from within the program.
Fade in date as title
http://pro.magix.com
MAGIX Video Pro X4 is also able to insert the time and date into the image
material. To do this, select the option "Show date as title" in the video object's
context menu.
If a DV-AVI file is involved (e.g. a digital recording from a camcorder), then the
recording date for the selected position will be used. If another type of file is
involved, then the creation date of the file will be used as the timecode.
Following this, the title editor will appear to adjust the information.
The context menu of the program monitor also features the option "Show
playing time". This also creates a timecode.
124 Effects
Effects
MAGIX Video Pro X4 offer a large palette of various video effects. The video
effects used the most can be found directly in the Media Pool, while others can
be found in the object context menu or in the "Effects" menu.
Apply effects to objects
There are various approaches for applying effects:
Video and audio effect presets are loaded into the corresponding object from
the Media Pool using drag & drop.
Effects that can be animated (in the Media Pool under "Effects -> Video effects
/ movement effects") will be applied directly to the objects selected
beforehand as soon as changes are made in Media Pool.
This button resets all of the current effect settings.
Note: If you animated the effect using keyframes, resetting will affect the entire
animation. Individual keyframes may be deleted via click + Del (view page 152).
Transfer effects settings
The items video effects (view page 128), movement effects (view page 138),
and Stereo 3D (view page 166) on all effects pages provide the option to
transfer the current effects settings to other objects or to load previously saved
settings. Use the above right arrow button to open the video effects menu.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 125
Save/load video effects: The current effects settings may be saved for later
use in other projects or previously saved settings may be loaded. A dialog
allows the effects to be selected.
Reset video effects: Resets the effects settings for the selected object.
Copy/paste video effects: Copies or inserts the current settings as a new
object. Use the dialog to select which settings should be copied.
Apply video effects to all: Copies the current effects settings to all objects in
the arrangement. Use the dialog to specify which settings should be copied.
Apply video effects to all the following objects: Copies the current effects
settings to all of the following objects in the arrangement. Use the dialog to
specify which settings should be copied.
Load effects mask (in the Plus version): An effects mask may be loaded for a
selected object.
Comparison image in the source monitor
When editing effects in video and image objects, MAGIX Video Pro X4 offers a
comparison mode which lets you compare the before and after state directly.
http://pro.magix.com
Selected object without effects: Outside of effects pages, the object is
displayed completely without effects; inside effects pages, the object is
displayed without effects from the current effects page. The "Color" effects
page remains open and all of the effects except "Color" are applied. This
options synchronizes the playback marker between the program and the
source monitor.
Selected object: The selected object is displayed with all of the applied
effects. The playback marker may be moved along the arrangement, for
example to compare the beginning with the end of an edited object. This
option synchronizes the playback marker between the program and source
monitor.
Before selected object: Displays the object before the selected object in the
same track. This enables the edited effects on sequential objects to be
compared more easily.
126 Effects
http://pro.magix.com
Following the selected object: The object located on the same track after the
selected object is displayed for comparison in the source monitor. This enables
edited effects on sequential objects to be compared more easily.
Select object...: Clicking selects the desired object. An object may therefore
be edited and then used as a reference for the following effects processes, for
example.
Remove comparison image: The comparison image is removed from the
source monitor.
Note: Program settings (view page 260) enables you to activate "Comparison
image in source monitor for editing effects in the Media Pool". If this option is
activated, the "Selected objects without effects" comparison mode will be
automatically activated when switching into the Media Pool effects, and will be
automatically deactivated when the mode is exited. This serves to compare the
original and edited image.
This automation will be suppressed if the option is deactivated.
Preview rendering
You may also instruct MAGIX Video Pro X4 to render specific sections that you
have almost finished editing. This is especially useful in case smooth playback
is not possible due to the applied effects and transitions. The advantage versus
the option "Combine audio and video" in the "Edit" menu is that all of the
objects will be maintained in the arrangement. The rendered material will only
be played in the background when the playback marker reaches the
corresponding position.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 offers two options:
It can automatically indicate all sections that can be rendered.
Or, alternatively, you can indicate the section that should be pre-rendered
manually.
Note: The format that is used to render may be set via "File -> Settings ->
Preview rendering (view page 268)".
Automatic preview rendering
When using automatic preview rendering, you don't have to think about which
sections could be affected. MAGIX Video Pro X4 analyzes your computer's
Effects 127
performance and determines which sections can be considered for preview
rendering.
To perform automatic preview rendering, proceed as follows:
Step 1: Click on preview rendering button above the track header next to the
timeline.
<MAGIX Video Pro X4 will then analyze which sections should be pre-
rendered. A dialog will appear, indicating how many areas have been located.
These sections will be additionally marked in the MAGIX Video
Pro X4 timeline using red bars.
Step 2: Select "Yes" in the dialog to start preview rendering. If you choose
"No" instead, you can still conduct preview rendering later.
http://pro.magix.com
The red bars will appear green after preview rendering is over. If you make
changes in the pre-rendered section, it will appear red again and will have to
be updated (view page 128).
Manual preview rendering
In manual preview rendering you first have to identify the problem-prone
section.
Step 1: First, place an in and out point
above the range to be rendered.
128 Effects
Step 2: Click on the preview rendering button and select "Start preview
rendering..." in the context menu.
A preview rendering dialog will appear.
Step 3: Select "Range".
The preselected range will now be rendered.
After rendering, a green line appears
in the timeline to symbolize that this
range has been rendered.
As with automatic rendering, the section will remain green as long as no further
changes are made to it. The green line will then turn red and can be updated
again.
Update preview rendering
Preview rendering is effective only as long as no changes are made to the pre-
rendered area. You can recognize a pre-rendered area from the green bars
appearing above it on the timeline. As soon as an object in the section has
been edited, the green bar will turn red. You can update this section at any
time.
1. To do so, place the playback marker inside the section to be updated.
2. Click on the "Preview rendering" button.
3. In the preview rendering dialog, select "Range" in order to update just the
section selected by the playback marker. If you select "All", all non-
rendered (red) sections will be rendered.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 129
Video effects in the Media Pool
Video effects in the Media Pool can always be opened independently from the
selection of an object.
The program monitor displays the starting image of the video. The playback
marker enables you to jump to a specific position in the video in order to check
the results of the effects by starting and stopping playback.
Brightness & contrast
Auto-exposure: This button automatically optimizes the exposure, contrast,
and color with a few clicks. The other settings options in the dialog provide
more precise results.
http://pro.magix.com
Brightness/Contrast: Use the sliders to increase or reduce the brightness and
the contrast of the picture.
Gamma: "Gamma" specifies the mean gray value provided by the various color
ranges. In the preset list, select various envelope curves to edit only the dark,
median, or brightest areas of the image.
The fader also sets the intensity of the brightening or darkening.
130 Effects
Color
White point: An incorrect white balance can lead to an unnatural blue or red
hue. Instructions: To use the white balance, click on on the button to the right
of the label "White balance" and then select a point which represents white or
a neutral gray to the "outside world". The color temperature is then corrected
automatically.
Tip: Interesting color effects can be achieved by setting a color other than
white. There is definitely room for experimentation!
Red Eye Removal: Using this photo function you can remove unnatural red
eyes that are the result of using a flash. Click on the eye symbol and then
select the red pupils in the preview monitor using the mouse.
Saturation: Use the saturation slider to increase or reduce the hue proportions
in the image. A newly developed algorithm is applied which makes color
changes related to other parameters (for example contrast settings) in order to
achieve the most natural coloration possible. With some experimenting, you
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 131
can achieve some amazing results – such as turning summer images into
autumnal pictures, or creating funky pop art...
Hue: Select a color for coloring the image from the color chart.
Red/Green/Blue: Changes the color portion mix using the slide controller.
Color correction
The "Highs", "Mids" and "Shadows" ranges can be adjusted individually.
Note: Before using complex color correction, you should first check if
"Brightness/Contrast" and "Color" functions can help you.
http://pro.magix.com
By turning the mouse wheel, the work area of each color wheel can be
increased or decreased.
Color angle: Determines the color on the color wheel, which the image should
be colored with in each brightness area.
Shortcuts: Shift + mouse wheel above each color wheel
Correction level: Sets the intensity of the coloration of each brightness range.
132 Effects
Shortcuts: Ctrl + mouse wheel above each color wheel
Saturation: This lets you set the color saturation for the corresponding
brightness range.
Edit color ranges individually
Secondary color correction allows individual colors in video and image objects
to be adjusted. This includes essentially two layers, the fore and background.
The master layer may also be used to influence the overall image.
The foreground layer corresponds with the mask created, and editing in the
background changes all of the areas outside of this mask. The mask may be
assigned to a certain color or to multiple colors simultaneously.
To open color correction, click the video or image object and open the entry
"Color correction" via "Video effects" in the Media Pool.
"Add" allows a color to be selected with
the pipette tool to create a mask. MAGIX
Video Pro X4 displays the mask in black
and white stripes to highlight the current
selection.
Click with the pipette tool on the
color in the program monitor that
you would like to add to the
current layer until your selection
is complete.
Unwanted colors can be
removed from the selection again
by selecting "Remove" and
clicking the corresponding color.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 133
Select the layers (fore and
background) to edit.
Shadows, mid tones and
highlights of the selected color
and level may now be edited
separately (view page 131) in
the normal way.
A classic example: Saturation of
all brightness areas on the
background layer is reduced,
and colors in the foreground are
adjusted as desired.
Chroma key
http:/
This section contains the mixing effects for chroma keying used to mix
together a foreground and a background video to create an overlay effect.
/
pro.magix.com
134 Effects
http://pro.magix.com
Note: The background video must be present in the track above the object for
the foreground! For example, track 1: background, track 2: foreground
Stamp: The currently selected object is "stamped" onto the video on the track
above the object. This is only possible if the bottom video takes up only a part
of the image, as otherwise only the bottom (currently selected) video would be
visible. Normally, the object should be reduced or moved first. This is done
with the help of the "SIze/Position" (view page 138) effect or via the submenu
"Section" in "Effects -> Video object effects".
Color: Select the range with the color that should be transparent in the video
monitor. The video is made transparent in the areas featuring this color, and
the video on the top track can be seen "through" these areas.
Mix: This button mixes the two videos together. Brighter areas accumulate and
quickly seem white; darker areas have less of an effect on the result.
Green/blue/black/white: All green/blue/black/white areas of the video below
appear transparent. This studio-style effect makes it possible to "place" a
person who has been recorded in front of a blue (or green, white or black)
background into any type of landscape or background.
Alpha: This video effect uses the brightness of a video to control a cross-
fading effect between two other videos on neighboring tracks. The additional
videos should be arranged directly above and below the alpha-keying object.
In all black parts of the alpha-keying object, the top video is faded in, while in
all white passages the bottom video is shown. Gray passages are permeable
for both videos and create a mixture of the two. In the case of colored
passages, the brightness of the color is used for control purposes.
Water: Only the contours of the upper video are mixed, which results in a sort
of water effect.
Video level: The video level essentially changes the brightness of the video
before other video effects are applied. This can have significant influence on
the effects, especially in case of chroma keying. The level setting may be
automated so that two videos mix dynamically with each other. Read more
about this in the chapter "Animating objects (view page 150)".
Effects 135
Art filter
Erosion: The image is broken-up by means of small rectangles and resembles
a "patchwork".
Dilate: This works like erosion, but uses light surfaces instead of dark ones to
form the rectangle.
Emboss creates a relief of the image edges, in which case strong contrast
differences are interpreted as edges.
http://pro.magix.com
Substitution: Using the rainbow scale red, green, and blue components are
exchanged. Quickly create surreal landscapes or a green face!
Move: The color values are inverted increasingly. Blue colors turn red, and
green appears purple.
Quantize: Depending on the setting, colors are either rounded up or down so
that the overall number of colors is reduced. This creates interesting grids and
patterns.
Colorize: Using this slider, color in the video with red, green, and blue colors
(the basic TV colors).
Contour: The image is reduced to its contours in two sizes (3 x 3 or 5 x 5). It is
possible to select either vertical or horizontal contours.
136 Effects
Distortion
Motion: Moving parts of the image are enhanced and warped.
Echo: The moving images create an optical "echo"; previous images stand still
and gradually turn paler until they completely disappear.
Whirlpool: The image is twisted into an "S" shape.
Fisheye: The perspective is distorted as if the image were viewed through a
fisheye lens.
Mosaic: The video is depicted as a mosaic.
Lens: The image is dynamically distorted at the edges.
Sand: The image is depicted in a granulated manner.
Kaleidoscope: The left upper corner is mirrored horizontally and vertically.
Mirror horizontal/vertical center: The object is mirrored vertically or
horizontally – it appears on its side or upside down.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 137
Sharpness
Sharpen: The fader allows you to regulate the level of image sharpness or
apply a soft filter.
Apply to: Allows you to set just how much the sharpness settings should be
applied to surfaces or to edges. This enables you to effectively reduce ongoing
image distortions (noise).
Artistic blur: Here you can apply various soft filters. The achieved effects are
much stronger compared to simply sliding the controller under "Sharpen".
Tip: Artificial blur achieves good effects when used for transitions. To do so,
you can animate (view page 150) the first video so that it is strongly blurred
and let the second video begin with blur and slowly return to normal focus.
Speed
http://pro.magix.com
The playing speed can be adjusted with the slider control. The range between
0 and 1 plays the video slowly; values above 1 accelerate playback. If playing
138 Effects
speed is increased, the object length in the arranger is automatically
shortened.
Note: You can also set keyframes (view page 150) in order to adjust the speed
of certain segments of a video. The corresponding audio material will be
adjusted in accordance with the video.
Frame rate: Here you can set the video's frame rate directly. Changing it
directly affects the speed factor, while moving the slider conversely results in
changing video frame rate.
Algorithm: Here you can determine how the soundtrack should be treated.
"Timestretching" changes the playback speed, without influencing the pitch:
"Resampling" changes the playback speed together with the pitch (the faster
the playback, the higher the pitch).
Reverse: With this button the playback direction will be reversed (with the
same tempo).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this option if your video is jerky as a
result of being slowed down. MAGIX Video Pro X4 then automatically fills in
missing frames so that your video can be played back smoother.
Movement effects in the Media Pool
Size/Position
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 139
http://pro.magix.com
Values in: Set whether the values are applied in percent or pixels.
Position
Left: Enter the start position from the left image border.
Top: Enter the start position from the top image border.
Center: Based on the current image size, the image starting points (left and
top) will be positioned so that they are centered.
Note: Negative values can, of course, also be entered. The image borders will
then be outside of the visible area.
Size
Width: Enter the width of the image.
Height: Enter the height of the image here.
Maximize: The image will be maximized according to the movie's resolution.
Set original size: The image will be scaled to its original size.
Keep proportions: This option makes sure that the image will not be stretched
or distorted. The proportions of width to height will remain the same.
Zoom
Use the zoom slider to enlarge the complete section proportionately (values
greater than 100) or to reduce it (values less than 100).
Note: When zooming, the image will be centered automatically, i.e. anchor
point = center point.
140 Effects
Section
Sections may be used to display only a portion of the image.
Note: In order to move the section with a movement effect across the image,
please refer to the following section "Camera/zoom".
The program monitor enables an image section to be specified. Use the eight
handles to reduce the frame displayed in the monitor and move it to the
desired position.
Preview: With this button you can preview how a segment will look
like in the movie. Click on this button a second time in order to keep
editing this segment.
Keep proportions: In this menu, you can select the format for the section. The
format of the original picture is used as the default.
Fill screen: If this check box is selected, the section will be zoomed to
fullscreen. If this option is deactivated, only the section of the image within the
frame will be displayed and the edge will remain black or filled with the object
behind it.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 141
Camera/zoom
With this effect, you can move a previously selected frame inside the image,
creating an impression of camera movement or zoom.
Movement in direction
Determine the direction in which the selected section or image
will move in the process during the time selected under "time
period". In addition to horizontal and vertical movements,
diagonal movements are also possible.
Preview: Displays a preview of the section at the playback marker location.
http://pro.magix.com
Zooming
Zoom out: The selected picture section is displayed and is then
zoomed out to display the entire picture according to the time set
in “Length of movement”. If no portion is previously set, a central
portion of 50% of the picture is set.
Zoom in: The entire picture is displayed and then zoomed in to
show only a smaller picture section according to the time set in
“Length of movement”. If no portion is previously set, a central
portion of 50% of the picture is set.
142 Effects
Duration
The option selected here sets the position where the keyframes of each
movement effect are set by default. You determine the positions where a
movements begins and ends.
Note: Automatically placed keyframes may be edited retroactively, and the
option will then be set to "Use custom settings". Read the section
"Retroactively editing an effect's keyframes" (view page 151) in the chapter
"Objects".
Reset: This option applies a static zoom to show the selected section
of the picture only.
The size and the position of the image can be roughly entered in the program
monitor by simply moving the image into it and dragging on the handles. The
frame of the video monitor with handles can also be moved with the keyboard.
Keyboard shortcuts for moving the edges of the frame that are visible in the
video monitor:
Nudge the screen 1 pixel: Arrow keys
Nudge the screen 5 percent: Shift + arrow keys
For animated movement effects, it often makes sense to zoom out of the video
monitor and use the resulting workspace to, for example, let a minimized
image or text object move through the picture.
Keyboard shortcuts for the preview picture:
Thumbnail zoom in/out: Ctrl + mouse wheel
Move thumbnail: Ctrl + left mouse button + drag
See the "Animation from outside of the image" (view page 155) section for
more detail.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 143
Rotation/Mirror
Rotation
http://pro.magix.com
Rotates the image on the horizontal axis.
Rotates the image on the vertical axis.
Rotates the image around its center point.
Straighten horizon
The image can be rotated around the axis via the slider. The image is
automatically zoomed to avoid black edges.
Show guidelines: Activating this check box displays a grid in the program
monitor for orientation during horizontal straightening.
144 Effects
Mirror/Rotate
Mirrors the image on the vertical axis.
Mirrors the image on the horizontal axis.
Rotates the image 90° clockwise.
Rotates the image 90° counterclockwise.
3D distortion
This enables the perspective of images to be distorted and moved. This
produces a 3D impression by causing several components of the image to
appear further in front of others.
Enter the individual corner points numerically or move them in the program
monitor using the mouse here.
Note: Compared to Stereo3D, this does not involve genuine 3D positioning.
The image is only distorted so that it appears three-dimensional on a normal
two-dimensional monitor.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 145
Stereo3D in the Media Pool
This accesses the program's Stereo 3D functionality. Please read the
corresponding chapter "Stereo3D". (view page 166)
Audio effects in the Media Pool
The Media Pool offers various opportunities to add effects to your audio
objects. Another advantage of this so-called "object-oriented" working method
is that automations are moved automatically with objects when they are
moved, since they are attached to the object and not to the track itself.
See the "Audio effects" (view page 174) section below for more detail.
General
http://pro.magix.com
Under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General", you will find audio effects that can
be animated using effects curves (view page 150). This means that certain
effect settings can be changed during playback.
Effect curves are always object related, i.e. they only apply to one object and
are moved or copied together with the object.
146 Effects
http://pro.magix.com
Note: The faders AUX 1 and AUX 2 control the volume at which the object's
signal is sent to the corresponding FX tracks in the mixer.
Audio Cleaning (view page 176), Echo/Reverb (view page 181), and
Timestrech/Resample can also be accessed here.
Note: Volume and balance curves are also present in the track. The set values
in the curve are also active, respectively.
Audio effect templates
Here you'll find a broad palette of effects settings which you can add to audio
objects via drag & drop.
Design elements in the Media Pool
You will find a wide selection of decorative elements in this category:
Templates for collages, color fields for backgrounds and test images and freely
positionable image objects for animations.
You should first look through all the options and take stock of what there is.
Open the categories one after the other to get a general impression.
An example of application can be found in pointer objects (Media Pool >
Effects > Design elements > Image objects > Present). These are various arrow
symbols, with an added video mix effect. With them, you can select certain
sections of the image.
The design elements create own objects on a different track. You can use the
lower handles to adjust the size of the borders to fit any length of the video.
You can also achieve interesting effects by fading in and out.
Note: Some design elements require track 6 to be empty. When using these,
you will be notified of this before applying them.
Effects 147
http://pro.magix.com
My Presets in the Media Pool
Your personal effects configurations in the Media Pool can be saved and
applied again later. You can reach these customized configurations in the
Media Pool folder "Effects > My Presets". They may be dragged onto objects
as usual.
First, this folder will be empty, of course, because you still have to create your
own configurations.
Additional Effects
Video effects plug-ins are additional programs from third-party developers that
may be used to add additional video effects to video objects. MAGIX Video Pro
X4 supports the plug-in format of the freeware video editing software
"VirtualDub", as well as the "VitaScene" and "Adorage" programs from
"proDAD". A selection of tested VirtualDub plug-ins (.vdf files, also called
VirtualDub filters) may be downloaded as an installer package directly from
within MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Important applications for plug-ins include the application of special effects
and useful video editing tools.
Using video effect plug-ins
In order to be able to use plug-ins, they must be installed first. MAGIX Video
Pro X4 checks whether plug-ins are already available. If not, it will offer to
download them from the Internet or to set the plug-in path manually.
In order to use a video effect plug-in, select the video or image object first,
then open "Effects -> Extra effects -> Plug-in manager" in the Media Pool
menu. This lists all available plug-ins on the right side of the dialog.
148 Effects
Video plug-ins manager
Effect templates for plug-ins: MAGIX Video Pro X4 does not include plug-ins
due to licensing reasons.
You can save your settings by pressing the "Save" button and
remove them by pressing "Delete".
Available plug-ins: All available plug-ins are listed here.
Add plug-in: The selected plug-in will be added to the editing chain ( "Plug-ins
on the current object" list on the right side of the dialog). You can load as
many plug-ins as you like simultaneously. They are then edited subsequently
according to the list sequence. The plug-in order can be changed using drag &
drop in the list.
Plug-in settings: Opens the settings dialog for the selected plug-in. All plug-in
settings for the entire list can be saved together as a preset (effect templates
for plug-ins).
Advanced...: Opens the dialog with advanced settings.
Navigation buttons: Switch to the previous or next movie via the navigation
buttons in the lower part of the dialog of a movie.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 149
Last used: The settings used for the last videos will be applied. This option is
active only if you edit one image after the next using navigation buttons (see
above).
OK: Settings will be applied to the current video.
Apply to all: Effects will be applied to all objects included in the movie.
Cancel: The dialog will close, settings will not be applied.
Advanced...
http://pro.magix.com
In the "Advanced" dialog, you can specify the search path for plug-ins. MAGIX
Video Pro X4 checks these for available plug-in files at program start and adds
these to the list of available plug-ins. "Add search path" adds new search
paths, and "Delete searchpath" removes them from the list again.
Check file extension: Accelerates the search for new plug-ins if a larger
number of plug-ins are available by not checking if they are valid.
Scan subfolders: Extends the search to subfolders below the selected paths.
Local settings
Recalculate video effect plug-in on bitmaps for each frame dynamically: If
you apply a plug-in to a bitmap (image), then this option must be activated in
case the plug-in creates moving effects.
150 Effects
Animate objects, effect curves
In the "Effects" tab under "Video effects" and "Movement effects" you can find
effects that can be animated with the help of keyframes.
The following objects can be animated:
Video objects
Image objects (still images)
Title objects
Audio objects (in the Media Pool under "Effects" > "Audio effects" > "General")
MAGIX 3D Maker objects (3D texts)
Preparing animations
First, select the object in the arranger to animate. For complex animations, we
recommend placing a marker beforehand for orientation.
In the Media Pool, open the "Effects" tab and click on the effect you would like
to animate under "Video effects" or "Movement effects".
If necessary, set up the effect however you would like it for the start of the
animation.
Using this button, at the bottom of the Media Pool, a timeline may be
shown or hidden. You can see here which animated effects are
currently applied to the selected object. Keyframes may be placed,
selected, moved, and deleted.
There are two stippled lines in the timeline
to help you orientate yourself while you
edit movement. These lines will help you
recognize the start or end of the transition.
Place keyframe
Click the timeline to set the playback marker at the locations where a keyframe
should be added.
Note: You can also use the timeline in the arranger for exact positioning. Using
project markers (view page 111) is recommended in this case.
This button places keyframes for all parameters required in the
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 151
animation.
Additional keyframes may be added simply by placing the playback marker at
the next keyframe location and changing the effects parameters directly.
The positioned keyframes may also be retroactively moved via drag & drop.
Copy keyframe
Select the keyframes to be copied by clicking them and then
press the "Copy" button.
Next, set the playback marker at the location for insertion and
the press the "Insert" button.
Display keyframes of individual parameters
Multiple keyframes are added simultaneously to effects if they include multiple
parameters.
http://pro.magix.com
Click the small arrow beside the name of the
animated effect to display all of its parameters.
Now all keyframes of the effects parameter can
be individually moved, deleted, activated, and
deactivated.
Note: Only those parameters are listed which are used for the animation. As
soon as another parameter is required for editing the effect, it becomes visible
to you here.
Retroactively editing an effect's keyframes
Previously set keyframes can be retroactively and temporarily moved and their
values edited.
Keyframes may be moved via drag & drop. Simply click on the keyframe to be
moved and drag it to the desired position.
To change an effects setting for an already positioned keyframe, click the
keyframe and adjust the effect in the Media Pool.
152 Effects
Soft movement
Normally, a hard, unnatural pan is the result of set keyframes.
This option makes sure that the progression of these movements is
executed more softly and more naturally.
It lets you activate the entire parameter group as well as individual parameter
curves.
Delete keyframe
Select the keyframe to be deleted by clicking
it.
This button removes the selected keyframe.
Editing an effects curve in the object
Activate effects curve: For each of animated effects parameter, a curve
is created and placed over the object. Click this button to display the
effects curve on the object.
Edit curve points: The curve point can either be
edited with the individual curve points (in "Standard"
mouse mode) or by freely drawing the effect curve (in
"Curve" mouse mode).
New curve points can be added to the curve in "Standard" mode via "Ctrl +
Shift" and clicking; existing ones can be deleted in the same way. Every curve
point can be moved with the mouse horizontally and vertically.
Note: The buttons for activating effects curves are first displayed once the first
keyframe has been placed.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 153
Effects curves - Additional functions
The context menu can also be opened via the small arrow beside the effects
indicator.
Delete effects: Removes the selected effect completely.
Delete effects curve: Removes the effects curve to be created again.
Copy effects curve: The effects curve is copied to the clipboard to be used at
other positions.
Insert effects curve: A previously copied effects curve can be inserted
elsewhere with this function at any time. This may be in the same object or in
another object.
Note: If you would like to insert the curve into a longer or shorter object, then
think about setting the option "Connect curve length with object length"
correctly before copying.
http://pro.magix.com
Combine effects curve with object length: If this option is set, then changes
to object length will affect the effects curve accordingly.
In practice, this behavior is needed rarely, for example if objects are stretched
or compressed. The option is deactivated by default for this reason.
Load effects curve: A previously saved effects curve may be loaded via this
menu item. This is useful, for example, if you have added your own default
animations.
Caution! The current effects curve will be overwritten as another one is loaded.
Save effects curve: Effects curves can be saved as a separate file. This is
useful, for example, if you want to add your own default animations and simply
load them again at other positions again.
Tip: Be aware that during saving the setting "Connect curve length with object
length" is saved as well and applied during loading.
154 Effects
Edit effects curve
This dialog serves to stretch, compress and move effect curves within an
object. The info bar of the dialog will display the effect, whose automation
curve is currently being edited.
Move position
Time: With each click on the arrow, you can move the effect curve forward or
back by the displayed time value.
Effect: Every click on the arrow up or down moves the effect curve by the
entered value. Depending on the effect, it is possible to enter exact or percent
values.
Stretch/Compress
Time: The effect curve will be stretched or compressed by the entered time
value. Invert reverses the curve on the time axis and reinserts it in "reverse".
The entire object duration will be considered.
Effect: The effect curve is stretched or compressed in its values, no time-
related editing takes place. The selected option (see table) is decisive in
editing.
Mirror: The entire curve is mirrored along the X-axis, whose position is
determined by the following option (see table).
... around object center:
The X-axis lies exactly at
the center of the object.
...around curve center:
The X-axis lies between
the upper and lower
automation point.
...around curve
minimum: The X-axis lies
at the level of the lowest
automation point.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 155
...around curve
maximum: The X-axis lies
at the level of the highest
automation point.
Animations outside of the image area
Animated effects are useful for making objects or titles appear to "fly" across
the image. In this case it is recommended that the start and end point of the
animation are placed outside of the image.
This will require a video object and a second object to be animated, for
example a title or a small object to float across the video image.
Here's how it works:
Click on the program monitor and zoom out of the video image (Ctrl + mouse
wheel). This displays the workspace at the edges of the reduced preview
image.
Select the effect "Size/Position" (view page 138).
Move the object to be animated to the position on the workspace where the
animation should start; for example, to the left of the preview image:
http://pro.magix.com
Position the playback marker at the location where the animation should start.
Create a keyframe for the animation start.
Position the playback marker at the position where the object to be animated
should disappear from the image.
156 Effects
Move the object to be animated to the position on the workspace where the
animation should end; for example, to the right of the preview image.
A second keyframe for the end of the animation will be placed automatically.
Play back the result.
The object to be animated should now fly from left to right through the video
picture.
Create effect masks
Create effects masks with MAGIX Video Pro X4
Effects masks help you to apply effects in different areas of one video image
with varying intensity. A specific image is used as a mask to determine the
specific areas where the effect should be applied.
Typical application include:
Image optimizations: A typical example are horizontal camera pans of the
horizon, where the lower or upper image area should be made brighter or
color-adjusted.
Eye-catching color gradients, colorations, etc.
Special effects such as pixelation of a car license plate.
Effects masks are regular image objects, and as such may be animated or
attached to a certain image position to use them as moving video images.
Proceed as follows:
Select the object in the arrangement to apply
the effects mask to.
Open the desired effects page in the Media Pool.
In Media Pool, set the effect parameters which should be applied with the
effect mask. These must be parameters from the "video effects" area (without
"speed" and "chroma key").
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 157
Click on the button with the arrow
pointing down on the effects page
and select "Load effects masks" from
the menu.
In the folder that opens you will now find templates for SD and HD material.
Double click on the mask that you would like to use. The brighter the area in
the effects mask, the stronger the effect will be. Black indicates no effect, and
white indicates full effect. If you use your own color images, only the brightness
values will be used.
In the effect overview you can also
make settings that will apply the effect
mask for all other effects, too. Click
on the masking button for each effect,
for which the effect mask should be
applied.
Click on the down arrow button again and select the "Delete effect mask"
entry from the menu to remove the effect mask.
To now apply the mask on a certain portion of the video image, you have to
edit it further. There are many options available for editing effects masks:
http://pro.magix.com
You can define the size and the position of the effect mask in such a way, that
the mask fits exactly over the image element to be edited. Please read more
on this in the section "Position/size" (view page 138).
You can attach the mask to the position in the video so that it moves together
with the image element. To find out more, read "Attach to picture position in
the video (view page 160)".
Or animate the effect mask object directly. To proceed, please read the
"Animate objects" (view page 150) section.
T
Tip: You can also use your own effect masks. Any image or photo in JPEG
format can be used. You can draw a suitable image in a graphics program,
save it as a JPEG and load it using the "Load effects mask" option in MAGIX
Video Pro X4.
158 Effects
Create effects masks with Xara Designer
In the effects area of the Media Pool you can launch an external graphics
program such as Xara Designer Pro via the "Draw effects masks" menu in
order to create your own effects masks.
Note: This menu will appear only when a corresponding graphics program is
installed on your PC.
To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Select the image or video object to which you wish to apply the effects
mask in the arrangement.
2. Open the desired effects page in the Media Pool. Click in the button with the
arrow pointing down and select "Draw effects mask" form the menu.
The external graphics editor will be launched. Your selected object will appear,
allowing you to get a better idea of how you want to design your mask.
3. Create the effect mask template. You can use all editor functions.
Please note: The lighter the area of the effects mask is, the stronger will be
effect be applied. Black indicates no effect, and white indicates full effect.
4. Close the editor You don't have to save the project in the editor, as it will be
automatically transferred to MAGIX Video Pro X4 when the program is closed
and placed as an effect mask object below the image or video object.
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 159
If you would like to edit an effect mask template, double click on the effects
mask and the external editor will open with the mask template file.
5. Set the effect parameters in the Media Pool that should be applied with the
effects mask. These must be parameters from the "video effects" area (without
"speed" and "chroma key").
6. In the effect overview, set that the effects mask should be used. Click on the
masking button for each effect, for which the effect mask should be applied.
Read more about effects masks in MAGIX Video Pro X4 in the previous
section. (view page 156)
Reverse mask
http://pro.magix.com
You can reverse masks: To do so, click on the arrow in
the mask effect object which appears as soon as you
place the mouse cursor over it. All dark areas will become
light and all light areas will become dark. By clicking again,
you will remove the reversal again.
Create overlay graphic/animation
Create vector graphics or animations in an external editor such as Xara
Designer Pro in order to use them as overlay objects in MAGIX Video Pro X4. A
typical use scenario would be to draw an object in order to darken certain
portions of the video, such as a black bar to cover a person's eyes. Overlay
objects aren't bound to the source material by grouping. They can me moved
and edited as you please.
160 Effects
Note: This menu will appear only when a corresponding graphics program is
installed on your PC.
To create an overlay object, proceed as follows:
1. In the arrangement, select the image or video object, for which an overlay
effect should be created.
2. Right-click on this object and in the context menu select "Create overlay
graphic/animation".
The external graphics editor will be launched. Your selected object will be
displayed to help you get a better idea of how to best design your overlay.
3. Create the template for the overlay object. You can use all editor functions.
4. Close the editor You don't have to save the project in the editor, as the
overlay object will automatically be transferred to MAGIX Video Pro X4 and
placed below the image or video object when the program is closed.
You can continue to edit it in MAGIX Video Pro X4 as you wish, for example
using Animated movement effects (view page 138).
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 161
http://pro.magix.com
Attach to picture position in the video
You can attach a video, picture or text object to moved picture content of
another video. The attached object automatically completes the movement of a
picture element from the film, making it appear magnetic. For example, you
could use this method to insert a hat that stays on someone's head
throughout, even if the person hops through the picture.
Let's roll:
Place an overlay object (e.g. a photo of a hat) on a track below a video with a
moving image element (e.g. a walking person).
Right click the object and select the "Attach to picture position in the video"
movie point.
Then click "Continue" in the dialog that appears.
Note: If you want to attach two objects, e.g. a title and a speech bubble, an
additional dialog appears, which lets you select the objects you want to attach
to your video.
The next dialog asks you to draw a frame around the image content to be
tracked. The content should have high contrast to its background.
Movement will be automatically calculated and a series of keyframes that
control the position and size of the effect according to your wishes will be
generated.
Image stabilization
The motion stabilizer reduces unsteady camera motion and helps to smooth
pans. This option can be accessed from the context menu of a video object or
the "Effects" menu > "Open video objects".
Functionality
Image stabilization balances undesired picture movements. The motion
stabilizer equalizes inadvertent movements in the image by moving the image
in the opposite direction in accordance with the wrong movements. This
produces unusable edges in the footage that are cut off automatically, and
black strips, which are then removed using a zoom shot. The result: A clearly
more stable, almost imperceptibly larger picture.
162 Effects
Application
First you have to check the movie material for shaky scenes. To do this click
on the "Stabilize" button. Based on the preset parameters, a relative shift
between the pictures is calculated. After concluding the analysis, take a look at
the suggested correction, then use the slider for further adjustments. Once you
are happy with the final correction click OK. If the first scan did not provide a
satisfactory result, try changing the parameters below and repeat the process.
Image stabilization dialog
Stabilization radius for analysis: To prevent the image stabilizer from
recognizing every camera movement as unwanted shakiness, you can
determine the radius within which movement is accepted; the larger the
stabilization radius, the more shakiness is corrected. Changing this parameter
will require re-analysis of the source footage.
Section of analysis: This area determines the area of the footage that should
be analyzed. The center of the image is preset. If shaking occurs in one area
more than in another, then you can move the analysis area (e.g. a foreground
element at the edge is especially shaky). To do this, use the mouse to
“capture” the shaky area. The smaller the area, the quicker the analysis will be
calculated. Generally, changing this parameter will require re-analysis of the
source footage.
Maximum displacement: Correction moves the image accordingly to the
shaking movements. This means that the edge of the image will be removed.
This value determines how large the edge area is which may be cut away by
http://pro.magix.com
Effects 163
http://pro.magix.com
the stabilization feature; the smaller the value, the less movement correction.
Changes to this value are immediately applied.
Temporal smoothing: This value determines the speed of the movements
considered shaky. This allows you to differentiate between a panning shot and
a nervous hand-held shot. Changes to this value are immediately applied.
Cancel: Exits the dialog without accepting changes to settings.
Reset: Resets the current settings.
Image improvements for the entire movie
You can open the effects from the the settings via the "Effects" menu. All of the
settings made here influence the entire movie. Settings are made separately for
each individual movie in the project.
On the right, you'll see a preview of the current setting. Use the position slider
to jump to different positions in the movie or to various scenes in order to see
how the selected setting affects the image material.
Brightness/Contrast
Brightness: Use the sliders to reduce or increase the objects' brightness.
Selective brightness (gamma): “Gamma” determines the mean gray scale that
can be calculated from the various color ranges. "Selective brightness" is the
most important function for image improvement. In the preset list, select the
various envelope curves to edit only the dark, median, or brightest areas of the
image.
Using the fader you can also set the power of the brightness/darkness
adjustments.
Contrast: You can increase or lower the object's contrast.
Color space correction: This option is effective against powerful colors that
violate TV standards and can no longer be displayed correctly on-screen. The
color saturation of the affected material is thereby reduced until the maximum
permitted value is reached.
164 Effects
http://pro.magix.com
Color
Saturation: Use the saturation slider to increase or reduce the hue proportions
in the image. A newly developed algorithm is applied which makes color
changes related to other parameters (e.g. contrast settings) in order to achieve
the most natural coloration possible.
Hue: Use the palette to select a hue for coloring in the picture.
Red/green/blue: Changes the color mix using the slide controller.
Image sharpness
You can reduce (soften) or increase (sharpen) the object's focus using this
slider.
"Fine adjustment" allows you to set how sharp surfaces or edges should
appear. Using it, you can effectively decrease persistent image deficits.
Anti-flickering filter intensity: The anti-flickering filter affects only still images. It
is especially intended for zooms in images with many edges and transitions
with high contrast (e.g. fences, bars, brick walls). High-frequency images such
as these begin to flicker when they are reduced in size. This filter smoothes
these edges somewhat.
You should set the intensity of the anti-flickering filter according to your
preferences, because smoothing is always a compromise between good
contrast and fluid image sequence during playback..
TV cropping
This option provides optimal adjustment of the image size for a real television
screen (anti-cropping). Without this adjustment, the screen could cut off edges
of the image in some cases.
Show TV screen area in preview monitor: This option displays the image
borders of the television as lines in the preview monitor. The four image
borders of the TV area may be specified via the four input fields. Of course, the
real size of the TV image must be familiar for this. The following process is
available to determine this:
The four input fields also enable the borders of the four sides to be adjusted
freely in percent. In this case, the best approach is to determine a balance
between reduction, bar formation, and the image section:
Effects 165
http://pro.magix.com
If all four edges feature the same value, then the image will be reduced
proportionately. In this case no distortions will occur, but there will be bars
along the edges.
If different values are entered for the 4 fields, the image size is reduced
disproportionately. This will distort the image.
Apply border range to: With this option, the entered values for the four borders
are applied as an image reduction. The result may be checked immediately in
the preview monitor.
Determining the visible TV frame size
To determine the picture properties of your television as well as optimal image
size editor settings, you should perform a test run:
Load the project "Visible TV image" from the folder "My Media -> Projects ->
Visible TV image" in the Media Pool.
Play back the film and read the instructions on the video screen.
Burn the project to DVD
Place the disc into the player and play the film. Compare the TV picture to the
picture displayed on your video screen by MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Determine the proportional value of the borders cropped by the television with
the four measurement scales along the edges of the test picture.
Enter the values in the "Full TV size" editor.
The image size is now optimized to your TV picture. Please note: Depending
on device settings and disc media type, the cropping values may vary slightly.
Image improvements for individual objects
The context menu or in "Effects -> Video object effects" features various
adjustments for selected video and image objects.
Interpolation for interlace material: Select this option to remove interlace
artifacts from the (video) image. If, for instance, you extract still shots from a
video, interlace artifacts appear in sequences which feature movement.
Anti interface filter: Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures
and high contrast. This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.
Border crop adjustment: Select this option if the edges are cropped during
playback on your television. Values stored in "Film effect settings (view page
164)" will be applied.
166 Stereo3D
http://pro.magix.com
Stereo3D
MAGIX Video Pro X4 enables the editing and creation of "genuine" 3D videos
and photos. First, let's create an overview of this complex topic by familiarizing
ourselves with the most important principles and the golden rules that are
involved. Next, we'll look at the individual steps of the workflow in more detail.
Note concerning 3D content: Some people experience unpleasantness (e. g.
headaches, straining, exhaustion of the eyes, or nausea) when viewing 3D
videos. We recommend taking regular breaks for this reason. In case of
problems, the user should immediately stop use and refer to a doctor or
optometrist. Incorrect production of 3D-content may also produce these
symptoms.
Warning for small children: The sight of small children (especially those
younger than six years old) is still developing. We recommend referring to a
doctor or optometrist prior to allowing your child to view 3D-videos.
3D basics
Human eyes perceive objects from 2 different angles and our brain "calculates"
images from this information. This way we can tell the distance and position of
an object. For this reason, 3D material should be shot according to this
principle.
Viewing 3D
A regular screen or TV can show images only in 2 dimensions, and various
technologies have been developed to enable perception of images in 3D. To
this day, all technologies share the following: You need special glasses to
deliver different information to the left and right eyes. We will examine these
technologies in detail later.
The three golden rules
Stay within limits during recording: To make a 3D recording (view page 167)
with realistic depth information, certain limits must be respected. The most
important rule is not to go below the point of minimum distance. Minimum
point is the point in the picture, where the camera is the closest.
Frame closest point: In order to place the 3D effect behind the imaginary
frame, both image components must over lay each other exactly at the closest
point. At the same time, the same objects must be visible at the edges of both
Stereo3D 167
http://pro.magix.com
partial images, for which, if needed, you can use the Cropping function in the
Media Pool (view page 140).
Note: The imaginary window is a type of a plane, behind which the 3D movie
plays. You select the closest, frontmost point. Not keeping up with this rule
can result in the object to "jump out" of the imaginary window, which when
used too much, can cause headaches.
Maintain realistic eye angles: Object with a 3D depth effect viewed as a
red/cyan image (Anaglyph) without glasses will appear displaced. This
displacement should, if possible, take up less than 1/30 of the entire image.
Otherwise, it will appear that the eyes are looking in different directions.
Notice: Displacement may only occur along the horizontal axis. Displacements
on the vertical axis and rotated portions must be adjusted.
Record 3D
The distance between eyes in humans is ca. 65 mm, which forms the so-called
"stereo base width". But because our eyes are dynamic and we can even
"cross" our eyes, it is possible to focus on objects that are closer.
Various techniques exist for 3D recording. Each method has its advantages
and disadvantages:
3D cameras with two lenses: The advantages are obvious; these cameras
produce 3D material without excessive work involved. The disadvantage is
that the stereo base width (lens distance) cannot be changed.
Two cameras on a special mount: This involves a little more work. Two
cameras are mounted on a special support to record material for the left and
the right side of the 3D image simultaneously; microphone booms for stereo
recordings may also be used for this purpose.
The disadvantage in this case is that the shutter releases have to be pressed
at exactly the same time if there are moving objects in the picture. In case of
video, both movies must be synchronized before being edited.
Advantages: Stereo base width may be changed by adjusting the distance
between the cameras; larger selection of camera models.
Two photos via the same camera: This technique only allows still images.
The camera is simply used to record two images from different perspectives,
and these are used as the right and left images. For best results, use a tripod.
168 Stereo3D
http://pro.magix.com
Consistently fast camera movement, e. g. along a street: Only a single
conventional camera is required in this case, but the range of applications is
very limited. This is the most cost-effective method for creating 3D videos.
Material is filmed at a speed of circa 6-to 15 km/h. During editing, the edited
video object is duplicated and one of the videos is played back with a time
lapse. The movement direction determines which is the right and left image.
3D photos may also be created using this method.
Warning, minimum distance!
The position of the object closest to the lens is designated as the minimum
point. This minimum point may not exceed a specific minimum point; this is
easy to calculate via the following formula:
Note: Lens focal point (e. g. 25 mm) x stereo base width (e. g. 65 mm) x 1.5*
/1 mm= minimum point (2437.5 mm ~ 2.44 m)
*1.5 is a factor derived from the cut-off appearing when filming through a lens.
**1 mm is the so-called "deviation" or "spatial dimension". This only involves a
rough value in this case.
Examples for 3D cameras:
Panasonic HDC-SDT750 ( base width 12 mm): minimum point is approx. 1.5
m.
Fuji REAL 3D W3 (base width 75 mm): minimum point at approx. 3 m; for long-
distance recordings as much as 8 m.
This so-called minimum point has an important role in other aspects of 3D
editing.
Prepare 3D editing
3D videos are filmed and saved by different cameras, which means: depending
on the camera model or recording method, the videos or images vary.
In one file
Many cameras, especially for photo recordings, create one single file
containing the left and the right image next to one another.
Drag these files from the Media Pool directly into your arrangement.
Select the created objects.
Select the "Side-by-Side (left images left/right)" entry in the Media Pool under
"Effects > Stereo3D > Properties > Create stereo".
Stereo3D 169
In multiple files
Some 3D cameras create a file for each the left and the right side. This working
technique works also if you simply take 2 pictures with a regular photo camera.
In the Media Pool, open the folder in which the desired file can be found.
Sort the files in increasing order according to the date. This way, all files will lie
in pairs one below the other.
Now, select the files and drag them from the Media Pool directly into your
arrangement.
In the Media Pool select "Side-by-side (left image right/left) under "Effects >
Stereo 3D > Properties > Create stereo" for material with halved width.
Note: If you have created side-by-side material yourself (e.g. placed two
photos next to each other in an image file), proceed as described, but at the
end select the "side-by-side (left image left/right)" for material with full width.
Set playback mode for 3D
There are various techniques available for playback of 3D videos on the
computer. Depending on the technology used, the corresponding playback
mode may be activated in MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Select the 3D mode you want to work with in the upper left
corner of the video monitor.
http://pro.magix.com
Here is a list of available techniques and the corresponding requirements:
3D mode Equipment Requirements
View partially interlaced Polarizing filter Polarizing filter glasses
Special monitor, typically
referred to as a 3D monitor or
similar
Note: You can choose between right or left image first, depending on which
type of display produces better results on your monitor.
Shutter export Shutter mode nVidia 3D Vision Kit
120 Hz monitor/projector
170 Stereo3D
http://pro.magix.com
Side-by-Side-
Display
Side-by-side 3D TV device
Note: You can choose between right or left image first, depending on which
type of display produces better results on your monitor.
Note: These three modes should be set only when the preview image is to be
exported to a separate monitor or TV device. Shutter mode also requires a 3D-
capable graphics card.
Anaglyph display Color anaglyphs Red/cyan glasses
Align videos and pictures for 3D
Anaglyph display is recommended for this, which may be set via the video
monitor (view page 169). Only in this mode is precise geometric alignment of
images is possible.
Note: In case you wish to edit 3D-video material, it is recommended to
conduct scene recognition and split the video into individual scenes. This is
necessary because the left and right side of each scene must be arranged
individually.
The so-called minimum point is the point in the 3D picture that is closest to the
lenses. This forms the "center" of the 3D image and must be defined as such
in MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Stereo3D 171
For this task, go to "Media Pool -> Effects -> Stereo 3D" and access the entry
"Aligning".
Move both images one over the other, so that the minimum point of both sides
is at the same location on the screen.
You should first see whether automations for spatial adjustment and
synchronization deliver desired results. Click on the button "Automatic".
If the result isn't what you're looking for, proceed as follows:
Find the minimum point in the image.
http://pro.magix.com
If the images are offset vertically, then these need to be balanced via the lower
of the two slide controllers under "Spatial alignment".
If the images have rotational differences, you have to adjust these with the
knob.
Try to position the minimum points of both sides precisely one above the other
using the upper slider.
To test the results, put on the cyan/red glasses. In case the image has an
exaggerated spatial depth, try to position the left and right sides closer to each
other using the controls under "Spatial alignment".
172 Stereo3D
http://pro.magix.com
Turn camera movements into 3D videos
Camera movements may be transformed into 3D videos by being duplicated
and converted via time displacement. To do so, you can simply record on the
right or the left side while, for example, driving along a street.
The speed should be set between 6-15 km/h (approx. 4-10 mph) and depends
on the frame rate, the focal point, and the distance of the objects being filmed
(among other things). At increased speeds, it may occur that the spatial
impression is too strong and the filmed material seems unnatural and
unpleasant.
If the video is in the arrangement, the stereo depth for the 2D object may be
set in the Media Pool via "Effects -> Stereo 3D --> Properties".
Depending on the direction of the recordings, you will have to move the
control either to the right or the left.
Check the results in the anaglyph display with red/cyan glasses
Correct any unrealistic effects by adjusting the controller in the opposite
direction.
If the spatial depth is exaggerated, reduce the changed parameters.
Note: Not only camera movements, but also other 2D materials may be
arranged spatially.
3D material may be edited with the same functions as 2D material.
Create titles for 3D videos
Xara3D title objects automatically have "real" 3D properties and for this reason
may be used in the arrangement without any problems.
Export and burn 3D videos
There are no special requirements for export and burning. Only the desired 3D
technique is specified.
Anaglyph: This technique is recommended for uncomplicated playback of
finished videos or playback via conventional TV sets or projectors. Viewers
must simply put on a pair of red/cyan glasses to be able to enjoy a 3D film.
Stereo3D 173
http://pro.magix.com
Side-by-side: Create 3D movies for a 3D-capable playback device without
having to compromise the quality. It doesn't matter initially whether your video
is viewed in "Shutter" mode or via "Polarized filter".
Depending on the playback device, you should set double the resolution in
order to get an image in full resolution for the left and right partial image.
Not all playback devices are capable of double resolution. If this is the case for
your device, 50 % pinched images will be displayed. The quality is
nevertheless higher than output via the anaglyph technique.
Note: When exporting into Side-by-Side- formats, make sure that the
horizontal resolution equals the sum of both images, while the aspect ratio
(such as 16:9) relates to one test image!
Only left/right side: With these settings, you won't export in 3D, but just one
side of your 3D -video.
Flicker image: This way you can view 3D material without 3D glasses. The
material will be shown in an alternating order, creating an impression of
flickering images.
On top of each other: This export option is similar to the "Side-by-Side"
option. The images will be exported not next to each other, but one over the
other.
Depending on the playback device, you should set double resolution to get an
image in full resolution for the top and bottom partial image.
Not all playback devices are capable of double resolution. If this is the case for
your device, 50 % pinched images will be displayed. The quality is
nevertheless higher than output via the anaglyph technique.
Note: When exporting into the one-over-the-other-formats, make sure that the
vertical resolution is the sum of both images, but that the aspect ration (e. g.
16:9) relates to the partial image!
Export files/upload movies to the Internet
All file exports can be found via "File > Export movie" or "File > Online".
Depending on the export format and destination, the export dialog also allows
the 3D technique to be used to be selected.
174 Audio editing
http://pro.magix.com
Burn
When burning a Blu-ray Disc or DVD, you must first open the encoder settings
in the burn dialog and set the desired 3D technology. Next, you may proceed
to burn the disc as usual.
Audio editing
For comprehensive audio track editing that goes beyond volume level
adjustment, audio must be placed on a separate track.
1. To place audio on a separate track, right-click on the desired object. The
context menu will open.
2. Select "Audio and waveform display" > "Audio on separate track" or use the
"Ctrl + H" shortcut. The object's audio track will then be placed on its own
track directly below and can be edited.
In principle, any track in MAGIX Video Pro X4 can be used as a sound track.
There are no specific track types. You can also place other audio objects, such
as background music, on other tracks. But it is easier not to mix object types
within one track.
Load and edit audio files
All importable audio files can be selected using the Media Pool.
You can load the file into the source monitor by double-clicking it in the Media
Pool. You can preview the file with the help of the transport control of the
source monitor.
You can drag the files with a held-down mouse key into the project clipboard
(drag & drop). Tracks from audio CDs may also be integrated via drag & drop.
You can activate the waveform display with a right-click on the audio object,
recognizable by its volume progression inside the object.
Edits, fine positioning, volume settings, and fading in and out may all be
adjusted directly in the arranger using the object handles.
Various effect curves (view page 152) may be selected for audio tracks,
dynamically controlling selectable effects, volume or stereo panorama.
Audio editing 175
Audio effects
Using audio effects
Object effects
Just like with video objects, there are individually adjustable effects and effect
templates for audio objects. These influence only selected objects. These can
be found in the Media Pool under "Effects" > "Audio effects" or in the "Effects"
menu > "Audio object effects" (view page 145).
Track effects
Track effects always apply to all audio objects of a track. They are set in the
mixer (view page 175). You can open the mixer by pressing the M key on your
keyboard.
Tip: You can adjust the volume of the entire track in the track header.
Audio effects plug-ins
MAGIX Video Pro X4 supports VST as well as DirectX audio plug-ins. These are
usually effects modules such as reverb, equalizer, dynamics compression, etc.
Installation
http://pro.magix.com
Before using audio effect plug-ins, they first have to be installed – this process
may be different depending on the plug-in. VST plug-ins are typically saved in a
certain directory, which must be entered in the MAGIX Video Pro X4 path
settings. After the path has been indicated, MAGIX Video Pro X4 scans it for
working plug-ins and offers them to be used. You can also indicated multiple
locations where VST plug-ins are installed.
Using plug-ins
Two so-called slots for track effects are located in the channel
strip of the mixer for the corresponding track as well as in the
FX tracks.
Clicking on the small triangle will let you select an effect from
the list. Select "No effect" to remove a plug-in from the slot.
176 Audio editing
http://pro.magix.com
Master effects
Master effects influence the mixed sum of all audio tracks. For this purpose a
Master Audio Effects Rack and further plug-ins are installed in the Mixer
window. The MAGIX Mastering Suite (view page 185) is also available to help
produce perfect sound.
Sound optimization
This option opens an editor for correcting audio material discrepancies.
Select the cleaning function you desire from the upper part of the dialog:
The equalizer (on page 178) allows you to manipulate the frequency spectrum
perfect for cleaning up muffled dialog.
The compressor is a dynamic volume control that lends the overall sound a
deeper, richer quality.
The stereo FX processor justifies the position of the sound in the stereo
panorama.
DeNoiser, DeClipper, and DeHisser are professional noise reduction tools that
do exactly what their titles say they do.
Presets: You can try out the suitability of a number of presets in the preset
menu.
Temporarily deactivate all effects: Switches all the effects off.
Apply to all scenes: Applies the selected cleaning settings of all effects to
every scene of the movie.
Declipper
Should the input level of an audio recording be too high, overmodulation may
result at the louder parts (the signal peaks). This digital distortion is also called
"clipping": At the overmodulated area, the values that are too high are simply
cut off, and typical, quite unpleasant-sounding crackling and distortion appear.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 contains a special function for dealing with digital clipping
and analog distortions. Of course, this only works to a certain degree.
Using the fader you can set at what level the Declipper should register a signal
as being overmodulated and, if required, correct it (Clip level). This is
important, as different sound cards show different clipping methods. The more
the fader is turned up, the lower the level recognized by the program as
overmodulated. If the clip level is set too high, unwanted sound modification
may occur.
Audio editing 177
http://pro.magix.com
Get clip level: The clip level is gaged automatically.
Denoiser
The Denoiser removes persistent background noise like computer hum,
hissing, noises from sound charts, disturbance from ground circuits,
interference from audio equipment with high-impedance outputs (such as
record players), impact noise, or the turntable rumble.
The Denoiser requires a noise sample. Some typical noise sounds are included
in the "Preset" selection menu.
Set the degree to which the noise should be reduced with the fader. It is often
better to reduce interference signals by 3-6 dB rather than as much as is
possible in order to keep the sound "natural".
A different option consists of creating a noise sample yourself. All that's
needed is a short section from the audio track in which the distortion can be
found. To get it, switch to the DeNoiser dialog by pressing "Advanced".
DeNoiser – Advanced settings
Step 1: Choose a noise sample
First of all, a sample of the distortion you wish to remove must be selected, i.e.
a so-called "noise sample".
You have two options to choose from:
Pick out typical background noise: You can select and use a number of
typical background noises from the flip menu. Select one and listen to it by
pressing the "Play" button. If it is similar to the background noise in your sound
track, go ahead and use it (see "Step 2: Removing background noise").
Extract a new noise sample from an audio track: You can also pick out a
short passage (from the existing sound track) in which you can hear the
background noise.
Automatic search: Searches especially quiet passages in which background
noise is most noticeable.
Previous / Play / Next: These buttons allow you to play all of the passages
found for easy comparison.
178 Audio editing
http://pro.magix.com
Save as: Once found, you can save noise samples to the hard drive. They then
appear as entries in the "Typical background noises" flip menu to be used in
other projects.
If you only wish to use the noise sample in the current project, you don't have
to save. Instead just go to the "Remove noise" category.
Step 2: Removing background noise
Noise level: The level of the noise reduction function should be set as precisely
as possible. Values that are too low are expressed at a low distortion
dampening level and in artifacts, like noises or "twittering" (see below). High
settings produce dull results – useful signals that sound similar to hissing
noises are also filtered away. Try to find the best setting for the project at
hand.
Reducer: This sets the balance between the original signal and the signal with
the applied noise reduction. It's often better to reduce interference signals by
3-6 dB rather than as much as is possible, so as to keep the sound "natural".
In case of buzzing, it’s best to apply complete removal.
Dehisser
The Dehisser eliminates regular "white" noise typically produced by analog tape
recordings, microphone pre-amplifiers, A/D converters, or transformers.
Noise reduction can be regulated in decibels with the fader. It is often better to
reduce interference signals by 3-6 dB rather than as much as possible in order
to keep the sound "natural".
Noise level: You can choose between different noise levels. The level of the
noise reduction function should be set as precisely as possible. Low settings
result in incomplete deletion of the hissing. Incomplete deleting of hissing
produces artifacts and should be avoided, since high settings will produce dull
results and some useful signals (i.e. woodwinds) which are similar to hissing
are also filtered away.
Equalizer
The 10-track equalizer divides the frequency spectrum into 10 areas (tracks)
and supplies them with separate volume controls to allow you to achieve many
impressive effects, from the simple rising of the bass to total sound
transformation. If you raise the low frequencies too much throughout the whole
level, it might cause distortions.
Audio editing 179
Fader: The volume of each of the 10 frequency bands can be set separately
with the 10 volume controls.
Link frequency bands: The frequency fields can be bundled together flexibly in
order to avoid artificial-sounding exaggeration in individual frequency fields.
Compressor
The compressor is an automated, dynamic volume controller. Loud passages
become quieter and the total value is raised. This makes the volume more
consistent and speech easier to understand. A compressor is mainly useful in
case background noise or music interferes with speech and simply increasing
the volume of the individual objects or tracks does not result in any significant
improvement.
http://pro.magix.com
Level: Regulates the level of compression applied (the "ratio").
Function: Defines the compressor depending upon the sound material.
Stereo FX
The stereo FX processor provides adjustment of the alignment of the audio
material in the stereo balance. If the stereo recordings sound weak and
undifferentiated, an extension of the stereo base width can often provide better
transparency.
Bandwidth control: Adjust the bandwidth between mono (on the extreme left),
unchanged base width (center) and maximum bandwidth ("wide" on the
extreme right).
180 Audio editing
Reducing the bandwidth can raise the overall level. In extreme cases, when the
left and the right channels include identical material and the bandwidth control
is pushed to the extreme left on "mono", the result can be a level increase of 3
decibels.
Raising the bandwidth (values of 100) diminishes the mono compatibility.
Effect devices controls
Some effect options open a graphic window, which has the appearance of the
studio effect device that it simulates (such as the "Echo/reverb" or
"Timestretching" effect menus).
These virtual effect devices are controlled either with common sliders, knobs
and buttons or alternatively with graphic sensor fields.
Sensor fields: Sensor fields can be controlled intuitively with
mouse movements, with the graphic and the corresponding
effect setting changing in relation to each other.
Power switch: Every effect device in the rack may be switched on or
off separately. This button allows you to directly compare the neutral,
unedited sound of the audio object with the effect setting you have
chosen.
Reset: Every effect has a reset button that restores the effect
device’s initial default. In this state, the effect is not calculated into
the sound, and the effect is not rendered.
Preset selection list: Each effect device has a selection
of proven presets which can be selected from a drop-
down menu.
A/B: The A/B button compares two settings with each other. If you
have selected a preset for the effect and make manual changes to it
later, you can compare the original preset sound with the new settings
by using the A/B button.
Note: The displayed graphics serve only examples and can differ from device
to device.
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 181
Audio effect dialogs
Some of the following effects can be opened individually (via the context
menu), or as part of the track or master effects rack. However, the functionality
remains the same.
Reverb/Delay
The reverb effect device offers newly developed and very realistic reverb
algorithms to add more room depth to your recording.
Reverb
Reverb is probably the most important but also the most difficult effect to
generate.
Parameters
The reverb effect has the following parameters:
http://pro.magix.com
Size: defines the size of the room (or the system for the plate and spring). The
larger a room, the longer the sound travels between walls or objects. With
some low "size" settings you can also reduce the distance between the
individual reflections. This allows resonance to develop (accentuated frequency
ranges), which can sound oppressive if the reverb sustain is too long.
Time: With this knob you can adjust the echo time and determine how much of
it will be absorbed and, simultaneously, the reverb's decay.
Color: You may influence the sound characteristics of the effect within certain
limits. The effect of this controller depends on the used preset. In rooms,
"Color" controls the dampening of the highs in the reverb (from dark to bright)
as well as pre-filtering of the signal. With plate and spring presets, this fader
determines the dampening of the basses as well.
Mix: This controller sets the mix ratio between the original and the edited
signal. For rooms, you can therefore move a signal further into the room by
increasing the effect share. The last four presets are intended for use in an
AUX channel of the mixer and are set to 100%.
182 Audio editing
Presets
The presets represent the basic settings for the various room algorithms, which
can still be varied along with the other parameters. Hence, they are more than
just simply parameter sets.
Delay
This effect is like an echo which delays the signal and repeats it.
Delay: This sets the period of time between the individual echoes. The more
the control is turned to the left, the faster the echoes will follow each other.
Feedback: This adjusts the number of echoes. Turn the dial completely to the
left, there is no echo at all; turn it completely to the right and there are
seemingly endless repetitions.
Mix: This fader determines how much of the unprocessed original sound (dry
signal) is subjected to the echo (wet signal). Application of this effect in an AUX
bus requires the controller to be set to 100% (all the way to the right).
Timestretch/resample
This option opens an effect device with which you can change the speed
and/or pitch of the object.
Pitch: This control changes the pitch independently from the object's speed
("pitchshifting").
Tempo: This control changes the speed independently from the pitch
("timestretching"). The object acts as if it were compressed or stretched on the
track.
Tones/BPM: These fields serve for numerical alteration of pitch and speed.
Only MAGIX soundpool files are suitable for numeric entries because they are
equipped with information regarding pitch and speed.
Setup: This button opens a setup dialog, where you can choose between
various pitchshifting and timestretching processes.
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 183
http://pro.magix.com
Standard: Timestretching and pitchshifting in standard quality. The method is
suitable for audio material without a pronounced beat. Existing beat markers
are evaluated to improve audio quality.
Smoothed: Timestretching and pitchshifting for audio material without
impulse-like components. The method is suitable for several voice orchestra
instruments, surfaces, speech and singing. Beat markers will not be evaluated.
A complicated algorithm is used here, which results in a higher processor
load. Material can also be edited using very large factors (0.2...50), without
large artifacts. For this, material will be somewhat "smoothed", which will be
manifested in a softer sound and an altered phase length. This smoothing is
hardly audible, e.g. with speech, singing, or solo instrumentation. For complex
spectra, such as mixes of different instruments and finished mixes, this can
lead to problems.
Beat marker slicing: Beat-synchronous timestretching and pitchshifting via
splitting and temporal repositioning. Exactly set beat markers are required at
the beats or transients. Markers can be generated in realtime (automatically) or
read out from the source file, as long as they are available (patched). A patch
tool is available in MAGIX Music Editor which lets the user set own markers.
The algorithm is suitable for rhythmic material that can be divided into
individual beats or notes. For this, the levels before and after the individual
notes or beats should be low.
Beat marker stretching: Beat-synchronized timestretching and pitchshifting in
high audio quality. The material is stretched between beat markers positions
so that the impacts or attacks at the beat markers positions are not impaired
by stretching. The markers can be generated in real time from the audio
material (automatically), provided they are present (patched). The method is
suitable for rhythmic material which is not separated into individual beats or
notes because the beats or notes overlap.
Beat marker stretching (smoothed): Beat-synchronous timestretching and
pitchshifting in high audio quality, even with extreme timestretching. Beat
markers are used at the beats or transients. The markers can be generated in
real time from the audio material (automatically), or read out from the wave file,
provided they are present (patched). The method is suitable for rhythmic
material which is not separated into individual beats or notes because the
beats or notes overlap. This method results in relatively high CPU loads, and
should be used carefully on less powerful systems.
Universal HQ: Universal method timestretching and pitchshifting in very high
audio quality. Suitable for all types of audio material. Existing beat markers are
evaluated to improve audio quality. This method requires so much processing
time, that a realtime application is recommended only in exceptional situations.
For this reason, we recommend to use the apply function.
Monophonic voice: Time-stretching and pitch-shifting for vocal solos, speech
or solo instruments. The material may contain no background noise, and even
strong reverb can reduce the usefulness of this method. With suitable material
184 Audio editing
the audio quality is very high. Additionally, formats are kept after pitchshifting.
Beat markers are not evaluated.
Resampling: Pitch shift and tempo can not be changed individually. This
method requires comparably little CPU time.
Audio effects in the mixer
You can open audio effect devices in the mixer using the "FX"
button found in each track or in the right master area.
Under "Mastering" you will also find MAGIX Mastering Suite
(view page 185).
"Reset" resets all effect settings to original values.
Equalizer
The 10-band equalizer subdivides the frequency spectrum into ten areas
('bands') and equips them with separate volume controls. This way it is
possible to create many impressive effects, from a simple boosting of the bass
to complete elimination of a certain range of frequencies. Note: If low
frequencies are boosted too much, the overall sound level is heavily increased
which may lead to distortion. In this event, adjust the overall volume downward
by using the 'master volume' control situated at the bottom center of the effect
rack.
Slider control: Each of the ten frequency ranges can be separately boosted or
turned down with the ten volume controls.
Link bands: Using this button randomly combines the frequency ranges with
each other in to avoid artificial-sounding overemphasis of an individual
frequency range.
Touch screen (right EQ section): This is the 'sensor field' of the EQ. Here you
can draw any type of curve with the mouse. This will be immediately translated
into a corresponding control setting on the left side of the EQ.
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 185
Compressor
The compressor is an automated, dynamic volume adjustment controller:
louder passages become quieter and quiet passages become louder. A
compressor is useful to make spoken passages more audible against
background noise or music in case a simple increase of the overall volume is
insufficient. Several useful presets are included for this purpose, however
compression may also be set manually.
Ratio: This parameter controls the compression level.
Threshold: This sets the volume threshold below and above which
compression is applied.
Attack: Sets the algorithm's reaction time to increasing sound levels.
Release: Sets the algorithm's reaction time to falling sound levels.
Gain: The gain controller amplifies the compressed signal.
MAGIX Mastering Suite
http://pro.magix.com
MAGIX Mastering Suite is a special effect rack for use with the mixer master
channel. Its effects serve the so-called "Mastering" with which the finished
mixed music file is given its last "cut".
The On/Off switches can switch the effects on and off individually. Each effect
offers a number of presets, which can be selected from a list on the bottom
edge of the effect.
The settings of all effects can also be saved
together as one preset so that you can use
your ideal mastering setting again for other
arrangements.
Each effect can be reset by pressing the "Reset" button.
Note: 5.1 Surround mode only provides the compressor (view page 185) and
parametric equalizer devices in this case.
186 Audio editing
Parametric Equalizer
The parametric equalizer consists of four filter bands for adjusting the overall
sound of the music track. Each band is a filter with a typical "bell shape".
Within a certain frequency range and around an adjustable middle frequency,
you can increase or reduce the signal level gain. The width of this frequency
range is called bandwidth. The bandwidth is defined by the Q value. The higher
the Q value, the narrower and steeper the filter curve.
You can influence the basic sound of the mix by increasing and decreasing the
broadband to give it more "depth" (lower center = 200-600 Hz) or more "air"
(highs = 10Khz). You can also decrease the narrow bandwidth (high Q value) in
the frequency response, e.g. to remove disruptive frequencies.
Graphic: The resulting frequency path of the
equalizer is displayed in the graphic. The
frequency is spread out horizontally, the
increase or decrease of the respective
frequency, vertically.
The blue bullets 1-4 symbolize the four wave bands. You can move them
around with the mouse until you find your desired frequency response.
Peak meter: The peak meter gives you control over the output level of the
equalizer. The adjacent master gain controller can be used to balance the level
with the EQ.
Edit: The "Edit" button opens the fine tuning for the four bands:
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 187
Parameter selection: With the buttons on the right you can select the
parameter that can be adjusted with four faders of each band. Furthermore,
there are number keys to enter every parameter of the bands.
Gain dB: These controllers allow you to raise or lower the filter. Setting the
controller to 0 deactivates the filter and doesn’t use CPU power.
Freq. Hz: The center frequency of the individual filters can be set between 10
Hz and 24 kHz with the frequency controllers. Freely choosing the frequency
enables multiple filters to be set to the same frequency in order to have a
greater effect.
Q (bandwidth): Set the bandwidth of the individual filters between 10 Hz and
10 kHz.
http://pro.magix.com
There is still a peculiarity among bands 1 and 4; The filter curve for these
bands can be changed from a normal "peaking" EQ filter ( ) to "shelving"
( ) (this is the basic setting) and high (band 1) or high-cut (band 4) .
When using the "shelving" filter, a soft increase or decrease in all frequencies
happens above or below the filter frequency, and the Q parameter does not
have a function here. With a low-cut or high-cut filter, all frequencies below
(low-cut) or above (high-cut) the set frequency are filtered out.
188 Audio editing
Multimax
MultiMax is a compressor with three independent frequency bands. The
dynamics are edited separately for each band.
The advantage of a multi-band compressor versus a "normal" compressor is
that the "pumping" tendency and other unwanted side effects are dramatically
reduced while editing the dynamics. For instance, it can prevent a bass top
peak from "reducing" the entire signal.
Multi-band technology also lets you specifically edit individual frequency
ranges.
Link: When this function is activated, when one slider is moved, all others
change in the same proportion. However, the way the dynamics are edited is
not affected.
HiQ: When the "HiQ" (High Quality) setting is activated, more precise
algorithms are used, which raises the processor load. It is recommendable to
turn on this setting before exporting.
Frequency band settings: Frequency band settings takes place directly in the
graphic. Simply click on the separator lines and move them.
Lo/Mid/Hi: These knobs control the degree of compression for each frequency
band.
Presets: In Multimax you can open various presets for various user cases. For
example:
Cassette NR-B decoder: MAGIX Video Pro X4 simulates decoding of Dolby B
+ C noise suppression if a Dolby player is not available. Cassettes recorded
with Dolby B or C sound more muffled and slurry if played back without
corresponding Dolby.
Leveler: This setting automatically sets the entire material to an identical
volume level. Access to volume control is hidden. This way you can even out
steep volume differences between songs. To equalize volume variations
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 189
between different songs, the function "Normalize loudness" is also provided in
the "Effects" menu.
DeEsser: These special presets serve to remove overly present "s" sounds in
voice recordings.
Stereo FX
The Stereo FX enhancer allows you to determine the positioning of the audio
material in the stereo picture. If the stereo recordings sound out of focus and
undifferentiated, an extension of the stereo base width can often provide better
transparency.
Bandwidth control: Adjusts the bandwidth between mono (on the extreme
left), unchanged bandwidth (center), and maximum bandwidth (”wide”, on the
extreme right). Reducing the bandwidth can produce a rise in the level. In
extreme cases, e.g. when the left and the right channels include identical
material and the bandwidth control is pushed to the extreme left on “mono”,
the result can increase the level by 3 dB.
Raising the bandwidth (values of 100) diminishes the mono compatibility. This
means that recordings edited this way sound hollow when listened to in mono.
http://pro.magix.com
Volume control: Adjusts the volume of every single channel, thereby adjusting
the entire balance. The reduction of left and right levels is displayed under the
control buttons. A centered recording can later be moved to the left or right of
the stereo balance.
Stereo meter: This provides a graphic display of the phase relation of the audio
signal. You can use it to review the orientation of the signal in the stereo
balance and the effect of the stereo enhancer.
In order to achieve greatest compatibility with mono, the display should come
closest to a diagonal line. Otherwise some frequency ranges may erase
themselves if the stereo signal is played on a mono device.
Karaoke presets: These presets open a special karaoke effect that more or
less eliminates vocals. It deletes middle frequencies typical for human vocals
during playback so that someone else can do the singing.
190 Audio editing
In typical karaoke songs, the lyrics are usually displayed as subtitles in the
video clip so that the singer can follow along. MAGIX Video Pro X4 also comes
with a suitable feature: the title editor, which can be used to create karaoke
subtitles. Please read the "Title editor" section in the chapter "Images and
video objects".
Digital Audio Meter
On the lower border of the MAGIX Mastering Suite there is a digital audio meter
which provides separate control method displays for 10 wave bands on each
channel. This device is used for orientation purposes, e.g. selective equalizer
editing.
Limiter
The Limiter prevents clipping by automatically
lowering any volume levels that are too high.
Quiet parts remain unaffected. Unlike the
Compressor, this feature attempts to preserve
the basic sound as much as possible.
Automatic track damping
This command from the context menu automatically dampens the volume of
other audio objects. The volume of the selected object on the track remains
unchanged.
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 191
http://pro.magix.com
Only original sound: Here you can also specify whether you want to dampen
the original sound of the video or all audio tracks.
Transition length: In the dialog you can activate and deactivate the value of the
dampening. You can use this command while recording audio (view page 84)
(Audio recording, advanced options).
Audio CDs
Loading an audio CD works just like loading of any other files into the
arrangement.
Place an audio CD into the drive.
Find the drive in your Media Pool The individual CD titles appear in the file list.
Double click on the song to preview.
Drag & Drop the CD title into a track of the current arrangement, and it will be
digitally scanned and copied to the hard-drive. The files will be saved in the
import folder (this can be indicated in "File" > "Settings" > "Program" >
"Folder").
The audio object appears in the track and can be played back or edited
immediately.
Import audio CD tracks
There is also a custom option for audio CDs in "File" > "Import audio-CD
track(s)", which allows simple import with additional options.
This option opens the CD Manager where you can select tracks from Audio
CDs and partially or fully import them into the arrangement. Audio tracks are
imported in WAV format, saved in a selectable directory and imported into the
arrangement.
192 Audio editing
The tracklist dialog
Tracks can be selected from the list with a mouse click or with the key
combination Shift + arrow or Ctrl + mouse click.
Transport control in the dialog activates the preview function. The playback
arrow starts audio playback of the first selected track.
Select all tracks: This option selects all audio tracks in order to copy the
complete CD.
Save selected tracks: This button opens dialog to save selected tracks. You
can either place all files into a single WAV file or create a separate WAV file for
each track. A new object will be created in the arrangement for each track in
either case.
Options CD drive: With this option you can access the "CD-/DVD drive list".
CD/DVD drive list
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 193
Configuration: This button opens the configuration dialog, where various
special settings can be made.
Reset: sets drive settings back to default.
Add: Creates a new drive in the list, which first requires special settings.
Delete: Deletes selected drive from the list.
Load setup: Loads the current drive list and all configuration data from a *.cfg
file.
Save setup: Saves the current drive list and all configuration files in a *.cfg file.
CD/DVD-ROM configuration
http://pro.magix.com
Drive Name: Lets you edit the name of the drive in the list. This is useful if you
create more than one entry accessing the same physical drive.
Host Adapter Number: Lets you specify the number of your SCSI adapter -
normally 0.
Bus ID: Here you can enter the ID of your CD-ROM drive. Be sure to set the
correct ID, there is no error checking!
194 Audio editing
http://pro.magix.com
Bus LUN: sets the LUN parameter, normally 0.
Alias: Lets you select the manufacturer type of your CD ROM drive.
Normal copy mode: copies audio files without any software correction.
Copy mode sector synchronization: copies audio files with a special
correction algorithm. This is especially useful, since many CD drives have
problems finding an exact position again and gaps can occur.
Burst copy mode: optimizes the speed of the copy process, no software
correction is used.
Sectors per cycle: defines the audio sector count that should be read from the
audio CD in one cycle. The higher the number of sectors, the faster the
copying process. Numerous SCSI systems have problems with more than 27
sectors.
Sync sectors: sets the count of audio sectors, which should be used for
software correction. A higher number results in a better synchronization but
also in a slower copying process.
Audio editing 195
Mixer
The Mixer can be opened by pressing the "M" key or via the button bar in the
main window (also: "View" > "Mixer").
Mixer channels
Each arranger track is represented with a corresponding mixer channel in the
mixer. The mixer channel offers a range of options to regulate objects' audio
signals together in the track.
http://pro.magix.com
FX: Opens (view page 184) the audio effect rack .
Auto: activates the volume and panautomation (view page 197).
Plug-ins: You can access the audio plug-ins (view page 175)
installed on the PC using the triangle-shaped button.
Volume: You can adjust the track volume using the large slider.
196 Audio editing
Stereo panorama: You can set the stereo -position for each track
using the knob.
Note: Double-clicking on the volume or panorama slider sets it
back to its passive default position, in which no CPU is used.
Solo/mute: The "Solo" switches a track into solo mode, which
means that all tracks not switched to "solo" will be muted. "Mute"
makes the track silent.
Effect channels
In addition to normal mixer channels that correspond to the tracks in the
arrangement, you can create two separate effect channels. The principle
behind them: You can take a partial signal from a normal channel into an effect
channel, where the partial signal is then processed with additional effects. This
is a common process used in professional audio production.
In each mixer channel there are two FX-Send knobs (FX 1 and
FX2 ) under plug-in slots.
Here you can determine the strength of the signal from the track that is routed
into both available effect channels.
The FX tracks are usually hidden in the mixer. When an FX-Send is used, they
will appear to the left next to the master section.
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 197
An effect channel is a complete additional mixer channel with
volume and panorama controls, an effect rack and two plug-
in slots.
Reverb is activated in the first effect channel by default
because this is the most important application of send
effects.
The volume control regulates the strength of the effect
channel and corresponds to an AUX return control.
The"Mute" button is used to switch the FX function on and
off. By activating "solo", you can listen to the effect channel
separately. Track peakmeters that send to the FX track
appear greyed out.
Master channel
The master channel is to the right of the individual channels. It controls the
overall sound and offers all editing options: volume, panorama, plug-ins and
effects.
The FX buttons and the plug-in slots work just like in the other channels. The
FX button opens the master audio effect rack. With "Reset" you can rest all
mixer settings, including effect channels.
http://pro.magix.com
Mastering: Here you can open the MAGIX Mastering Suite (view page 185).
5.1 Surround: This button switches the mixer into Surround mode (view page
202).
Both faders control the total volume.
Link buttons: If the link button is deactivated, the volume
of the right and left channels may be set individually.
Volume and panorama automation
You can automate volume and panorama for a track. This means that during
playback you can record the movements of the sliders on the track. This way,
198 Audio editing
for instance, you can simulate the movement of a sound source from left to
right and make volume adjustment instantly during playback.
As long as the autobutton for a track is activated, all movements of
the volume and panorama sliders will be recorded.
The automation is displayed as a curve in the arranger and can be edited later
with the mouse.
Note: The mixer's automation curves relate to a track, which means that they
are independent of the objects contained on it.
5.1 Surround
MAGIX Video Pro X4 supports playback and export in genuine 5.1 Surround
sound.
Requirements
You will require a sound card or a sound chip which is integrated into the
computer's motherboard with six individual outputs to playback the individual
channels:
front left (L) / right (R)
centre (C) / subwoofer (LFE)
back left (Ls) / right (Rs)
Surround playback is possible with all audio driver models (see Playback
settings), (Wave, DirectSound, ASIO).
DirectSound is supported by most of the standard sound cards.
Wave drivers are similarly supported by many standard sound cards; however,
individual sound cards (for example, Soundblaster) require access to
DirectSound.
Note: 24-bit surround playback is often not possible, therefore please select
16-bit output.
For surround output with ASIO drivers, you will require a 6-channel-capable
ASIO driver (e.g. MAGIX Low Latency). Older multi-channel audio cards that
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 199
http://pro.magix.com
activate their stereo output couples via multiple separate drivers are not
suitable.
Output of the six output signals is achieved in all driver models in the output
channels in the same (standardized) order:
Channels 1/2: L-R
Channels 3/4: C-LFE
Channels 5/6: Ls-Rs
When using WAV or ASIO drivers, the loudspeaker settings normally have to be
changed to 5.1 playback in the control panel.
In order to do this you have to start the Control Panel for "Sounds and audio
devices" and select "Loudspeaker settings", "Advanced", "5.1 surround
loudspeakers".
On most systems the program does this automatically while using
DirectSound.
Importing and exporting surround audio files
Import
When importing MPEG-2 files with Dolby Digital sound (e.g. VOB files from
DVDs or DVB-TV recordings), you can choose from two different applications:
Mixdown: Surround sound is displayed as an audio object under the video
object, playback of the surround track is reduced and recalculated to stereo
playback. Use this option if you don't wish to edit the surround sound, but
rather wish to export it. You can also use it if you think that a stereo export is
enough to meet your requirements
Surround mix: The individual surround channel pairs (L-R, C LFE, Ls-Rs) are
split into three audio tracks as separate objects and the mixer is then set to
surround mode. This mode allows you to change the surround mix.
In MAGIX Video Pro X4 the import of Dolby Digital surround is always executed
as a mixdown. MAGIX Video Pro X4 can also import interleaved wave files
(multi-channel wave files), multi-channel Windows Media Audio and MP3
surround files; a surround mix is always created.
Export
Surround mix exports can occur in any one of the following formats:
6-channel PCM files (interleaved wave)
200 Audio editing
http://pro.magix.com
Windows Media files (as a surround soundtrack of a Windows Media Video or
WMV-HD disc)
MPEG-2 files with a Dolby Digital audio track
The files created are fully compatible with the normal file formats, this means
that they can also be played on computers incapable of playing surround (in
normal stereo).
The export is performed via the same menu commands (e.g. "File -> Export
movie -> Audio as wave") like the normal stereo export. You will then be asked
if the export should be in stereo or surround format.
Export Dolby Digital surround via Smart Encoding
You can also burn material to be exported with surround sound again without
the need for the Dolby Digital codec (in MAGIX Video Pro X4 or MAGIX Video
Pro X4 without Dolby Digital encoder activation) to DVD or export the
corresponding MPEG files while keeping 5.1 surround sound. To do so, use
the "Smart Rendering" option which transfers the unprocessed parts of the
output material without renewed encoding. Read more on this in the MPEG
encoder settings section "General settings (view page 387)".
The import has to be executed as a mixdown, the audio material cannot be
changed (no fades, no audio cleaning, no volume adjustment). Harder cuts,
e.g. removal of commercials are allowed, but they may not happen precisely
according to the frame, but at the GOP (group of pictures) borders.
Audio editing 201
The mixer in surround mode
To activate surround playback, open the mixer (M key) and click on "5.1
surround" button in the master.
In the master, six peak meters for the individual channels are provided. The
normal panorama button turns into a representative display of the surround
editor (see below), which can be opened by clicking on the display.
http://pro.magix.com
The surround sound editor is also available to the effects tracks. For example,
you can send the original track to the front L/R speakers, the FX track however
will remain at the rear L/R speakers.
The master volume is applied to all channels, here the left controller influences
channels L and Ls, the right controller; channels R and Rs and the middle
value of both controller; the channels C and LFE.
The master plug-ins are only applied to the front channels.
The full effects palette of the mastering effects rack in MAGIX Mastering Suite
is not available in 5.1 surround mode, but rather only the compressor and the
parametric equalizer (from the Mastering Suite) are provided. The settings of
these effects have the same effect on all six channels.
202 Audio editing
5.1 Surround editor
The selected mixer track's 5.1 surround editor allows you to arrange the audio
signal of a track (displayed as two red sound sources) in stereo space. The
signal is dispersed to the 5 (blue) loudspeakers which represent the individual
surround channels.
There are 6 channels:
L: front left
R: front right
C: center
Ls: back left/left surround
Rs: back right / right surround
LFE subbass (Low Frequency Effect) channel
Dispersing the signal to the 5 loudspeakers occurs after the sound source
emits a sound field of a certain level (displayed as red circles). The further away
a loudspeaker's source is, the lesser its share of the corresponding
loudspeaker channel. The position of the loudspeaker can be moved with the
mouse.
The subbass share (LFE) is set directly from the corresponding value table. It
can also be changed by dragging the mouse.
There are various modes in which you can use the source signal:
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 203
http://pro.magix.com
Mono: The (stereo) source signal is seen as mono material, the left and right
channels are mixed together and arranged together. The original stereo
information is lost here.
Stereo 1: Similar to mono mode insofar as the left and right channels are
moved together, but only a portion of the left source is audible in the
loudspeakers L and Ls and only a portion of the right source in the right
channels R and Rs. The stereo information remains as intact as possible.
Stereo 2: The left and right channels can be moved individually. The distance
between the left and right source is retained when you move the left source.
You can move an individual source by holding down the "Alt" key.
Center/LFE: Only the left channel is arranged. In return, the LFE share is
drawn solely from the right channel. This mode is only important for importing
Surround material.
Width determines the level of the sound field of an individual source.
Automation:
Panning of the sound source on the loudspeaker can be automated to simulate
movements in the room.
For this to happen "Automation" must be activated. There are two methods to
create automations: record and draw.
To record (when automation is on), the sound source is moved between the
loudspeakers during playback. When recording the automation, the "Record"
check box lights up red.
The draw function is an alternative to drawing out complex movements. When
drawing in active mode, all panning movements are transmitted to the time
interval between the start and end marker (when the mouse button is held).
You can thus draw the entire movement curve for the selected time range.
"Reset" deletes surround automation from the track.
There is no automation of the parameters for width and LFE, of the distance
between the left and right source in "Stereo 2" mode, or of the loudspeaker
positions.
204 Audio editing
http://pro.magix.com
Transfer surround tracks from Samplitude/Sequoia to MAGIX Video Pro X4
Note: In order to be able to use Samplitude/Sequoia parallel to MAGIX Video
Pro X4, the programs will have to be synchronized with each other. Read more
about the topic "Synchronizing Samplitude/Sequoia with MAGIX Video Pro X4".
Existing surround tracks are transferred directly to MAGIX Video Pro X4 from
Samplitude/Sequoia. Set a playback marker first in MAGIX Video Pro X4 at the
starting position of the movie – the wave file will be added at the position of
this marker.
Note: In MAGIX Video Pro X4, the last six tracks must be free to ensure that
correct transfer can take place. Set the number of tracks to a higher number in
the Movie settings as required.
Switch to Samplitude/Sequoia
To transfer, open the menu item "Export to MAGIX Video Pro X4" in the "File"
menu under "Export".
Please note that when exporting, a sampling rate of 48 kHz should be set,
since this is the sampling rate used in DVD audio streams.
Click "OK" and enter the save location and a logical name for the surround
sound in the dialog that opens.
After export, the six surround channels will be loaded directly into MAGIX
Video Pro X4. 5.1 surround mode will be activated and the channels will
feature the corresponding track settings.
Set multiple sound tracks
Multiple sound tracks are provided for adding multiple audio tracks to the video
for selection via the disc's menu. This has primarily two main uses:
Creating audio tracks for different languages
Mixing stereo and Surround audio separately
These two applications can be combined, since MAGIX Video Pro X4 features
up to 8 separate multi-sound tracks.
Workflow
You can define any track as a "DVD track" using the track box context menu.
Right click on the track box.
Audio editing 205
Select "DVD audio track" > "DVD audio track: not used". A dialog for naming
the audio track will appear.
Give the track a descriptive name. The name entered here will later appear in
the burned disc's menu.
Now you can assign additional arranger tracks to this DVD track. To do so you
can set a checkmark in the context menu of the track boxes. By default "All
audio tracks" is preset, which makes the audio material on the track audible on
all audio tracks.
Normally, multiple DVD audio tracks should not be played at the same time.
For this reason, you can select the DVD audio track to be played in the
arranger using the small arrow on the speaker button.
http://pro.magix.com
206 Audio editing
Tip: You can use the multitrack structure for creating language options, for
example. First, define a multi-audio track for each language and assign all
tracks that belong to a certain language track as needed.
Dub individual languages
Once all multi-sound tracks have been defined, MAGIX Video Pro X4 sets the
first one by default for you to mix.
Once this is completed continue
with the other multi-sound tracks
simply by switching the active
DVD audio track.
A recording may be muted by clicking the small arrow next to the button.
Combine Surround and stereo tracks
Note: The method described here is only recommended if the stereo track
requires a separate mix, since it normally isn't necessary to add an extra stereo
track. Playback devices automatically apply a downmix to stereo sound in
place of 5.1 Surround when it is required.
If you still wish to create a disc that contains a 5.1 Surround track as well as a
regular stereo track, proceed as follows:
Select the "Stereo" DVD audio track.
Open the mixer and proceed with normal stereo mixdown.
Close the mixer.
Select the "Surround" DVD audio track.
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 207
Open the mixer and activate 5.1 Surround mode. Conduct the Surround
mixdown.
Mixing stereo
Now set MAGIX Video Pro X4 so that only
the stereo track can be heard. You can
mute the recording by clicking the small
arrow next to the button, and then select
"Stereo" in the DVD sound track.
Now open the mixer (view page 195), and if "5.1 Surround" mode is still
active, then shut it off. Mix the stereo as you normally would, and then
close the mixer.
5.1 Surround mix
Now set MAGIX Video Pro X4 so that only
the Surround track can be heard. Mute the
recording by clicking the small arrow next
to the button, and then select "Surround"
in the DVD sound track.
Now open the mixer (view page 195) and activate 5.1 Surround mode.
Mix the Surround (view page 198) like usual.
Set formats of individual multi-sound tracks
http://pro.magix.com
Next, make the necessary changes to the formats of the multi-sound tracks.
This takes place in the MPEG encoder settings, which can be opened form the
burn dialog.
The simplified settings dialog displays an additional section for the multi-sound
tracks. From the flip menu, select the DVD audio track to be set. Now, you can
assign each track to the desired format.
Click "Edit" to open the advanced audio settings dialog for the MPEG encoder.
Now you can define which format the selected DVD audio track should have.
For more information, read the "Audio settings" (view page 390) section in the
"MPEG encoder settings" (view page 386) chapter.
Note: Even if you create all multi-audio tracks in 5.1 Surround, you must make
this setting for each separately.
Sound tracks which feature the setting "Apply to all multi-sound tracks" will
always be mixed with the other multi-sound tracks, although these will be
created using the format set for them.
208 Audio editing
Scrubbing
The term "scrubbing" originates from the age of cassette players and provides
quicker monitoring of passages of a film or a piece of music. The function plays
short samples at the original speed.
Note: In order to preview individual audio objects completely, use "Preview
(view page 42)" mouse mode.
Activate scrubbing
Scrubbing can be activated using the
small arrow next to the speaker
button.
Scrubbing: Modes
No scrubbing: Scrubbing is inactive. If the playback marker is set or moved,
then sound will not be played.
Scrubbing (1 frame): Scrubbing is active and samples are only 1 (video) frame
in length. The speed is 25 fps, i.e. 1/25 second. This mode is suitable for
positioning the playback marker exactly.
Scrubbing (long): Scrubbing is active, the sample length amounts to approx.
0.5 seconds. In this mode, locating specific events is particularly easy.
Play 1x with scrubbing: If this option is active, the current position will be
played one time. If it is inactive, then it will be repeated.
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 209
Using "Scrubbing"
If scrubbing mode is selected, set the playback marker to a certain location in
the timeline using the mouse. Hold the mouse key and move the playback
marker to various locations in the arrangement.
Scrubbing may be used also by employing the jog and shuttle wheel on the
video monitor, as well as through various hardware controllers, which gives the
software the feel of an analog video editing system!
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker automatically generates music tracks that
correspond to the indicated mood. Even mood changes are possible.
You can open MAGIX Soundtrack Maker by going to "Edit" > "Assistants (view
page 311)".
Select music style
http://pro.magix.com
Choose a musical style first. The option "Apply only between start and end
marker" limits the length of the background music you want to create. Start
and end markers (view page 111) may be set with the left and right mouse
button if MAGIX Soundtrack Maker is open.
210 Audio editing
Set mood change:
You can select a mood from the list.
Preview audio: Preview the selected mood here.
Position: Use the position slider to skip to a certain position in order to set the
mood for a certain position. The start marker may be moved instead with the
left mouse button. The preview will be displayed in the video monitor
simultaneously.
Add emotion: This button inserts the selected mood at the current position.
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker will then suggest a new position for the next
emotion by repositioning the position slider. Of course, you may also position
this elsewhere to insert further moods.
Delete emotion: Removes the currently set.
Generate background music
Clicking "Create soundtrack" creates a new soundtrack. "Progress" shows the
current status.
Variations
If the background music that has been created is not suitable, a variation may
be created. This process may be repeated for the entire background music as
well as for individual emotions:
If you want to vary the entire background music, then simply click on "Create
variations".
http://pro.magix.com
Audio editing 211
http://pro.magix.com
If you only want this to apply to a certain emotion, then move to it with the
position slider first in the dialog (or the play marker on the main screen).
Activate the option "Vary only selected emotions". Now click "Create
variation".
Automatic cut adjustment: This option re-arranges the video and photo
objects in your project to match the music. Make sure this option is
deactivated in case this function is unwanted.
Mixdown of audio objects
If the arranger becomes too full to manage, the system is out of RAM, or you
just want to "summarize" your production, use the mix down function to
convert the entire audio arrangement into a single audio file. Just click on the
mix down button in the button bar or select the function from the "Processing"
menu.
You can choose a name and a destination for storing the mix down object. The
default directory is "My audio/video".
Storage of the audio arrangement will take up a little more space on your hard-
drive, but it requires less RAM for playback than an unmixed entire
arrangement.
Note: The mix down effect optimizes the volume automatically. Even if the mix
down function is used various times, you will not lose audio quality.
212 Edit disc menu
Edit disc menu
Switch to the "Burn" screen first by pressing the button
displayed.
Here you can adjust the disc menu before burning and burn your movies with a
menu to a CD, DVD or Blu-ray disc.
All movies loaded into the project will be included. If you want to remove some
of the loaded films, then switch to the "Edit" screen again and delete the
unwanted movies from the project there. To do so, switch to the
corresponding movie, open the "File" menu and select "Manage movies ->
Remove movie" (view page 300).
Note: For screen resolutions 1280 x 1024 pixels or higher, the program display
will be different. This makes the program more manageable and easier to use.
The work steps remain the same in spite of the different display.
Preview and editing
MAGIX Video Pro X4 provides two different modes for designing and
previewing the disc menu.
"Preview" mode simulates the behavior of a playback device,
e.g. DVD player or Blu-ray player.
You can select a template for the menu and burn the disc.
In "Editing" mode, you may adjust many features of the disc
menu. Templates are also available here that may be flexibly
adjusted to suit your needs.
Remote control
The virtual remote control is an important helper when it comes to checking
how the disc will perform later.
When the disc featuring the project is inserted into the player, this remote
control will control the preview picture just like a "real" remote control controls
the picture on a monitor or TV. The menu navigation may be activated via the
arrow keys or the "OK" button. Activated buttons are highlighted.
http://pro.magix.com
Edit disc menu 213
The number keys select the corresponding entry on the
menu page. All menu entries are marked with a
corresponding number. Within a chapter menu, playback is
started from the particular scene. In the movie menu, the
corresponding chapter menu (if available) is changed or
movie playback is started.
Navigation button: Use these buttons to navigate in the
menu of the disc being burned. The individual entries may
be changed and confirmed by pressing "OK". The remote
control reacts exactly like a genuine DVD/Blu-ray player's
remote control.
Skip/move forward/back: This allows you to skip to the
next or previous scene while playing back your movie. In
the menu, you can skip forward or back from one menu
page to another.
Play: Starts the first entry in the menu. In case chapter
menus are available (view page 217), the chapter menu will
be displayed first. Press the play button again to start
playback at the beginning of the first scene of the first
chapter.
Stop: Pressing stop halts playback.
Disc: Switches to the first page of the film menu.
http://pro.magix.com
Sub: Switches to the chapter menu (if available) for the currently selected film.
Menu
The selection menu is also burned to disc and appears when inserted into your
player. Just like with a store-bought DVD or Blu-ray Disc, you may easily select
your movies with the help of preview pictures, or access particular chapters
within a movie.
214 Edit disc menu
Templates
You will find the menu templates below.
To the left, you will see a tree structure for selecting various menu templates.
At the top, you should first select whether you would like to use templates in
ratio "16"9" or "4:3".
Animated (DVD): These templates contain background and introductory
videos as well as music. The control elements are displayed in various modes.
The templates can be used only for mini DVDs, DVDs and AVCHD discs.
Static (4:3 only, DVD): Here you will find templates made up of regular
background pictures and control elements.
Custom: These templates adjust to your disc project; the movies and scenes
you use are integrated directly into the menu.
HD static (16:9 only, DVD, Blu-ray, AVCHD, WMV HD): These templates
contain super-sharp, high-res background images that are particularly
noticeable on HD TV devices.
Movie templates (only 16:9): Here you will find menu templates that are
specially made for movie templates found in the Media Pool.
Note: These menus require "Film menu" and "Chapter menu" to be activated in
the "Edit" screen under "Disc options".
If you've selected one of the menu templates, you can use the horizontal scroll
bar to view all the others available. There are lots of options when using the
templates:
To apply a template to all menu pages, double-click the desired template. The
complete template will then be applied.
You can also combine various elements from different templates with each
other. To do so, you must first switch into Editing mode. If, for example, you
wish to combine the text format of a template with the background of another
one, double-click on the template containing the background first. Then click
on the "Font" tab and select a template for the font.
http://pro.magix.com
Edit disc menu 215
You can load the layout (or individual layout elements) for the current menu
(movie or scenes) as well as for all menus.
Note: Some menu templates include intro videos with a smooth transition to
the menu page!
Edit disc menu
To edit individual menu elements and the menu structure,
activate the "Edit" button.
Edit menu elements
Hold down the left mouse button and drag text boxes or graphical elements to
the desired position. You can adjust the size by dragging out the corners and
edges of the frame.
http://pro.magix.com
Undo: This command allows you to undo the last changes made.
Redo: This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.
Lock aspect ratio: To avoid distortion, use this button to lock the
aspect ratio for the menu elements.
Group: Menu elements are moved or resized simultaneously as a
group, including the description text and number.
Fade in TV display area in the preview monitor: This option
displays the image borders of the television (view page 164) as
lines in the preview monitor.
Grid: This button shows a grid to help position frames exactly next
to each other as required. Using the small arrow next to the button
216 Edit disc menu
you can open a dialog to fine tune the grid settings.
Export import PSD
Import PSD: With this option you can import a menu template created
in PSD format (for example, in Xara Xtreme Pro, Photoshop,…)
Export PSD: With this option, you can export your menu as a PSD file (
for example for Xara Xtreme Pro, Photoshop,…)
Note: With the help of these two options, you can quickly adjust your menu to
your individual wishes. Simply export the menu, edit it in a graphics program,
save it and import the same file back into the program. To find out more, read
the Edit DVD menus in Xara Xtreme Pro or Photoshop (view page 222) section
in the PDF manual!
Navigation
Using navigation links above you can reach the structure of the menu entries.
All movies are listed as first entries. The
corresponding menu level is the film menu.
All scenes are listed as second entries next to it to
the right. The corresponding menu level is the
chapter menu.
Removing the red check deactivates the
corresponding entry in the chapter menu. The
scenes are still displayed of course, but you can no
longer select them directly from the menu.
You can open the movie menu for further editing by
clicking on the movie above it.
If you click on one of the chapters, the chapter
menu in the preview will be opened for editing.
Disc options
Here you can activate or deactivate certain elements or even complete menus.
http://pro.magix.com
Edit disc menu 217
Intro video: Press this button to load videos to be used as introductions to
your discs. The following formats are supported: "*.avi", "*.mpg", "*.mxv",
"*.vob". The intro is played immediately after the DVD has been inserted into
the player. The DVD menu will then appear. A check mark "Do not skip"
ensures that the intro video must be played completely each time the disc is
inserted and that it may not be skipped with the remote control or otherwise.
Film menu, chapter menu, and audio menu
The disc menu essentially consists of two layers:
Film menu: The upper layer includes the film menu, which is only used if a
project contains multiple movies.
Chapter menu: This is the lowest layer of the disc menu, which utilizes the
chapter markers in a movie as menu entries. More information about this is
available in "Chapter markers (view page 112)".
Note: A chapter menu cannot contain more than 99 entries. If your movie has
more chapters, then you can either burn it without a chapter menu or split it
into multiple parts.
Audio menu: If your project features multiple DVD audio tracks, then a menu
will be added to the disc for the user to select an audio track.
Preview pictures: Shows/hides the preview pictures in the disc menu.
http://pro.magix.com
Numbering: The numbers beside the menu entries may be selected directly
using the remote control, but they might be unwanted at times. Use this option
to show/hide them.
Frame: A frame borders the preview pictures. If this is unwanted, it may be
removed easily using this option.
Create your own menu background
You can edit the existing menu background or create a new one from scratch.
A click on this button switches to the "Edit" interface
and loads the selected menu background as video.
Here you can change and design the background as you please. The
background movie will be set as the menu background automatically after
pressing "Save".
218 Edit disc menu
Tip: If you would like to design a new menu background, simply delete all
existing objects from the menu project and load new ones.
Design page
Edit: This provides three options for setting the background of a menu page.
You may either set a certain "color value" for the background or you can select
an image file from your hard drive. You may also select a certain frame from a
video in your project.
In external editor: A PSD file (view page 216) is sent directly to the program
that has been selected in the program settings as the menu editor (view page
265).
New menu pages may also be added or irrelevant pages may be removed.
Adds a new menu page.
Removes the selected menu page.
Animated selection menus
Audio-visual animations may also be added to the DVD menus. As required,
background videos are played as endless loops while the menu is shown on
the screen. Add background music in various formats or use any background
picture for each menu.
Sound/music: Load an audio file into the preview monitor and use it as an
animation in the menu background.
Video: Load a video or graphics file into the preview monitor and use it as an
animation in the menu background. In addition to the options for the
background graphic (see above), you may also use a sequence from a loaded
slideshow or from a different video file.
Background video options:
Create animated menu buttons: The preview images for individual movies in
the movie menu are shown as small movie samples. Set the start point and
length of the animation using the sequence options faders.
Use video's audio track: The audio track of the background video is used
with the menu.
Play menu animation as a loop: The background video (audio and/or video) is
played back as a loop.
http://pro.magix.com
Edit disc menu 219
Length of the menu view is set by: Audio/video or whichever medium is
longer. You can specify how long the background video should be here. The
other medium will be played as a loop.
Create a button design
MAGIX Video Pro X4 enables easy editing of all buttons together with their
menu entries.
You can edit menu entries that you created using this button
or with a double click on the menu. The dialog with the
properties of the menu entries (view page 220) will open.
Edit in MAGIX Photo Designer: You can open MAGIX Photo
Designer for additional editing of elected menu elements.
Apply to all objects: Applies the properties of the selected
button to all remaining buttons.
New menu entries may also be added or irrelevant pages may be removed.
Adds a new menu entry.
Removes the selected menu entry.
http://pro.magix.com
Tip: If you would simply like to deactivate unused menu entries, this may be
done via the navigation.
Note: The chapter menu is formed via chapter markers (view page 112) and
can be influenced in detail with these.
Pressing this button or double-clicking the menu
entries allows menu entries you have created to be
edited. The dialog with the properties of the menu
entries (view page 220) will open.
Edit in MAGIX Photo Designer: These
buttons open MAGIX Photo Designer for
further editing of your background pictures
or the selected menu elements.
220 Edit disc menu
Jump to linked page
To test the targets of menu entries,
select the desired menu entry and click
the button.
Menu entry/menu page properties
Double clicking the preview picture or a menu entry opens an editor for you to
adjust the preview picture or menu entry.
Menu text
In the text input field, you can enter any text to match the chosen menu entry.
Set the vertical direction of the text (upwards, centered or
downward).
Set the horizontal direction of the text (left, centered
or right).
Font size: Set the height of the text in pixels.
Font color: Define the foreground color of the text.
Font: Set which font and which style (bold, italic, etc.) should be used.
http://pro.magix.com
Edit disc menu 221
http://pro.magix.com
Shadow: Set the color and size of the shadow that will appear underneath the
text.
3D effect: If you would like to make your text appear three-dimensional, you
can set the width, height, and color of the 3D effect.
Apply to all: Except for the text, all settings are applied to all entries in the
current menu.
Menu image
Use frame from movie: Use the fader to set which frame should be used in the
video as a preview picture. The numerical input fields are sorted as follows:
Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames.
Use different graphic: You can also load your own bitmap images to be used
as menu pictures.
Hint: It may be the case that there are no menu pictures in some menu
templates, so changing the menu picture won't have any noticeable effect.
Actions at the end of the movie (preview images in film menu only)
Enter which action should be carried out once the film has finished playing
here. Select from:
Stop playback: This option depends on the DVD player being used. Most
DVD players show the DVD player's own menu (or background picture) after
playback.
Jump to movie menu/chapter menu: Jumps back to the previously displayed
menu.
Tip: If one of these two options is not available, please check which menu
mode is set.
Jump to next movie: The next movie will be played without any additional
action.
Play movie as endless loop: Any movie may be burned onto a disc as a loop.
This means that the movie will be played as a endless loop until the next menu
entry is accessed using the remote control or playback is stopped. This way,
you can transform your TV into an aquarium, a train journey, a fireplace or
anything that you could watch over and over again.
222 Edit disc menu
http://pro.magix.com
Note: This option only functions for DVDs, Mini DVDs, or Blu-ray Discs.
Edit your own menu entries
Note: This function is available only in the deluxe version.
There is another view in this dialog to edit menu entries you have created.
Menu links can be edited here. This makes it possible to link a menu entry with
a certain action, menu page, or a certain position in the movie.
No link: The menu element cannot be selected and has no function other than
to display menu text.
Link to page in current menu: Jumps to a menu page in the current movie or
chapter menu in the current film.
Link to another menu: Opens another movie or chapter menu.
Link to chapter in a movie: If this option is selected, enter a film and chapter
marker where playback should start.
Note: For DVDs, only chapters within the current movie may be jumped to.
Link to film start: The movie will play back from the start.
Edit DVD menus with Xara Xtreme Pro or Photoshop
Besides the option of editing the menu template directly in the preview (view
page 215), menu templates may also be exported as a Photoshop file (*.psd)
and edited in an external graphics program. There you have complete control
of menu appearance, including complex text effects and highlighted state
management.
Export menu
The transfer of the menu templates to the graphics program takes place in one
of two ways:
Edit disc menu 223
If a complex, longer edit is required or if you have created a menu
without a template, then use the PSD import/export (view page 216)
function in the menu editing functions.
Next, open the PSD file in the graphics program of your choice.
For smaller changes, you can also shorten this process: click the button "In
external editor" in the "Disc options" on "Design page".
A temporary PSD file will be added and opened in the program that has been
selected in the program settings as the menu editor (view page 265). After
editing has been completed and saved in this external program, the temporary
PSD file will be imported again and the menu page will be updated
immediately.
Menu text with external menu editing
Menu elements are transferred as a bitmap during PSD export as well as
during import of the edited PSD. This also applies to the text displayed in the
menu. This text may also normally be changed in the "Menu entry properties"
dialog. The menu text are adjusted if movies or chapters are added or
removed.
http://pro.magix.com
The PSD contains these texts as a bitmap and cannot be changed. During
importing, the bitmaps replace the original text entries. By the way, this is
maintained, and the font will only be set to a size of 0 so that texts are not
displayed in duplicate; the menu will therefore look identical after external
editing.
It is important that no more movies or chapters are added to the menu.
Otherwise the preview images, that have also changed along with the menu
structure will no longer match the bitmap text, since the bitmap text will not
match the changed references in the menu structure!
An example
A chapter with two entries is present. Entry 1 is named "travel preparations".
Entry 2 is named "arrival". A chapter named "the trip" is going to be added
224 Edit disc menu
http://pro.magix.com
between chapter 1 and chapter 2. The second chapter now becomes chapter
3 and moves to the next menu page.
Normal text behavior: The second entry (now with preview image for the newly
inserted chapter) receives the new title "the trip". The next menu page features
chapter 3 as the first entry with the name "the trip".
Text after external menu editing: The second entry will feature the title "arrival"
(as a bitmap, as a component of the button), but the preview image will feature
the new chapter "the trip"! The next menu page now features the preview
image for chapter 3 (formerly chapter 2, "arrival"), this is now called "travel
preparations"! The name is a component of the button as a bitmap for the first
menu entry on the page, and this is "travel preparations" on the first menu
page. Completely out of order!
If the number of menu entries displayed is increased, this results from copying
the layer groups in the PSD (see below). Of course, the rendered text layers
are also copied into the layer groups, which results in incorrect text again.
The best way to proceed is to edit the text entries at the very end, since
changes normally will not follow at this point. If changes are required
nevertheless, then proceed as follows:
1. Restore the "correct" chapters or movie names by resetting the font size in
the dialog "Menu entry properties" to the default value. Two texts will be
displayed; the incorrect bitmap and the correct one.
Export the menu template as a PSD. 2.
3. Delete the incorrect bitmap object in t he corresponding layer and re-import
the PSD.
ourse, the Of c menu text may also be added from the start via an external
graphics editing program only (in order to take advantage of the additional
options provided in this case). Delete the corresponding bitmap objects in the
PSD immediately after export and replace these with your own text objects.
Structure of a PSD file
MAGIX Video Pro X4 produces a PSD file during export that contains a layer for
each object of the menu entry. This uses a naming scheme that enables
assignment of the objects in the file to their contents. Individual layers feature
mathematical signs that indicate their function. This naming scheme is similar
to that featured in Adobe Premiere and which is only expanded occasionally in
MAGIX Video Pro X4 to describe additional mechanisms.)
Edit disc menu 225
http://pro.magix.com
This is how these mathematical characters are used:
Characters for layer groups
(+-) or (+) Play button/start film
(++) Chapter menu button
(+>) Next page
(+<) Previous page
(+^) Root menu button (jump back from chapter menu)
(+*) Menu title:
(^^) Layer group is ignored
Characters fro individual layers
(-) Layer contains text
(=1) Layer contains a bitmap with a highlight of the menu element.
(%) Preview image/thumbnail from the movie to be referenced
Bitmap information will be ignored during import and only the
size and position will be exported.
Edit menu templates
The resulting PSD file will now be loaded into the external application. The
following steps may differ slightly depending on the application that is used.
The following steps, for example, describe the workflow in Photoshop CS,
Photoshop Elements 8, and the download version of Xara Xtreme Pro.
Editing a menu from 3 to 5 movies.
Photoshop Elements:
In Photoshop Elements, it is enough to touch an object with a held-down Alt
key on the video monitor and drag a copy of it to a new location. A movie
button and a chapter menu button should be duplicated each two times.
Assigning the movie takes place later via the index in the layer group hierarchy.
Make sure that the "x" chapter menu button ends up next to the "x" movie
button in the optical hierarchy. Otherwise, the screen will cause confusion for
its users.
Save the results.
226 Edit disc menu
http://pro.magix.com
Photoshop CS1:
In the context menu of the layer group to be duplicated in Photoshop CS1,
select "duplicate layer set". This must be done twice for the movie button and
the chapter menu button. Drag the created layer sets to the required
positions. To do so, the layer must be selected and the Ctrl button be held
down during the click.
Save the results.
Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6:
In Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6 you must first open the object gallery after
loading the PSD file. There, for each layer of the PSD file, corresponding Xara
layers will be created with contained objects. The layer groups are represented
with the names of individual Xara layers, with PSD layer names separated by
backslashes.
Find the layers of the group, which you would like to duplicate. In the example,
this refers to the 4 layers on the movie button ad two l ayers of the chapter
menu button. To ensure visual assignment of the objects to the work area, you
have to invest some effort since the Designer does not select the
corresponding objects when a layer is selected, and conversely it doesn't
select the layer when the work area with objects is selected. You have to open
a layer in the object gallery and select the contained object. Now you will see
the selection on the work space.
Now, the 6 layers will be copied along with the corresponding objects in the
object gallery by clicking on "duplicate". The newly created layers will always
be placed at the top position, so it makes most sense to copy the existing
layers from the lowermost to the topmost. Otherwise, you will have to restore
the correct order of the new layers using drag & drop.
Now, select all objects of the button while holding the Shift key and move them
to a new position. Usually, you also have to select the frame and chapter meny
objects behind the highlight layers and move those, too. Mutliselection in the
object gallery is not possible because the objects are in various layers, and the
program will prevent you from selecting them together.
These steps must be repeated for the second additional button.
Finally, the changes must be saved as a PSD file. To do so, select "Export" in
the File menu ("Save as..." wouldn't work).
Edit disc menu 227
http://pro.magix.com
Change text font
Photoshop Elements:
In Photoshop Elements it is recommended that you export the template after
changing the font size of the text to be edited to 0. This way, no text will be
visible in the PSD to be exported. This step is necessary because in Elements
you cannot change anything in the created layer groups and nothing in the
existing font layer can be removed.
Create the desired font objects using the text tool. A separate layer will be
created for each font object. Name the layers clearly by selecting "Rename
layer" from the context menu. Change layer names so that they begin with "(-)".
If additional layers are needed for the text (for example background
picture/frame, etc), their names will also have to start with an "(-)".
Add the created layer to the proper layer set using drag & drop (for example,
the new label for the movie button to the "(+) menu entry" layer set or the new
header to the "(+) title" layer set. To do so, you select the layers with the
mouse inside the layer container and drop them into the proper layer group.
Save the results.
Photoshop CS1:
In Photoshop CS1 you can access layer groups and can first delete text layers
in order to add your own text objects. Replace labels on movie buttons, by
opening all "(+) menu entry" layer sets and deleting text layers ("(-) ..."). Using
the text tool, create new text objects, one next to each movie button. Use all of
the program's functions in order to realize your ideas.
Drag the text layer using drag & drop into the layer container into the
respective layer sets. Adjust the layer names. Add an "(+)" to each text layer.
You can generate additional layers that may be necessary for the text, such as
shadows, background frames or bitmaps, etc. During reimport, all layers of a
group with a (-) in front will be pooled into one text object.
Save the results.
Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6:
In Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6, activate the text tool after loading the PSD file
and write the desired text next to the movie button.
Now, you have to localize the existing movie buttons (object gallery technology,
see above). You can drag and drop the text object from the background into
the found layer and delete the text object there (Del or "Delete" in the object
228 Edit disc menu
http://pro.magix.com
gallery). Because naming takes place in the surrounding layer and the objects
in Designer themselves don't have names, you don't have to rename anything.
Repeat this for every movie button and "Export" the result.
Adjust background and butttons
Photoshop Elements:
In Photoshop Elements you can only add something to existing button
graphics and highlights since individual layers in layer sets cannot be deleted
an no new layer sets can be created. The general method is similar to text
editing: create new layers and add these to existing layer sets using drag &
drop. Finally, adjust the layer names: All layers, containing the highlight to be
displayed, must again recieve a name that begins with a "(=1)".
You can create graphics for your new menu for "Prev" and "Next" buttons by
dragging them into the open PSD file. They are, for example, 4 layers, two
button graphics and twop highlights. The highlight layers must be renamed and
scaled and placed on the screen using the mouse. Move the layers using drag
& drop into the "(+>) next button" or "(+<) prev button" layerset.
Save the results.
Photoshop CS1:
In Photoshop CS1 everything works similarly to Photoshop Elements. In
contrast to MAGIX Video Pro X4, generated layers can also be deleted, so that
button graphics can really be replaced.
Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6:
In Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6, the workflow is similar to creating new texts.
When the menu template is open, you can drag and drop, for example, 2
graphics for navigation buttons into the ready PSD. Two new layers will
appear in the menu template with two new graphics objects. Drag these into
the layer with the Bitmaps to be replaced. Renaming is unnecessary, since the
surrounding layers do this, too. Localization, scaling and moving on the screen
is analogous to Photoshop programs.
Play back menu in MAGIX Video Pro X4
After editing, a PSD file is created, which is imported into MAGIX Video Pro X4
again and must then be assigned to a menu page as a template.
Edit disc menu 229
If access takes place via "Edit externally" see above (view page 222), this
is done automatically during saving and closing of the graphics program.
Otherwise, use the button "Import PSD" to do this.
This imports and converts the PSD (saved to an automatically generated folder
in the folder Content\DVD\Layouts, with TPL files and the generated bitmap
files).
Create DVD menus without a template
It is recommended that an existing menu template is adjusted first with a
graphics program. This exercise will help you learn about the functions and
structure of a DVD menu as a PSD file to create menus without using any
templates.
You can create PSD files without templates if the following is observed.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 can only use bitmap layers from the menu PSD file. Text
layers are read as a bitmap (graphic) so that MAGIX Video Pro X4 cannot
make any changes to the text. Layer effects, etc. cannot be read by MAGIX
Video Pro X4. For this reason, all layers featuring additional features in the
graphics program need to be reduced/combined to bitmap level.
The correct naming of layers is very important! MAGIX Video Pro X4 assigns
the layers and layer groups to the menu items via their names, which makes
their correctness important. The characters added in front (view page 222) of
the layer names should therefore be observed.
A correct menu PSD contains the following elements:
http://pro.magix.com
background
menu title
x movie buttons with preview image, frame bitmap, text for menu, text for
numbering, highlight
one chapter menu button per movie button with bitmap and highlight
3 navigation buttons: in front, in the back, and the root menu
Background: The background utilizes all layers from the PSD file from the very
back to the foremost "usable" layer groups. All of the layers up until this are
combined via alpha layering. If the appearance of the background in the
graphics and in MAGIX Video Pro X4 is different, then this step may also be
made in the graphics program. In Photoshop, all associated layers would be
combined with the background layer.
Menu titles: In the next step, the layers of the menu title are added and
combined into a single layer group. This must feature a name that begins with
230 Edit disc menu
http://pro.magix.com
"(+*)". Besides the text layer, additional layers such as text background,
shadows, etc. may be present. All layers are unified as a single layer via alpha
layering.
Film buttons: Layers for film buttons are each combined as a layer group that
features the prefix "(+-)" or "(+)" at the beginning of its name. The layers
themselves have different functions that are kept together via this naming
prefix.
Preview image: The name of the layer for the preview image begins with "(%)".
In this case, MAGIX Video Pro X4 only reads the position and size of the layer
and uses this range to generate the preview image. In case multiple preview
images are present, their right corners will be combined during importing.
Text layer: This includes text layers beginning with "(-)". "(-) index text" serves
as an identifier for the naming, all other text layers will bear the name of the
button label.
Highlight layer: The highlight layer is the top of the layer groups. Its name
begins with "(=1)". This should contain a highlight version (e.g. altered color) of
the frame bitmap.
All other layers will be combined into a frame bitmap.
Chapter menu buttons: The last portion features the layer groups for the
chapter menus and navigation buttons. These are named variously ("(++)" or
"(+>)","(+>)", and "(+^)"), by they feature the same principle the structure. All
highlight layers (beginning with "(=1)") become the highlight bitmap; all other
layers become the buttons bitmap via alpha layering.
The sequence of the layer groups from the PSD file is basically not considered
by MAGIX Video Pro X4. Characterization in the program takes place in the
order outlined here, even if the associated layer groups in are saved in a
different order in the PSD file.
An exception is formed by movie and chapter menu buttons: arrangement in
MAGIX Video Pro X4 takes place in the sequence featured by the PSD file. The
first chapter menu button detected belongs to the detected movie button, the
second to the second movie button, and so on.
Burn disc 231
Create PC show
Click this button and a presentation optimized for your PC
will be created.
First, enter a path where the PC show will be found again later, and click "OK".
Burn disc
Switch to the "Burn" screen first by pressing the button
displayed.
Burn your movies including selection menus onto CD, DVD, or Blu-ray DiscTM
here.
All movies loaded into the project will be included. If you want to remove some
of the loaded films, then switch to the "Edit" screen again and delete the
unwanted movies from the project there. To do so, switch to the
corresponding movie, open the "File" menu and select "Manage movies ->
Remove movie (view page 300)".
Note: The program is displayed differently at screen resolutions of 1280 x 1024
pixels and up. This makes the program more manageable and easier to use.
The work steps remain the same in spite of the different display.
http://pro.magix.com
232 Burn disc
Burning wizard
Click "Burn" to open the dialog for creating DVDs, Blu-
ray discs, AVCHD and other video media, with a menu.
Under "Other options" you will find other disc formats.
Select what kind of disc you would like to create.
Note: For each disc format there are different limitations. For example, with
many formats animated menus are not possible or no menus and transitions at
all are possible. You can find an overview of these limitations in the PDF
manual or in "Help" under "Appendix: Digital videos and storage media“.
http://pro.magix.com
Burn disc 233
The burn dialog
Here you can select your burner, the type of disc, the encoder settings. MPEG-
2 is used for DVDs. Blu-ray discs also use MPEG-2, and higher bitrates are
employed in order to reach the higher HD resolutions. AVCHD discs use a
much more complex MPEG-4/H.264 codec, which is documented in detail in
the "MPEG-4 encoder settings (view page 371) section of the PDF manual and
in Help (F1 key).
Proceed as follows to burn a disc:
http://pro.magix.com
Set up burner and burn speed: If multiple burners are installed, you may
select which device you wish to use in this menu.
Encoder settings: Use the "Encoder" button to access the selection dialog to
specify settings for the MPEG encoder (memory requirements, quality, and
duration of the MPEG conversion). "Advanced settings" accesses a dialog
featuring additional options. You can adjust all the fine settings for the MPEG
encoder here.
Burning disc/starting video encoding: The button "Burn disc" starts the disc
burning process. Every time you burn and every time a simulation is carried
out, the disc project is encoded. Please note that the MPEG file is not deleted
from the hard disk after the burn process has finished. Depending on the
length of the project, encoding and burning may take some time. The time
required can be seen in the dialog.
234 Burn disc
http://pro.magix.com
Creating an ISO image
The simplest way to create an ISO image is to select "Image recorder" under
"Burner". When starting the "Burning process", you have to specify a name for
the image file you wish to create.
Options
Simulate first: If you are not sure about the write speed or memory
requirements of the selected disc, you can simulate the write process before
burning.
Activate buffer underrun protection: Many burners support techniques that
prevent the much-feared "buffer underrun". Use this option to activate this
protective feature and burn your files at higher speeds without risking making a
coaster out of your blank disc.
Completely format DVD/CD-RW media: This option reformats the RW media
and deletes all existing file material.
Shut down computer after burning: Activate this option to automatically turn
off the computer after encoding and burning has been completed. You could,
for instance, start the encoding and burning process in the evening, and you
don't have to wait for the process to finish to switch off your computer.
Burn standard video DVD onto same disc: You can use this option with a
WMV HD disc to burn an additional normal DVD video. This ensures that your
discs can also be played back on standalone DVD players. See Multi disc.
Activate the burner's defect management option: If a certain section of the
disc is defective, then this will be recognized by the burner and labeled as
such. No content will be saved there as a result.
Check data after burning disc: The finished disc will be checked for any
mistakes after burning.
CD/DVD title: This is the title of the DVD as it will appear on the PC. The disc
project name is displayed here by default.
Burn disc 235
http://pro.magix.com
Disk space
Disc type Data carrier Menu Quality Length (optimal
quality)
DVD DVD Yes *** 98 min.
Blu-Ray Disc
(view page
367)
Blu-Ray Disc Yes ***** 110 min.
AVCHD (view
page 367)
DVD/Blu-ray
Disc
Yes ***** 30 min./DVD
160 min./Blu-ray Disc
Multi Disc CD/DVD Yes **** 45 min./DVD
7min/CD
* The set duration for some DVD players may be determined by this table.
Depending on the original size (file size of the images) the number of images
that fit on a blank CD or DVD differs.
For the MPEG-2 encoder it can be difficult to supply reliable information
relating to the required memory space. If the "variable bit rate" of the MPEG-2
encoder is activated, encoding will occur according to the movements in the
picture. The required memory depends on the film material; an action film
would need more memory than a drama, for instance.
If you cannot save your disc project on a single disc, you will have to divide it
up into different sections.
Further information on MPEG compression and formats can be found in the
chapter "Annex: digital video and data storage" (view page 363).
Test series with variable encoder settings
If you would like to know how much memory space you require for various
encoder settings, you should run some simulations before burning.
So you don’t waste any blank CDs while testing, you should activate the
“Simulate first” option.
Then create, for example, a short (ca. 5 min.) disc project and simulate burning
in multiple cycles with various settings.
After every simulation you can access the created file on the hard disk to
check how large the file has become.
236 Burn disc
From the results, you can extrapolate how much disc space your disc project
will require. The memory requirements of a 5-minute disc project would have to
be multiplied by 20 in order to estimate the space required for a 100-minute
movie. You should also add buffer for the selection menu. (view page 213)
Separate project onto multiple discs
Automatically: If the disc project requires more memory than is available on
the CD or DVD, a dialog will appear before burning asking whether the disc
project should be automatically segmented for multiple discs. Confirm this by
clicking “Yes”. The disc project will then be automatically divided into individual
disc projects and burned sequentially onto multiple discs. This is the easiest
method since everything is automatic, and all you have to do is insert a new
blank CD when required.
Manual
Case 1: If several movies do not fit onto a single disc...
In this case, switch back to the “Edit” screen and delete as many movies as is
needed until the remaining movies fit onto the disc. You can create a new disc
project and load and burn the other movies afterwards.
Case 2: When a long film doesn’t fit onto a disc...
In this case, the movie has to be split into two or more parts that will be
burned separately onto disc.
Switch back to the "Edit" view and place the start marker to the position at
which you wish to divide the movie. In the "Edit" menu, select "Cut ->
Separate movie".
All passages behind the start marker will
be removed from the movie and made
into a smaller movie. Both movies can
be moved using the "Select to edit"
menu in the arranger. Save both of
them separately to your hard disk
(“Save movie” menu option, for
example, as “Part 1” and “Part 2”).
Remove one of the two movies (for example, "Part 2") from the disc project
("Manage movies -> Remove movie (view page 300)" menu option).
Switch to the "Burn" interface and burn the first film ("Part 1") to CD or DVD.
Create a new disc project (“New” button), switch to the “Record” view and
load it into the second film (“Part 2”).
http://pro.magix.com
Burn disc 237
http://pro.magix.com
Switch to the “Burn” interface and burn the second movie to CD or DVD.
Encoder settings
Use the “Encoder settings...” button to access the selection dialog to specify
the properties of the MPEG encoder (memory requirements, quality, and
duration of the MPEG conversion)
Preset: Here you will find useful presets for the selected disc type. Here are
some of the presets for a DVD:
Longplay DVD Video DVD with extra-long playing time. The bit rate is
reduced, which compromises image quality.
Longplay music DVD DVD with extra-long playing time for music. The bit
rate for the soundtrack remains at the highest quality
level.
Standard DVD Normal DVD
Widescreen DVD Normal DVD in 16:9 format
Note: For all settings, you can choose between NTSC (USA and Japan)
(Europe).
Bitrate: Bitrate determines the size on the disk that the finished video will take
up. The greater the bit rate, the larger the file, and the shorter the maximum
playing time of the movie that fits on a disc.
Adjust bit rate: The expected file size of the finished video is estimated,
depending on the set bit rate. If the movie does not fit onto the disc, the bit
rate is corrected accordingly.
Quality: Specifies the quality of the encoding process. The higher the quality,
the better the finished video will look; however, encoding will take considerably
longer.
Smart Rendering: With Smart Rendering you can significantly reduce the
encoding effort for MPEG files. During the production of MPEG files, only those
parts of the movie that were changed in the program are re-encoded. Please
note: The MPEG files contained in the movie must have the same format, i.e.
the bit rates (variable or constant), audio formats, image resolutions and video
formats must match.
238 Burn disc
http://pro.magix.com
Anti-interlace filter: Activate this option only for playback on a TV screen,
where it reduces horizontal flickering around fine details.
Calculate video effects on GPU: To accelerate exporting, you can let video
effects be calculated on the graphics card. At this time this applies to
brightness, gamma, contrast, color, saturation, image size, cropping and
position effects as well as various fades and mixes. Please note that external
effect plugins and elaborate artistic effects must be processed on the CPU and
for this reason using this function will not yield any speed advantage.
Note: This function is specifically optimized for NVIDIA graphics cards. You
can, however, experience acceleration with other types of graphics cards, too.
3D mode: If you have 3D material in your project which has been edited with
Stereo3D, you can select here in which mode it should be burned to disc here.
3D is switched off by default.
To return to the standard settings, press the Reset button.
Via "Advanced" you can reach the "Advanced settings" dialog. Here you can
make changes to all MPEG encoder settings. Read the \ "MPEG-1/2 encoder-
settings" appendix (view page 386) and "MPEG-4 encoder settings" (view page
371) in the PDF manual or program help.
Burn disc 239
Using Quick Sync, OpenCL or CUDA during rendering
Quick Sync (from Intel), OpenCL (from AMD) and CUDA (from NVIDIA) are
graphics card technologies which enable MAGIX Video Pro X4 to outsource
demanding rendering processes to the graphics card processor. When burning
a Blu-ray Disc (H.264) or an AVCHD disc, under "Advanced" in "Video codec"
you will find the "Quick Sync", "CUDA" and "OpenCL" options.
Note: Which options will be displayed will depend on the technology supported
by your graphics card.
Before rendering, activate the desired option in order to be able to noticeably
quicker render the material to be burned.
http://pro.magix.com
Note: Ask your graphics card manufacturer whether your graphics card
supports hardware acceleration and make sure that all the necessary drivers
are installed.
240 Export movie
Export movie
A movie may be exported in different video formats via "File -> Export movie".
The options available vary according to the selected format.
Presets: These are typical settings for the selected format for the most
important applications.
Click "Save" to save your own settings and "Delete" to remove
them from the list.
Export settings: Specify general export parameters like resolution, aspect
ratio, and frame rate here. Select the most frequently used values from the list
fields; to set your own values click on the "..." button. The "Advanced" button
opens the specific settings for the selected video format. "File" enables you to
export your file to another folder than the preset one. The option "Overwrite
file without confirmation" option allows you to execute multiple exports in the
same file.
Other: "Other" also provides the option to switch off your computer
automatically after long encoding processes and to limit export to the selected
area (between the in and out point).
Output after export: Some formats allow special playback options (e.g. DV-AVI
on the camera or WMV export with output via Bluetooth to your mobile phone).
Video as AVI
When exporting to AVI video, you may set and configure the size and frame
rate of the AVI video and the compression codec for audio (audio compression)
and video. Please see the general information about AVI video formats (view
page 364) as well.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + A
Video as DV-AVI
This option exports the video as a DV encoded AVI. The arrangement can be
easily transferred to a connected camera using a FireWire interface.
http://pro.magix.com
Export movie 241
http://pro.magix.com
The dialog will provide further information on all available options. You can
access it via "Advanced" in the export dialog. You will also be asked for which
video standard you want to export the DV data - PAL (Europe) or NTSC (USA).
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + D
Video as MPEG video
MPEG stands for "Motion Picture Experts Group" and is a high-performance
compression format for audio and video files.
We recommend finding a fitting preset from the list first, since there are many
various devices and applications for this format. You will also find, for example,
intra-frame presets (starting with "Intra422") for video playback in professional
studio environments.
Details about settings for the MPEG encoder are provided in the program's
"Help" file in the "MPEG encoder settings (view page 386)" appendix.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + P
Video as MAGIX video
Exports the project in MAGIX video format.
This format is used for video recording by MAGIX Video Pro X4 video software
and is optimized for digitally editing high quality video material.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + M
Video as QuickTime movie
Exports the project in QuickTime Movie format. This format enables streaming
playback of audio or video files via the Internet.
Note: The Apple QuickTime Library must be installed for QuickTime files
(*.mov).
Keyboard shortcut: "Ctrl + Alt + Q"
242 Export movie
http://pro.magix.com
Uncompressed movie
When exporting an uncompressed AVI video file you can adjust the size and
frame rate of the AVI video you wish to create. The video material will not be
compressed by a codec.
Note: This will create very large files!
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + U
Video as MotionJPEG AVI
Opens the export dialog for AVI video in MotionJPEG format. This format is
supported by digital picture frames, for example.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + O
Movie as a series of individual frames
This option exports the video as a sequence of single frames in bitmap format.
This means a graphic file will be created for every frame of the video. The
image count may be determined in the export dialog under "Frame rate".
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + E
Windows Media Export
Exports the arrangement in the Windows Media format. This is a universal
audio/video format from Microsoft. Accordingly, the settings options in the
"Advanced" dialog are very complex.
Manual configuration
Audio/video codec: Various codecs corresponding to the various Windows
Media versions (7, 8, 9) are possible. Should compatibility problems arise on
playback, try an older codec with a lower version number.
Bit rate mode: Constant and variable bit rates are possible, most devices and
streaming applications require constant bit rates. For VBR two pass modes the
Export movie 243
http://pro.magix.com
movie is compressed in two passes in order to optimally use the bandwidth for
highly-compressed movies for the Internet.
Bit rate/quality/audio format: The bit rate is decisive in defining the
display/audio quality. The higher this is set, the better the videos will look and
the larger the files and the required encoding time will be. For variable bit rates,
the bit rate is adapted dynamically to the requirements of the corresponding
picture or sound material. Either the quality value may be set between 1-100
or, for two-pass encoding, an average or maximum bit rate. For audio, the bit
rate is set additionally by the audio format.
Import: For the most common applications (other than for playback on mobile
devices, for which you should use the supplied presets) like Internet streaming,
Microsoft provides diverse system profiles to choose from. If you have the
Windows Media Encoder 9 installed, which is available from Microsoft as a free
download, you can edit the profiles or create your own. These may be loaded
by pressing the "Import" button.
"Clip info" enables the title and artist names, copyright details, and
descriptions to be entered.
Keyboard shortcut: "Ctrl + Alt + V"
Video as MPEG-4 video
MPEG-4 is the most advanced video format available at the moment. Unlike
other formats, this provides very high-quality pictures at the same file size. The
presets list is correspondingly long. We recommend looking through this list for
settings for each application and corresponding device.
MPEG-4 refers to a highly complex "academic" standard that operates and is
supported variably according to make. To go into detail on these differences
and parameters would be beyond the scope of this documentation. For this
reason, indications, along with the operational manual of your device, are given
that should help create executable MPEG-4 files. For more experimental users,
the complete setup options of the MPEG-4 codec can be found behind the
"Advanced settings..." buttons.
Video/audio: MPEG-4 and the newer MPEG-4 H.264 are currently available,
and these are used with new devices especially. MPEG-4 video may be
combined with AAC or AMR sound (the latter is mainly for mobile telephones).
The combination of MPEG-4 H.264/AAC is more seldom applicable (Apple
iPod Video). MPEG-4 H.264 featuring AMR will almost never occur.
244 Export movie
http://pro.magix.com
Multiplexer: This features so-called container formats and special options for
Apple iPod, iPhone, and Sony PSP. MPEG-4 is usually used as an output
format, while mobile phones (but not iPhone) mostly use 3GP.
For more information about MPEG-4 encoder read the "MPEG-4 encoder
settings (view page 371)" chapter.
Keyboard shortcut: "Ctrl + Alt + G"
Audio as MP3
Note: MP3 export requires Windows Media Player version 10 and up.
The MP3 encoder cannot be used as a codec for the AVI audio file audio
tracks.
Options
The "Options" section allows the format and the compression level for the
audio file to be set.
Bit rate: "Bit rate" selection specifies the compression level: the higher the bit
rate, the higher the quality of the exported audio file will be. On the other hand,
the bit rate also determines the final file size: the smaller the bit rate, the
smaller the files will be.
Mono/stereo/5.1 Surround: Most mobile devices have only one loudspeaker.
To save on memory, you may export in mono for these devices. In "5.1
Surround" mode, you can also export in MP3 Surround. Read "Mixer in
Surround mode" for more about this.
Normalize: This function should always be activated. It guarantees that the
music is not too loud/overmodulated or too quiet.
Transfer format:
Specify here whether the created file should be transferred via device
connected via Bluetooth or via email.
Export movie 245
http://pro.magix.com
Audio as wave
The movie's audio track is exported in the wave (*.wav) audio format.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + W
Export as transition...
The movie is exported as an alpha fade in the MXV format. The brightness
value of the movie depends on how the fade functions. The option "Export the
selected range only" also specifies that only a small part specified beforehand
via the in and out points will be exported.
If you do not change the save location, you will locate the saved fade in the
Media Pool under "Fades -> Standard".
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + T
Single frame as BMP file
Exports the image located at the playback marker and displayed in the video
monitor as a bitmap (*.BMP) file.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + B
Single frame as JPG
Exports the image located at the playback marker and displayed in the video
monitor as a JPEG (*.JPG) file.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + J
Animated GIF
The video will be exported as an animated GIF file (also called "AniGIF). This file
format is supported by many mobile phones.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + F
246 Export movie
http://pro.magix.com
Export movie information as EDL
Exports the current movie in a Samplitude-compatible EDL format. This export
is mainly intended for transferring audio files to Samplitude/Sequoia, since the
program cannot process all of the video formats MAGIX Video Pro X4 can
manage. Only object cuts, tracks, pans, and volume (with curves) are
transferred, since the EDL format only saves this information in a limited
manner.
Items that are not transferred: All effects, Surround positions, video
transitions, markers (chapter markers, scene markers).
The basic audio and video files will not be exported. They will either be loaded
by the EDL-importing program automatically (if they are available in the same
folder of the EDL file) or requested during importing.
The following is a recommended approach for using an editing list in EDL
format:
Save the media you use beforehand in a folder (e.g. via "File -> Backup copy -
> Copy film and media to folder".
Export your film as an EDL editing list and add the EDL file in the same folder
as the media.
Load the EDL file into the importing program (e.g. Sequoia). The EDL file
provides the correct positioning of the individual media. After editing, you can
export the audio track as a WAV file, e.g. to import it again into MAGIX Video
Pro X4 to replace existing audio objects.
Note: Cut lists may also be imported from external programs. Select the menu
item "File -> Import cut list (EDL)" to do this.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + D
Export movie 247
Upload to Internet
You can upload your movie to various platforms such as MAGIX Videocloud,
YouTube, Vimeo and Facebook by going to "File > Online". YouTube is a portal
for self-created clips of any kind. Vimeo is a growing video portal for
sophisticated movies. Facebook is the world's largest online community.
http://pro.magix.com
Community: Here you can select the desired platform.
Title: Here you can enter your movie's title.
Description: Here you can enter a short description of your movie in order to
inform other community members about your movie.
Category: Pick a category for your movie.
Publish: Decide whether your movie should be "Private", or meant only for you
and persons authorized by you, or freely accessible, or "Public".
Export settings: Here you can select between various quality settings.
248 Export movie
Upload to Internet (MAGIX Online Album)
The menu "File -> Internet > MAGIX Online Album -> Upload movie as video"
accesses the login dialog for MAGIX Online Album directly. Next, present your
photos together with videos and music in custom-designed online albums.
Export to device
The menu "File -> Export to device" allows you to transfer your video to the
connected playback device.
http://pro.magix.com
Export movie 249
http://pro.magix.com
Besides the Camcorder options for digital camcorders (DV/HDV) and VHS
recorder for playing analog video for recording onto digital camcorders and
analog VCRs includes many options for further players such as mobile video
players, Smartphones, PDAs, or games consoles.
Export as Media Player
To be able to play back your film in an Internet browser or to embed it into web
pages, you can export it as an HTML-enabled media player.
Select the desired quality and click on "Save video". In the target folder, an
HTM and an MP4 file will be created for further use.
250 Settings for and management of video projectors
Settings for and management of video
projectors
Movie and project settings
When you create a new video project, you can make settings for the new
project already in the start dialog. You can change these later.
In the following chapter, we'll discuss the various settings included in MAGIX
Video Pro X4 for your movies and projects.
All settings dialogs may be accessed via "File -> Settings".
Movie settings
Open the movie settings via "File -> Settings -> Movie..." or by pressing "E".
The following dialog opens:
http://pro.magix.com
Settings for and management of video projectors 251
http://pro.magix.com
The buttons at the top are for the four tabs in the dialogs: "Movie settings ->
Synchronization ->Movie information" and "Project settings".
Movie settings
Play movie in loop mode: The movie will be played back as a loop. Playback
will start at the cursor position, and after the end is reached, will start at the
beginning of the project.
Use settings as presets for new movies: If this option is activated, all new
movies will use settings made in this dialog.
Automatically crop new images to fill screen: Crops all photos and videos in
the project automatically to fill the entire screen.
Track count: Here you can change track number.
Audio sample rate: The preset sample rate is 48kHz. This sample rate is used
for all recordings and is also a prerequisite for audio tracks of DVDs. This
setting guarantees optimal sound quality. Audio material with other sample
rates (e.g. CD audio with 44kHz) will be automatically adjusted when loaded
(resampling). Change this value only if you want to work predominantly with
audio material with varying sample rate, or if your sound card doesn't support
this sample rate.
Video settings: You can select the standard settings for the picture format and
frame rate for PAL or NTSC images or for your own format. Please note that
MPEG encoding requires a width/height ratio divisible by 8.
252 Settings for and management of video projectors
Synchronization
Synchronization dialog
Note: You will find descriptions of all synchronization dialog elements here.
You can find a description of how the synchronization settings are made in the
"Synchronization settings" (view page 253) chapter.
Input synchronization: Here you must select the driver which the MAGIX Video
Pro X4 will receive the MIDI timecode. This setting will also be used for SMPTE.
With synchronization via SMPTE, please make sure that the device
corresponds to the SMPTE input of your MIDI interface.
http://pro.magix.com
Settings for and management of video projectors 253
http://pro.magix.com
Frame rate: Here you can determine the fitting SMPTE frame rate, for example
24 for cinema film, 25 for PAL video and audio synchronization, 29.97
drop/non drop or 30 for NTSC video.
Preroll: Here you can enter a frame number which MAGIX Video Pro X4 will
ignore before it starts synchronization. This accommodates the fact that analog
devices need time to reach their correct speed. To make sure that MAGIX
Video Pro X4 synchronizes to a valid time, this segment can be skipped using
pre-roll frames.
Output synchronization: Here you must select the driver, which MAGIX Video
Pro X4 will use to send MIDI timecode. When synchronizing via SMPTE, please
make sure that the device corresponds to the SMPTE output of your MIDI
interface.
Start offset (ms/SMPTE): Here you can enter a time value in milliseconds or in
SMPTE frames to be subtracted from the SMPTE time before the time is used
for synchronization. With an offset of 60:00:00 (1 hour), a tape whose SMPTE
code starts at 1 hour may be synchronized by MAGIX Video Pro X4 as starting
at 0.
Specify synchronization
MAGIX Video Pro X4 is capable of being synchronized by external sources or
synchronizing external sources.
Synchronizing MAGIX Video Pro X4 with Samplitude or Sequoia is also
possible via a virtual MIDI cable (e.g. "MIDI Yoke" or Hubi's MIDI Loopback
Device"). The requirement in this case is simply that the virtual MIDI cable has
been installed successfully.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 as master
If MAGIX Video Pro X4 should synchronize external programs or sources, then
proceed as follows:
Open the Synchronization dialog (view page 252).
Under "Output synchronization", set the MIDI device that is connected to the
device that MAGIX Video Pro X4 is supposed to sync with.
In case you want to synchronize another program (e.g. Samplitude/Sequoia)
via a virtual MIDI cable with MAGIX Video Pro X4, please make sure that the
corresponding MIDI device is set in both programs. The program to be
synchronized must support MTC and be configured as the "slave".
254 Settings for and management of video projectors
http://pro.magix.com
For example, if you use "MIDI Yoke NT1" under "Output synchronization", then
the device "MIDI Yoke NT 1" must also be set in the MTC input of the program
to be synchronized.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 as slave
MAGIX Video Pro X4 set as the slave causes the program to follow an external
source or another program during playback.
Open the Synchronization dialog (view page 252).
Under "Input synchronization", set the MIDI device that is connected to the
device that MAGIX Video Pro X4 is supposed to sync with.
In case you want to synchronize another program (e.g. Samplitude/Sequoia)
via a virtual MIDI cable with MAGIX Video Pro X4, please make sure that the
corresponding MIDI device is set in both programs. The program that is set to
be the synchronization source must support MTC and be configured as the
"master".
For example, if you use "MIDI Yoke NT1" under "Input synchronization", then
the device "MIDI Yoke NT 1" must also be set in the MTC output in the
master.
Synchronizing Samplitude/Sequoia with MAGIX Video Pro X4
This section should help you synchronize MAGIX Video Pro X4 with
Samplitude/Sequoia for Surround productions.
The introduction featured here provides a single example. In this case, MAGIX
Video Pro X4 is the master: Samplitude/Sequoia follows the time information
from MAGIX Video Pro X4 but sends information from the transport control to
MAGIX Video Pro X4. This method allows playback from both programs to be
started while they run synchronously.
The chapter "Transferring a Surround project to MAGIX Video Pro X4 (view
page 204)" explains how completed Surround projects are transferred from
Samplitude/Sequoia to MAGIX Video Pro X4 and how they are processed.
Requirements
Since synchronization occurs via MTC (MIDI time code), a virtual MIDI driver
must be installed. Examples are "MIDI Yoke" or "Hubi's MIDI Loopback
Device". Configure the driver as required so that at least two virtual MIDI
devices are available.
If a Surround project is to be created, then you require a Surround-capable
sound card with at least 6 channels.
Settings for and management of video projectors 255
http://pro.magix.com
Setting up MAGIX Video Pro X4
Open the synchronization dialog
Activate the box "Input synchronization active".
Under "Device", set the first free virtual MIDI device (e.g. "MIDI Yoke NT 1").
Now set the transport controls via MMC (MIDI machine control):
Click the "MMC button" to open the "MIDI machine control".
Activate the box "Receive MMC commands (slave)".
Under "Device", set the second free virtual MIDI device (e.g. "MIDI Yoke NT
2").
Close both dialogs by pressing the "OK" button.
Setting up Samplitude/Sequoia
Start Samplitude/Sequoia; MAGIX Video Pro X4 can remain open.
Open the Samplitude/Sequoia synchronization dialog. Right-click the "Sync"
button on the transport console, or select the entry "Synchronization settings"
in the "Options" menu.
Activate the box "Output synchronization active".
Under "Device", set the first free virtual MIDI device (e.g. "MIDI Yoke NT 1").
Now set the transport controls via MMC (MIDI machine control):
Click "MMC settings" to open the "MIDI machine control" dialog.
Activate the box "Send MMC commands (master)", "Transport window as
remote control for external device", and "Space bar for remote control".
Under "Device", set the second free virtual MIDI device (e.g. "MIDI Yoke NT
2").
Close both dialogs by pressing the "OK" button.
Now you can conveniently dub your movie in Samplitude/Sequoia while you
edit and cut your work in MAGIX Video Pro X4. Playback can be started from
both programs and always runs synchronously.
MIDI Machine Control (MMC)
MMC modes
The synchronization window provides settings for remote control via MIDI
Machine Control. MAGIX Video Pro X4 supports the control of external devices
or through external devices through MMC.
Send/receive MMC fullframe: With activated output synchronization (MAGIX
Video Pro X4 is master), MMC commands are sent additionally. If the input
256 Settings for and management of video projectors
synchronization option (MAGIX Video Pro X4 is slave) is activated, MAGIX
Video Pro X4 receives MMC commands.
While playing a range in MAGIX Video Pro X4, the MMC device stops once the
end of the range is reached. If this option is activated, the start and stop
commands sent by the space bar only control the MMC device.
Movie Information
This option opens an information window:
Name: Here you can enter the name of the current movie.
Path: This is where you select the folder on your hard drive in which your
movie is saved.
Created on: Displays the time the movie was created.
Last changed: Displays the time of the last save.
http://pro.magix.com
Settings for and management of video projectors 257
Number of used objects: Displays the number of all objects in the movie.
Used files: All files used in the movie are listed here.
Keyboard shortcut: E
Project settings
You can change project settings here. A project can consist of multiple movies
and is saved as an mvp file.
http://pro.magix.com
Description: Here you can give you project a description - perhaps a few
statements about the state of the editing progress, etc. This field functions like
a notepad.
Time point: You can assign your project a certain date. You can choose
between simply a date - e.g. "24.12.2009" - or a written-out description - e.g.
"Christmas 2009".
258 Settings for and management of video projectors
Preview: This is the preview in a data manager such as the Windows Explorer,
a comparatively insignificant setting. Instead of an automatic selection, you can
select a certain image or a preview frame from the project.
Automatically select preview image
MAGIX Video Pro X4 uses an automatically-selected preview image.
Use image file
Clicking the folder button opens a dialog to load image files. In this dialog, you
can navigate to the directory where the image file is found and select it by
double clicking.
Use preview image from movie
Use the controller to select a frame from the corresponding directory.
Start dialog
A start dialog will open when the program is launched or a new project is
loaded. Here you can make important presets for the project. You can change
these settings at any time by going to "File" > "Settings".
Load existing project: Here you can select and load a previously saved
project.
http://pro.magix.com
Settings for and management of video projectors 259
View introductory video: Here you can launch the introductory video with
information about workflows in MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Create new project: Here you can assign a name to your new project.
Project file: Here you can set the path for the project directory where all
project files should be saved.
Movie settings: Here you can set the movie's target format (display norm,
resolution, frame rate). This setting has no effect on the internal processing
quality and can be changed at any time by going to "File > Settings > Movie".
Audio sample rate: Here you can set the audio track's audio sample rate.
Use movie template: Here you can choose an included movie template for a
new project. Read the "Using movie templates" section for more details.
Editing mode: For editing, you can choose between standard and basic mode
(view page 62).
Open
With this option you can load a project or a media file. Please note that
all media files associated with it must be loaded along with a project.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 will search for all used sounds and video files in
the folders in which they were located when the move was saved.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + O
http://pro.magix.com
Save project
The current disc project is saved with the name displayed in the project
window. If you have not specified a name for your project yet, a dialog will
open for you to do so.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + S
Save project as...
A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the video for
saving.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + S
260 Settings for and management of video projectors
Program settings
All basic settings for MAGIX Video Pro X4 are made in this
window. This allows you to influence the settings in MAGIX
Video Pro X4 in detail.
Keyboard shortcut: Y
Playback
Audio playback
Driver selection: Select whether the Windows wave driver or the DirectSound
driver should be used for audio output.
DirectSound is a component of DirectX and, if necessary, is installed together
with MAGIX Video Pro X4. DirectSound has the advantage that the sound
output (for all modern sound cards or onboard soundchips) can also be used
by other programs open simultaneously.
Wave drivers are recommended during high PC loads which they can handle
better due to their higher buffer load peaks (which usually result in artifacts).
Output device: Use this option to specify which sound card plays the wave
audio objects. This is especially important if you have multiple sound cards
installed on your computer, e.g. "onboard sound" as well as an additional
sound card.
Audio buffer: To ensure smooth playback of a complex arrangements MAGIX
Video Pro X4 creates a data buffer where the currently used data segments are
stored. Therefore it is not the entire arrangement that is preprocessed; far
more, processing occurs step-by-step.
Buffer count: Here you can determine how many buffers should be used. More
buffers increase reliability, for judder-free arrangement playback, but this also
increases the memory requirements. When played via DirectSound, only one
buffer is used automatically.
Rule of thumb: If loading times are long, you should reduce buffer size and
number, while in case of dropouts or problematic realtime effect calculations,
the buffer should be increased. Since error-free playback is usually more
important than fast reaction times, the buffer size should be raised to 16384 or
32768 for drop-outs. The possible number of used buffer updates is between
2 and 10.
http://pro.magix.com
Settings for and management of video projectors 261
http://pro.magix.com
Preview size: You can determine the size of the buffer to be used to play the
entire arrangement or for previewing wave files in file managers.
Video playback
Overload optimization for realtme playback: Here, you can set whether
overload optimization should turn on during realtime playback. This function is
especially recommended for less powerful PCs.
Instant cache refresh in multicam mode: Activate this setting so that your
cache will be emptied in short increments, immediately visualizing preview of
multicam editing in the video monitor. This can result in jerks during playback.
Track count for parallel track optimization: Limiting the number of tracks
makes sense when the program has limited memory and the project contains
many videos.
Arranger
Autoscroll during playback: If autoscroll is activated, the screen view
automatically shifts when the playback cursor reaches the right edge of the
screen, which is useful for longer arrangements. You can select the size of the
scrolling steps from either "Fast" (whole pages) or "Slow" (half pages).
Warning: Due to recalculation, scrolling increases monitor visualization load,
which can interfere with playback depending on your system performance. If
this happens, simply deactivate the autoscroll feature.
Display (update in background): Object display updates following move and
zoom operations in the arranger take place in background to ensure smooth
work.
Spacebar properties: Here you can set whether after playback is stopped by
pressing the spacebar the cursor should go back to the original position or
remain at its current location.
Image material playback
Resizing high-quality image material: Use this feature to improve the quality
during resizing, particularly when downsizing to less than half of the original
size (e.g. for picture-in-picture effects). This, on the other hand, requires more
processing power.
Load image material in background: Images will be loaded in the background
to reduce CPU load.
262 Settings for and management of video projectors
Folders
Set the path where
projects are saved (Projects) here,
where files are exported (Export) or imported (Import), and recordings
(Recordings) are saved,
where disc images are saved,
where EXE files for the external audio and picture editor are located so that
they are able to be launched via the context or effects menu.
and where the VST-plugins were installed.
Video/Audio
In the "Video/Audio" tab you will find all settings options concerning video and
audio files.
Video standards
PAL is used in Europe; the United States, Canada, and Japan use NTSC.
Movie display
The resolutions that can be set here concern only the picture display in the
arranger. If playback becomes jerky, we recommend entering a lower value.
This does not influence the quality of exported videos.
Automatic interlace processing: MAGIX Video Pro X4 usually automatically
detects whether the loaded video files were recorded using interlace or
progressive method; for interlace videos, the half-frame sequence is also
http://pro.magix.com
Settings for and management of video projectors 263
http://pro.magix.com
recognized. In case automatic detection fails, you can deactivate it here and
set the object properties (view page 331) of video objects to the correct
process.
Options
Automatic preview of exported clips: This option plays the clip directly after
export to check the result.
Extract sound from video: If a video file contains video as well as audio files,
you can also import the audio file of the video if this option is selected. It will be
displayed as an audio object in the arrangement below the video object. Both
are automatically grouped together. If the audio track has to be edited or
replaced later, you first have to ungroup it ("Ungroup" button in the tool bar or
via the "Edit" menu).
Allow user-defined names for sound extracted from VOBs: This determines
whether a dialog will appear for each imported file during VOB import
(VTS_01_1.vob) where you can give your film a name (box checked) or whether
an automatically generated name should be assigned (box unchecked).
Adjust small deviations from 4:3 aspect ratio during bitmap import: This
option automatically adjusts photos that have nearly a 4:3 aspect ratio to the
4:3 TV format. The pictures are therefore easily stretched or compressed. This
inevitably brings about distortions in the picture. If this option is deactivated,
black bars appear along the sides.
Load effects from JPX file automatically for images: If the images were edited
with other MAGIX programs (e. g. MAGIX Photo Manager), description files
with jpx extensions have ben created for each, containing certain effects and
image titles.. This option adds that information into your editing process.
Apply image effects during export to MAGIX Online Services: If this option
has been activated, all image effects will be calculated into the sent file.
GPU acceleration for standard fades: Here you can (de)activate hardware
acceleration of your graphics card for 3D effects. More information can be
found in the 3D fades (view page 102) chapter.
Automatically create frame table during import: Sometimes, rebuilding a
frame table can get rid of problems in certain MPEG files. For example, such
problems can be present if the navigation (positioning of the playback marker,
transport) is bumpy or doesn't function at all.
Normally, when loading MPEG video, a frame table is not created in order to
264 Settings for and management of video projectors
http://pro.magix.com
speed up the loading process. If you do create one anyway, MPEG files are
normally noticeably faster and easier to edit.
Reduce bitmap resolution for preview: Resolution fro image files will be
reduced during playback to conserve resources. This requires less computing
power than playback in full resolution; full resolution is always calculated during
export.
Outsource memory for bitmaps in other process: If this option is activated,
your bitmaps become easier to handle because they are edited in a different
process.
Arranger
Simplified display of video objects: Shows only the first and last frame of a
video object in the arranger.
Simplified display of audio objects: Shows no waveform for audio objects.
3D object display: Shows objects in the arranger three-dimensionally.
Audio and video on common track: Audio and video material can be displayed
together on one track or separately on 2 tracks. If you change this setting, it
will go into effect only after the program is started again.
Standard picture length
Determines how long an image loaded in MAGIX Video Pro X4 is shown for by
default.
Settings for and management of video projectors 265
System
Dialogs: Once installed, MAGIX Video Pro X4 displays a number of security
queries in various parts of the program. Each of them can be switched off by
clicking the small box at the bottom that says "Don't show this message
again". To display these warning messages, select the "Reactivate dialogs"
option. "Hide news" enables current messages concerning MAGIX Video Pro
X4 to be deactivated, and the screen may also be set to darken when dialogs
are displayed.
Start online configuration: Configure the various services for MAGIX Online
World here.
http://pro.magix.com
Undo/redo: Set the maximum number of undo steps are available here.
Import formats: You can unselect file formats that you never use so that are no
longer imported. Bear in mind that several import modules exist for some file
types (AVI, WMA); MAGIX Video Pro X4 uses the fastest one in each case. If
you experience problems importing certain files, try experimenting with
deactivation of certain import modules, which forces the program to use the
slower, more compatible import module.
Media Pool: Select which file types should be previewed automatically. You
may also select whether double clicking a file starts a preview in the Media
Pool or imports it directly into the arranger.
266 Settings for and management of video projectors
Automatic save: The automatic backup function may be set to save the
project in the project folder as a backup file with the ending "MV_" (instead of
the normal "MVD"). Select if and how often the project is saved as a backup.
Other
Automatic preview during transitions: If this option is activated, a short
preview of the transition effect will be played quickly between two objects.
High-quality output for dynamic zoom and combination effects: This
improves the display quality of zooms and effects, but results in longer loading
times.
Move playback marker when selecting objects: This option causes the
playback marker to move to the beginning of the selected object.
Display options
Video output to DV device
Video output on a DV device: This option displays your arranger view on your
TV via your DV camera. This is useful if your graphics card doesn't have a TV
output. However, since your PC must then compress the video signal in real
time in DV-AVI format and in addition to processing all real-time effects, so you
need to have a powerful PC for jitter-free playback. Even if your computer is
not particularly powerful, you can still use this function to see how your video
looks on your TV screen, since the analog video output signal of a good DV
camera is better than the TV output of an average graphics card.
http://pro.magix.com
Settings for and management of video projectors 267
http://pro.magix.com
Preview in the Arranger/preview window and playback in video
recorder/analog recording
You can set playback mode separately for the Arranger (including all preview
windows and effects dialogs) and the preview monitors during recording and in
the video recorder.
Video mode
The default setting is "Hardware accelerations (Direct3D)", which you shouldn't
change because it delivers the best results. If you are running into problems,
such as if the image remains black, you can see if the other modes work
better. "Compatibility mode (VideoForWindows)" switches hardware
acceleration completely off, and thus this setting should work best. It is also
the slowest mode, in which the project probably won't play smoothly. These
options are irrelevant for file export and disc burning.
Tip: Change video modes only in case of problems with presets, such as jerks
or persistent image artifacts.
Preview in arranger
Compatibility mode (Video for Windows): This is the (tried-and-true) standard
mode, which works on all systems.
Hardware acceleration (Direct 3D): This mode offers extreme speed
advantages, processing effects, mixing and various transitions directly on the
graphics card. Depending on the graphics card, performance can increase by
300%. The graphics card will not be used during export.
Warning: To be able to use this mode, the graphics card must have at least
128 MB disk space of its own. Direct 3D 9 or higher must be installed and the
graphic card driver must support "High Level Pixel Shader Language 2.0".
MAGIX Video Pro X4 checks the corresponding properties when this mode is
selected, and switches it off if necessary.
Preview and playback on VCR/Analog recording
Alternative mode 1 (Overlay Mixer): In this mode you can use hardware
deinterlacing for export to PC monitor or progressive scan-enabled projector,
which noticeably improves reproduction quality of analog video recorded with
interlacing.
268 Settings for and management of video projectors
http://pro.magix.com
Alternative mode 2 (Video Mixing Renderer 9): This mode uses hardware
deinterlacing of modern graphics cards together with DirectX9. Make sure that
you've installed the latest graphics card drivers and the card is compatible with
DirectX9. This mode works better than the standard mode (Overlay Mixer) only
for a few graphics card models.
Standard renderer: The DirectShow standard renderer is used for viewing.
Image formation in Vertical Blank Intervals (VBI)
The image formation takes place in the vertical blank intervals of the monitor
signal (or the connected TV signal). This helps avoid image interruptions.
Warning: Because of the necessary waiting time on the next VBI, this process
adds significant computation time!
You can deactivate this option for digital displays such as TFT monitors. In
"Overlay" mode, image formation occurs exclusively via VBI.
Acceleration for high-resolution MPEG2 files
This option can be selected only in the "Hardware acceleration (Direct 3D)"
video mode and indicates that videos in MPEG-2 format will be processed
directly from the graphics card GPU. Depending on the graphics card
performance, an improvement of up to 300% can be achieved!
De-interlacing
The DirectShow modes "Overlay mixer" and "Video mixing renderer 9" enable
activation of hardware de-interlacing for the graphics card. For general
information about de-interlacing and the options "Top/bottom field first", please
read the corresponding article "De-interlacing (view page 395)" in the manual.
Comparison image in source monitor for editing effects in the Media Pool
If this option is activated, the "Selected objects without effects" comparison
mode will be automatically activated when switching into the Media Pool
effects, and will be automatically deactivated when the mode is exited. This
serves to compare the original and edited image.
This automation will be suppressed if the option is deactivated.
Settings for and management of video projectors 269
Preview rendering
Use this dialog to set how MAGIX Video Pro X4 renders a set range in the
arranger. This dialogs may be accessed via "File -> Settings -> Preview
rendering".
Note: The preview rendering function enables complicated passages in the
project to be rendered beforehand for fluid video previewing. This may be
accessed via the marker bar's context menu. You can find more details in the
"Preview rendering" section.
http://pro.magix.com
Presets: You have the option to select presets or save your own settings for
later use.
Format settings: Specify here which format should be used to render a set
range. "Advanced settings" enables you to adjust the selected format to suit
your own particular requirements.
Other: Access this dialog prior to every rendering process (the dialog does not
appear by default).
Note: Rendering may take longer depending on the selected format and size of
the set range.
270 Settings for and management of video projectors
http://pro.magix.com
Backup copy
Files must be saved to be able to be easily retrieved in case of a hard drive
crash or some other error.
Copy movie and media to folder/copy disc project and media to folder
This menu option allows you to put a complete MAGIX Video Pro X4
arrangement, including all applied multimedia files, into one folder. This is
especially useful if you want to archive an arrangement for later use or in case
the files are on multiple data carriers (CDs, DVDs, etc) so that on loading you
continually have to change them. Effects files used are also saved in a folder
together with the other files.
If the option "Copy disc project, movies, and media in folder" is activated, all
movies in the current disc project, including all of the related media, are
combined and copied into the selected folder.
Note: MAGIX Video Pro X4 also features DV logging. Large DV-AVI and audio
files no longer need to be backed up, since MAGIX Video Pro X4 saves the
position of this material on the DV tape and imports missing files automatically
when reloading the DV tape.
A dialog opens to specify the path and name of the video.
Shortcut:
Copy movie and media into folder "Shift + R"
Copy project and media into folder "Alt + S"
Burn project and media onto CD/DVD/burn data to CD/DVD
Use this option to burn the film as well as all associated files to disc. To do so,
you must have a burner installed on your computer and a blank CD must be
inserted.
If you choose the option "Burn project and media", the current project and all
of the associated media files are grouped together and burned onto disc.
Even larger projects can be burned straight to disc. The project, if necessary,
will be split up and burned automatically to multiple discs. A restore program
which is burned to the first disc of this type of backup guarantees that the
backup can be restored without any problems.
Settings for and management of video projectors 271
http://pro.magix.com
Restore project from video disc
This command restores a project backup that has been saved on a disc. The
disc must have been burned with the option "Add project backup" (see "Burn
disc" dialog options).
Choose which of the movies contained on the disc should be restored by
selecting it from the list and highlighting and selecting the corresponding
directory. You must also indicate the directory where the project should be
saved. A subfolder "Backupxxx" will be created in this folder where all project
files from the disc will be saved. All of the restored movies will be loaded into
MAGIX Video Pro X4 for editing.
Select the option "Restore image files only" and only the original image files
contained on the disc will be restored.
Load backup project...
This option loads an automatically created slideshow backup. This type of
automatic backup gets the file extension MV_ (underscore). This command is
only intended for use in emergencies, for example, if you unintentionally saved
your change and wish to return to the previous version of the movie.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + O
Tip: Under "File -> Settings -> Program...", you can determine how often an
automatic backup will be created in the "System" tab under "Automatic
backup".
Importing & exporting EDL files
Import EDL (edit list)
The menu "File -> Import edit list (EDL)..." allows you to import edit lists in the
Samplitude EDL format into MAGIX Video Pro X4. It is important in this case
that the folder structure remains unchanged. During importing into MAGIX
Video Pro X4, the file locations must match the place where they were when
the cut list was created using Samplitude/Sequoia.
If an empty project is opened, the complete EDL file will be imported.
If the tracks are muted before importing the EDL file, then they will not be
removed.
272 Settings for and management of video projectors
http://pro.magix.com
If there are already objects in the project, then you will be asked the files
should imported into the project or if a new project should be created for
them.
Export EDL
The menu item "File -> Export movie" enables EDL files to be created using the
"Export movie information as EDL..." for additional editing in other programs,
e.g. Samplitude or Sequoia.
This section features a completely new input mask. Use the check boxes to
select whether video and/or audio should be exported. As required, a selection
may be made whether individual tracks should be rendered or referenced as
original files via EDL. Video rendering takes place in the DV-AVI format, and
audio rendering as WAV stereo. For Surround projects, 6 mono files will be
rendered.
An export folder may be specified via the selection dialog. The EDL file and the
rendered files will be stored there as required.
Check boxes may be used to select whether the EDL file should be loaded
directly into Sequoia (if present). The program will either be launched
automatically, or the files will be added into a running instance of the program.
The user may enter the path to Sequoia in the input mask.
Clean-up wizard
The clean-up wizard helps delete projects from the hard drive, including all of
the media files used. Use this function to free up disk space for future projects.
Caution: If the files you used in the movie have also been used in other movies
(like trailers, opening music, etc.), then you should make backup copies of
these files beforehand.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + Y
Delete specific files
Choose this option if you would like to select certain files for deletion. In the file
selection dialog, you can select the desired files. In the next step, the clean-up
wizard searches for other files which belong to your selection. Using this
method, you can delete an entire movie with all of its accompanying media,
help, project, and backup files. Before they are deleted, you will receive
relevant information in a dialog and a confirmation request.
Settings for and management of video projectors 273
http://pro.magix.com
Search and delete superfluous files
Choose this option if you would like to find unnecessary files or free up some
space on your hard drive. The clean-up wizard automatically looks for
extraneous files created during use of MAGIX Video Pro X4. Before they are
deleted, you receive relevant information in a dialog and a confirmation
request.
Advanced
"Advanced" lets you set which files and folders should be included in the
cleaning process.
274 Special functions and wizards
Special functions and wizards
In this chapter, we will introduce you to some of the especially useful special
functions.
Automatic scene detection
In the "Effects" menu automatic scene recognition can be opened. The scene
recognition function analyzes the film for scene transitions and scans for
drastic changes in the brightness and color distribution within the picture.
Digital Video “time stamps” (points in time at which the device was switched on
and off) are also recognized as separate scenes.
1. First select "Start" from the "Search scene change" box. The search for
possible scene transitions will then start. If you have a large amount of
material, this can take a while, but the image analysis has to be done just
once for each recording. The results are saved together with the video file.
If the scene recognition is performed again with the same source material,
the scene transitions found are immediately displayed. If you are still not
happy with the resulting scene partitioning, simply repeat and correct where
necessary.
2. All found scene transitions in the list can be checked in the dialog. Every
scene marker can be selected or deleted. Select a scene transition from the
list of found scene transitions and use the preview images to check whether
the found transition is really a scene change or not.
http://pro.magix.com
Special functions and wizards 275
http://pro.magix.com
Tip: This option is helpful, for example, if a camera flash was captured in the
source footage. The flash from the camera would cause a sudden brightness
modification even though there was no actual scene change.
The preview always displays the end of the previous scene and the beginning
of the new scene. If the images do not differ except for the brightness, the
scene may have been falsly recognized. In this cases select "Delete scene
marker".
Via the zoom +/- buttons you can enlarge the part of the arranger where the
selected scene begins or previous scene ended.
You can use the "Sensitivity" controller to change the sensitivity of the scene
recognition, so that different scene changes can be found depending on the
setting.
With "Action on OK" you can specify whether the movie should be cut at the
selected scene transition or at all scene transitions and whether the found
scenes should be saved in the project folder.
Musical cut adjustment
Behind the "Adjust cuts to music" function in the "Edit" menu hides the option
to adjust the rhythm of an existing arrangement with cut scenes to a song in
order to transform the movie into a music video. Requisite is that the song
contains information about rhythm and beat.
Place the arrangement with video sequences on the top track (track 1), which
should be used for the musical edit adjustment. If possible, the arrangement
should have the same length as the song and contain many cuts.
Load the song, on which the cuts should be based, onto the track below.
Select "Edit" > "Musical cut adjustment".
276 Special functions and wizards
Normally, an info dialog will appear, stating that no beat information exists for
the selected audio object.
Select the "Open assistants" option in the dialog.
This opens the "MAGIX Remix Agent" beat recognition assistant. This tool can
analyze the song's rhythm.
http://pro.magix.com
Special functions and wizards 277
http://pro.magix.com
After the song's BPM value (= beats per minute) has been found, the music will
be separated into short, similar passages (remix objects). The individual
objects that result in (However, nothing prevents you from doing just that. To
do so, click on "Ungroup".)
The resulting object borders are important for editing. Because all objects
always "snap to grid" on their edges, videos can be arranged in such a way so
that they are cut exactly to the rhythm of the music: the positions on the track
where the videos will snap lie on the positions of the beat.
Requirements
The song must be longer than 15 seconds.
The song must be “rhythmic” (danceable).
The song must be in stereo format.
Preparation - Setting the start marker and object end
Before opening the Auto Remix Assistant, you should set the start marker at
the position in the song object in the arranger where you want detection to
start. If the song contains a long intro without beats, set the start marker after
the intro. As a rule of thumb, the Auto Remix Assistant should always be "fed"
dance music.
The start marker should be set before a quarter note beat or, better still, briefly
before a beat at the start of a bar.
If the start marker lies before the song object, the object is examined from the
beginning.
If detection is not performed by the end of the song, the object can be
shortened accordingly with the object handle at the end of the object.
Checking the automatic tempo recognition
The song has to meet the following three requirements to be successfully
analyzed:
It must be longer than 15 seconds.
It must contain "rhythmic" (danceable) music.
It must be in stereo format.
The analysis takes place in three steps:
Step 1: Checking the start marker
Step 2: Tempo recognition
Step 3: Specifying beat starts
Step 4: Application of BPM and beat recognition
278 Special functions and wizards
http://pro.magix.com
Step 1: Start marker check
Before analysis can begin, you should set the start marker in the project at the
position where rhythmic material begins. This means, it should be located after
the intro. If the assistant can't find any rhythmic information, it will ask if the
marker is located behind the intro. In the dialog, you can move it to the
appropriate location.
If the beginning of the track has no rhythmic information, you will be asked if
the start marker should be moved.
Step 2: Checking automatic tempo recognition
The Remix Agent will begin the audio file analysis and try to determine the
tempo. The object will be played back while a metronome click will sound and
numbered beat lines will appear in the waveform display.
Below the waveform display to the left is an indicator of the found tempo in
BPM. A small transport control is available in the middle to make navigation
easier. The slider enables position control. To control the metronome volume,
an additional slider as well as a mute button is found to the right.
Automatic tempo recognition doesn't always work on the first try. If you don't
hear the metronome clicking in time with the music, click the "No" button in the
upper section of the dialog in order to access the manual tempo input dialog.
To correct metronome tempo and move metronome clicks if needed, use the
tempo correction and "Tap tempo" buttons.
Tempo correction: The Remix Agent offers you a number of tempos. The
tempo, which the Remix Agent considers most likely to be the case is already
preset. If the calculated tempo is incorrect, select one that better fits from the
list. When the object is played again, metronome clicks should be
synchronized.
On/off beat correction: It can also be the case that the tempo is correct, but
the beats are shifted. "On/off beat correction" provides a number of
alternatives for moving the beats according to the complexity of the rhythm.
Try out different alternatives until you can hear that the metronome clicks are
synchronous to the beat.
Tap tempo: Alternatively to tempo selection under "Tempo correction" you can
also click on the "Tap tempo" button or the "T" key to the beat of the music.
Additional blue lines are displayed in the wave display. After at least four taps,
the Remix Agent attempts to select the correct tempo from the list in "Tempo
correction". The display next to the "Tap tempo" button displays the current
Special functions and wizards 279
http://pro.magix.com
status. Keep tapping until the red display showing "Unlocked" changes to the
green "Locked" setting.
Use the "0" key to manually set the quarter beats while the music plays.
Placed markers will be removed automatically in such a way that the set tempo
will be maintained.
You can move the markers with the mouse. If you press the "Ctrl" key at the
same time, all following markers will be moved.
If the metronome clicks now correspond with the music, you can continue to
the next step.
Step 3: Determining the start of a bar:
First set the type of beat. 4/4 beat is the default preset. If needed, correct the
start of the beat. The beat at the start of the beat should always match with
the high-pitched metronome click or the red line in the waveform display.
Correction cat take place in just one step: If you can hear the start of the beat,
click once with the mouse on the"Tap one" or press the "T" key on the
keyboard.
Alternatively, select how many quarter notes the "One" is to be moved back.
Use the "0" key to manually tap the position of the beginnings of the bars
during playback. This offers an efficient option to correct the beat start of
longer ranges.
Continue to the last step if the starts of the bars are now correct.
Step 4: Apply
The last step applies the musical information into the audio material.
Video cuts will now be inserted into the video material on track 1 based on this
information
Setting the manual and Onbeat/Offbeat
If the result is incorrect, you can help the Auto Remix Assistant with a few
mouse clicks on the correction buttons.
There are two possibilities:
280 Special functions and wizards
http://pro.magix.com
On the one hand, the "Tempo correction" list offers alternative BPM numbers
which could also fit with the music. The adjustable BPM values are detected
automatically – the total BPM can therefore deviate from song to song.
For more difficult audio material, we recommend using the "Tapping input"
mode. Either the "T" key must be pressed or the "Tap tempo" button must be
clicked with the mouse in time with the music. With repeated tapping of the
tempo correction button, one should keep an eye on the color in the BPM
display. In the "unlocked" condition (red), the tapping is not in time with the
music. One should tap until the "locked" condition is displayed. After a short
time, you will hear if the result is correct via the metronome.
Subsequently, offbeat correction takes place as required. If the detected
quarter note beats lie around the length of an eighth note (transferred behind
the real positions of the quarter note beats), one or more alternatives can be
selected from the onbeat/offbeat correction list.
Determining the start of a measure
Next, the starting point of the measure is corrected. The beat at the start of the
measure must always agree with the high tone of the metronome and/or the
red line in the wave-shaped display.
Corrections can be made by tapping; If the start of the measure can be be
heard, tap with the mouse or press the "T" key. Alternatively, you can also
select how many quarter notes the "one" is to be pushed to back.
If the starting marker was set briefly before the first beat of a measure, this
correction is not necessary.
Note: With all corrections, the metronome and visualization react to the lines in
the wave-shaped display only after a short delay.
Using BPM and beat detection
Now you may select one of the actions to be adapted to the arrangement song
(or vice versa) or cut up the songs at the ends of a measure.
Save only Tempo & Beat information
Only wave file data is stored. This makes sense if some manual post-correction
is required for determining beat/tempo.
When the data is stored, tempo & beat regulation can be released for future
tempo adjustments or to create object remixes.
Special functions and wizards 281
http://pro.magix.com
Tempo adjustment
Setting the object tempo to the arrangement tempo
This fits the object length to the existing arrangement. Three different
procedures are possible: timestretching, resampling, or audio quantization.
Timestretching keeps the pitch of the song constant, but sometimes the
sound quality can suffer.
Resampling changes the pitch (similar to changing the speed of a record
player), and retains the sound quality of the song as much as is possible.
During audio quantization, the audio file takes the tempo adjustments into
consideration as if the first remix object (see below) were created and
combined immediately into a new audio file. If the recognition is uncertain,
extreme tempo fluctuation may result. It is particularly important to set the
starting marker so that the tempo is recognized definitely. The advantage of
audio quantization is that small tempo fluctuations in the music balance out.
The start of the measure always agrees with the start of the arrangement
measure and never plays out of time.
Setting the arrangement tempo to the object tempo
The arrangement adopts the detected BPM value. If you would like to use the
cut-up song as the basis for a new composition (e.g. for remixes), then this
option should be active.
Creating remix objects
The song is cut by beat into individual objects. Some applications may include:
To produce loops from complete songs which can then be used with other
material. Most importantly, not all remix objects are suitable as loops. Ideally,
less complex material should be used, e.g. drums from an intro.
To remix songs, thus changing the sequence of the objects, cutting or
doubling beats or to enrich the song with other loops or synth objects.
To mix two songs: If percussion and tempo fit perfectly, can you blend the
songs without "side effects"?
This option can be activated later from the "Object" menu, provided that the
tempo data is stored.
The "Audio quantization" option: Audio quantization fits new objects exactly in
time with the arrangement.
With homemade music, tempo fluctuations are common, and therefore
different measure lengths may result. Nevertheless, so that the objects fit into
the rigid timing pattern of the VIPs, the time processor is activated
automatically and object timestretching is used to correct the different lengths.
282 Special functions and wizards
http://pro.magix.com
Setting resampling for small corrections: If the necessary corrections are very
small, better quality resampling can be used instead of timestretching.
Afterwards, you should not change the master tempo any longer, since definite
pitch changes may arise.
Remix objects in "Loop" mode: New objects are set in "Loop" mode. When
extending the object with the right object mouse handle, the original length of
the object is played again and again.
Setting the arrangement tempo to the object tempo: (see above)
Note: Time correction assigned to objects can be subsequently cancelled if the
time processor is called up and edited ("Timestretch/Resample object", or
double click on the object to open the FX racks associated with the time
processor).
Cancel: The dialog is closed.
Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto Remix Assistant
Problem: The playback stutters, the metronome is suspended, the computer is
overloaded... (on older computers.)
Remedy: We recommend changing to wave drivers ("P" key, "Playback
parameter" dialog) instead of DirectSound.
Problem: The metronome does not work and there are no lines on the the
wave-shaped display.
Probable cause: The material does not contain beats or the song contains a
passage without beats.
Remedy: The song should be limited in such a way that only rhythmic
passages are contained.
Possible 2nd reason: Inaccurate tapping or a false BPM value has been
entered.
Remedy: Try the tempo correction buttons or tap until the "locked" condition is
attained.
Problem: The metronome sounds inaccurately or is jerky, the lines in the wave-
shaped display are irregular and thinly drawn.
Special functions and wizards 283
Travel route animation
Open "Edit -> Wizards -> Travel route animation" to import and edit travel
routes in MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Note: In order to be able to use current map data, maps are fetched by the
travel route animation directly from the Internet. This requires an Internet
connection.
After opening the function, you will see the screen pictured here:
http://pro.magix.com
Map: Displays map material from openstreetmap.org.
Selected locations: All locations, searched using geonames.org or
selected manually on the map, will be shown on the list and marked using
pins.
Map section + zoom: The map may be moved by pressing the arrows.
"Zoom" enables you to zoom into the current section (+) to view more
details or to zoom out (-) for a better overview.
Show lines: If at least 2 locations are marked on the map, then this
function will be available for linking the locations. The line color and
thickness may be changed.
Animation: You can animate your travel route and save as video in WMV
format.
Save as image: The current map section may be saved as an image in
284 Special functions and wizards
the format PNG, BMP, JPG, or TIFF.
Select locations on the map
There are several options for selecting locations on the map for creating a
route.
Note: The map section will adjust itself depending on how many locations you
select and where they are. If you would like to view details about a location,
simply zoom in using "+" on the number block or the mouse wheel.
Search and select locations:
1. Click on the "+" button below "Edit destinations" to add an entry. This
new entry will appear blue below existing locations.
2. Assign a name to the new location and press Enter. The destination will
be added to the map. An additional marker is set for beginning and end
of a tour.
Note: If multiple locations are possible, a list with possible choices will
open. You can determine the destination by picking one from the list with
your mouse.
If important intermediate stages of the route should also have
a marker, click on the marker symbol in the properties
(cogwheel) of the destination.
Set destinations manually:
1. Move the map boundary by clicking on the map and holding down the
mouse key so as to make the desired destination visible.
2. Click on this button under "Edit destinations" to activate manual
entering of locations, or use the keyboard shortcut "M".
3. Click the target destination on the map. A new entry to the list will be
made.
http://pro.magix.com
Special functions and wizards 285
Rename destinations:
You can rename destinations by going to its properties
(cogwheel symbol) without changing it.
Search destination anew:
If the destination is incorrect, you can search the location
again in order to adjust the position of the marker.
Enter a new name in the entry field and click on the magnifying
glass or press enter.
Import GPX file:
If you have created a route with a GPS device and saved it as a GPX file,
you can import it and show the route on the map.
Note: Depending on the length of the route, it can take some time for the file to
be imported and displayed.
Adjust & delete locations
Change the sequence of destinations:
http://pro.magix.com
The order of destinations in the list corresponds to the sequence in which they
were created. You can edit the order of the destinations by clicking on a
location on the list and dragging it to a new place with the mouse key held
down. The route on the map will be adjusted. You can see this especially well if
you've activated the line (view page 287) in order to optimize the travel route
display.
Adjust the position of the destination:
You can adjust the position of a destination by grabbing the marker on the
map with your mouse and dragging it with the depressed mouse key to a new
position on the map. The marker will be moved, the travel route adjusted and
the new name of the destination will be automatically changed in the list.
286 Special functions and wizards
Note: If the destination marker doesn't appear, you can
activate it in the properties (cogwheel) by clicking on the
marker symbol.
Hide destination:
Click on the eye icon below the properties (cogwheel) of a
destination. The destination will remain in the list, but will be
hidden on the map and will not appear in the route. Click on
the eye again to display the location again.
Remove destination from the list:
To delete a destination from the list and the route, click on this button
next to the destination.
Save and load routes
The entire list of marked locations may be saved to load it later - without
having to search for and select all of the locations again.
Save as file:
Click on this button under "Edit destinations" or use the keyboard
shortcut "Ctrl + S".
Enter the save location and name of the location list in the dialog that
appears.
Click "Save" to back up the list and quit the dialog.
Open list:
To load a saved location list, click this button under "Edit destinations" or
use the keyboard shortcut "Ctrl + O".
Navigate to the save location and select the location list in the dialog that
appears.
Clicking on "Open" closes the dialog and opens the list with saved
destinations.
Adjust map section
Use this button to move the map section upwards (north), to the
right (east), downwards (south), or to the left (west).
The arrow keys on the keyboard may also be used to move.
Click on the point between the arrows to move the map window in
order to center the selected destination.
http://pro.magix.com
Special functions and wizards 287
Use this controller to zoom out of the map (-) or into it (+). The keys "+"
and "-" on the keyboard or the mouse wheel may also be used to zoom
in and out.
If you would like to show all marked locations and reveal as much of the
map as possible, click this button and the map will be adjusted
automatically.
If you would like to display only the route without the location markers,
click here and the pins will be hidden. A repeat click will display them
again.
Show lines (connect locations)
For two or more marked locations, the function "Show lines" will appear. This
function connects destinations on a map with a line in order to better visualize
the route.
Click this symbol to show lines connecting selected locations. The
functions responsible for line transparency, thickness, and color are to
the right.
http://pro.magix.com
Tip: The order of destinations in the list corresponds to the sequence in which
they were created. You can edit the order of the destinations by clicking on a
location on the list and dragging it to a new place with the mouse key held
down. The route on the map will be adjusted and the line will follow a different
course.
Hide line: To hide the line, click on the "Lines" button again.
Transparency and line thickness: Use the controller to
change the transparency (left controller) and the thickness
of the lines (right controller).
Line color: Set the desired line color using the color field
and slider.
288 Special functions and wizards
Tip: You can also create animations for the connecting line in the "Animation"
(view page 288) section and save it as a video.
Animation
For two or more marked locations, the function "Animation" will appear.
This enables you to display your travel route in motion and even
save it as a WMV format movie, e.g. to integrate it into vacation
movies or to send it.
Scroll map: Activate "Scroll map" and the map will move from location to
location when the animation is played back.
Animate line: The connecting line slowly connects all selected locations, from
the first to the last. It is moving at the speed of an animated object.
Soft animation: The animation starts slower, speeds up, and then slows down
before each location.
Animate object: You can select an object to follow the route of the trip, such
as a car or an airplane.
Duration (seconds): You can adjust the duration of the animation however you
like, depending on the length of the route. Enter seconds into the filed and test
the results via the preview option to see if you like the animation.
Preview: Before you save an animation as a video, test it to see if it
looks the way you want it to by clicking "Play".
Click on this button to save the animation as a video. Enter
the save location and name of the video in the dialog that
appears.
Note: This button indicates the height and width of the
future image. These values are adjusted as soon as window
sizes are adjusted or when the location list is shown (arrow
next to "Destinations").
Close: To leave the animation area, click "Close".
http://pro.magix.com
Special functions and wizards 289
Create a picture of a map
You can create a picture from a section of a map (including location markings),
e.g. to print it.
Step 1: Zoom into the map until you have reached the desired level of detail.
Step 2: Click this button (shortcut "Ctrl + E") and enter the
save location and the name of the image in the dialog that
appears. You may also select the format for the picture.
Note: This button indicates the height and width of the future image. These
values are adjusted as soon as window sizes are adjusted or when the location
list is shown (arrow next to "Destinations").
Step 3: With one click on "Save", the image is saved and the dialog is closed.
If you want to, you can hide the list of locations to the left to show a
larger section of the map.
Another click on this symbol will show the list again.
Keyboard shortcuts
http://pro.magix.com
Manual selection of locations "M"
Zoom into map "+" on the number block
Zoom out of map "-" on the number block
Save location list "Ctrl + S"
Load location list "Ctrl + O"
Save map section (with location markings)
as image
"Ctrl + E"
Move map section north (upwards) "Up arrow"
Move map section east (right) "Right arrow"
Move map section south (downwards) "Down arrow"
Move map section west (left) "Left arrow"
Cancel video export "Esc"
290 Special functions and wizards
Slideshow Maker
Slideshow Maker is ideal for converting still images into moving pictures,
adding background music, and effects.
Open Slideshow Maker via "Edit -> Wizards".
Style templates
Select a template that best matches your needs.
This button plays a sample slideshow with the selected style template.
Intensity
Controls the portion of video and image objects that feature effects. With
"Normal" you will see a balanced amount, whereas with "Weak" or "Strong",
correspondingly fewer or more effects.
Transitions
The different sliders are used to set the portion of individual fade types.
3D / Other: You can turn effects and fades belonging to each category on or
off using the list symbol. The arrow below the preview monitor plays a preview.
http://pro.magix.com
Special functions and wizards 291
http://pro.magix.com
Fade duration: Set the length of the fades in seconds.
Random fades: The fades are set to random values.
Effects
The faders enable the respective effects types to be specified.
Random effects: The faders that control the amount of effects are set
randomly.
Treat special image formats intelligently: Panoramas and portrait photos can
be treated "intelligently". If this option is activated, then panoramas and
portraits will be treated with special effects adjusted to the format. These
effects can also be selected in the detail view.
If this option is selected, then these images will use the same effects as all
other images.
Details activates effects or fades in the corresponding category. The arrow
below the preview monitor plays a preview.
You can turn effects and fades belonging to each category on or off using the
list symbol. The arrow below the preview monitor plays a preview.
Properties & title
Film length
Resulting film length: This is an estimation of how long the film will be after
applying Slideshow Maker.
Available music: This is the complete length of the music that is currently
selected. Background music (view page 292) enables detailed settings for the
pieces of music to be used.
Adjust film length to the music: An attempt is made to adjust the length of
photo objects to the background music. If the film is too short the music will be
cut off. If the film is too long, the music will repeat.
Adjust music length to the film: Photo objects have a set length, and the
resulting film is filled with music. The music at the end of the movie is simply
faded out.
292 Special functions and wizards
http://pro.magix.com
Including video objects
Process videos: If this option is set, then videos will be automatically
processed with effects and transitions.
Length: Settings may be made here about whether the original length of the
video should be maintained or if it should be shortened.
Opening and closing credits
Set the text for opening and closing credits here.
Text: Enter the corresponding text for opening and closing credits that should
be added by Slideshow Maker.
File: A title template, a video, or an image file may also be used.
Note: Titles created using Slideshow Maker may also be edited at any time.
Group associated images together
If this option is active, an attempt is made to detect associated events via their
date information and to separate them from each other optically. Detection of
individual events is based on the time span of these events to achieve a
sensible separation.
Begin group with black fade:A black fade is added between the different
events.
Begin group with date/time below thru black:A black fade is added between
the different events.A title is also faded in with a suitable duration, e.g.
1st/2nd/3rd day, provided the events take place over multiple days.
Begin group with date/time below picture:A black fade is added between the
different events.A title is also faded in with a suitable duration after the black
fade, e.g. 1st/2nd/3rd day, provided the events take place over multiple days.
Background music
Specify if and which music should be used for the background here.
Use background music: Adds background music.
Load file(s): A file selection dialog will open to choose a folder featuring music;
select one or multiple files.
Special functions and wizards 293
http://pro.magix.com
Remove: The selected pieces of music are removed from the list and will not
be used.
Insert random: MAGIX Video Pro X4 selects random pieces of music from the
folder "Import -> My Media -> Slideshow music" in the Media Pool.
Preview: This button previews the selected piece of music.
Volume ratio: This slider controls the volume ratio between the original sound
and the background music.
Tip: Music objects, located on the 5th track will be listed and used together
with audio objects for background music.
294 Special functions and wizards
Produce panorama pictures
This special function may be selected for highlighted photos under "Effects >
Video object effects > Create panorama". Using it, you can combine several
photos into a wide panorama photo. You don't need to create exclusively
"proper" panoramas; Let your imagination run wild and put together anything
you want to.
Tip: Optimize you photos beforehand, so that the transitions are not to be seen
in the finished panorama.
Select pictures for panorama
Load all necessary images into the film project as usual. The images that
should make up the panorama should be selected one after the other while
holding down the "Shift" key. Select the entry "Create panorama" from the
context menu "Effects" (view page 316) > "Video object effects".
Invert image sequence for panorama image
Sometimes photos are accidentally loaded in the wrong sequence or were
created from left to right. If you forgot to sort your photos correctly
beforehand, then simply click "Invert sequence".
http://pro.magix.com
Special functions and wizards 295
Calculating the panorama image
If you click on "Create" the panorama image will be processed. Depending on
the resolution and number of original images this may take some time. The
original photos are replaced in your slideshow with the panorama image in the
movie. The original files on your hard disk are not affected.
Note: You can use up to six images to create a panorama image. Click on
"More options", to find out more about the upgrade.
Finished panorama (2 images)
Finished panorama from 2 images
http://pro.magix.com
296 Special functions and wizards
http://pro.magix.com
Batch conversion
Batch conversion makes it is possible to convert multiple video files, movies,
objects, or whole projects into another format in just one step.
Open batch conversion
Batch conversion can be opened using different presets. A pre-selection
appears only if you have loaded a film or a project.
The following scenarios exist:
Batch conversion has been opened from the context menu in the Media Pool
(view page 50): The file selected in the Media Pool beforehand will be
transferred to the task list and can be converted to the available formats. In
case of projects which contain multiple movies, all movies will appear as
individual tasks.
Only one empty movie is open: A dialog opens additionally for batch
conversion, in which video files that have to be converted to other formats can
be selected and loaded.
A movie with video material and more than one object in the first track is
opened. A dialog opens, in which you can select which tasks should be
created for batch conversion.
- All scenes in the movie: All objects present in the 1st track will be
used as starting points for the video files to be exported. An application
for this could be that all scene beginnings of a movie should be
exported as bitmap files or a backup for a movie is to be created as
individual scenes.
- Multiple movies: The opened movie will be exported as a whole video.
Additional movies can be added to the list in the dialog.
Multiple movies with video material are open: The opened movie will be
exported as a complete video. This is especially useful for large projects with a
lot of individual movies, eliminating the need to export each one individually.
Administration
Save and load your settings here. These include the list of files to be exported
and the export settings and names of all entries.
Caution! Batch conversion references the projects, movies, and the objects
contained therein directly. Keep in mind that when converting entire movies,
the source material must also be available. During conversion of individual
Special functions and wizards 297
http://pro.magix.com
objects from movies, you have to make sure that the movie file has not been
changed between loading and saving.
Queued entries for batch conversion
This is the list of all objects that have to be converted into the indicated format.
Each task can have its own export settings.
Add files (not during conversion of individual objects from movies): Manually
add files, including video files and projects.
Remove selected: The marked tasks will be removed from the list.
Duplicate selected: If you would like to export tasks in multiple formats, you
can simply mark and duplicate them and assign individual export settings to
them.
Format settings for the selected conversion process
These are settings for the currently selected tasks, and multiple tasks can be
given a setting simultaneously. Select one or more tasks from the task list.
Note on format setting for multiple tasks: If one of the marked tasks already
has an individual setting, its will be lost after another format is selected. To
prevent this, remove the selection for each task using Ctrl + mouse-click.
Set the target format in the flip menu. Windows Media Video format (*.wmv) is
the default.
Advanced settings: This opens the dialog for the advanced format settings.
This corresponds to the dialog for normal video export of a movie.
Tip: If you give several tasks the same file name, the files created will be
documented intelligently. For example, you can easily convert and
simultaneously line up multiple movies that belong together thematically.
Shut down PC automatically after successful export
This option is especially useful when you export long movies and are using an
especially high-quality and resource-demanding export format. You can leave
the computer to work on the individual tasks and after finishing them it will turn
itself off.
298 Special functions and wizards
http://pro.magix.com
Start batch conversion
Click on "Start conversion" to start the process. After ending conversion
processes, a list of all export processes with a message informing of its
success will appear.
Hint: During batch conversion, messages that appear during normal file import
will be for the most part suppressed. This is to enable the smoothest
conversion of all tasks. Therefore, please make sure that all files to be
converted or the project can be easily loaded before starting a batch
conversion.
Blackmagic Design video cards
MAGIX Video Pro X4 supports display on and recording from monitors
connected via certain Blackmagic Design video cards such as DeckLink and
Intensity.
Fullscreen preview monitor
If you like, the video monitor image can be displayed on an external monitor
connected to the card output. To do so, activate "Program settings > Display
options > Video output to external device > Activate output" and select the
connected device.
The display mode on the external monitor (resolution/frame rate/interlace
properties) depends on the settings of the active movie. This makes very
precise movie preview during editing.
Record
These cards may also be used for recording from various signal sources, such
as HDMI. Some cameras/DSLR export preview images via HDMI, which you
can now capture directly in a high-quality format well-suited for editing by
skipping the camera's internal image compression via the HDMI input.
Furthermore, HDMI capture can be useful for creating presentations with
complex programs. The screen of a PC with an HDMI out can be displayed on
a second PC with an HDMI in.
Menus 299
Menus
Certain menu items are not available on the "Record" and "Burn" screens. The
menu reference describes the full menu as found on the "Edit" screen.
File Menu
New project
Creates a new MAGIX Video Pro X4 project. A dialog with settings for a
new disc project or a new film (view page 258) opens to get started.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + N
Open
With this option you can load a project or a media file. Please note that
all media files associated with it must be loaded along with a project.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 will search for all used sounds and video files in
the folders in which they were located when the move was saved.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + O
Save project
http://pro.magix.com
The current disc project is saved with the name displayed in the project
window. If you have not specified a name for your project yet, a dialog will
open for you to do so.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + S
Save project as...
A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the video for
saving.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + S
Manage movies
New movie
Use this option to create a new movie for your recordings and imported files.
Since a film is normally already opened, you will have to decide whether the
movie should be inserted into the existing project or if a new project should be
300 Menus
created.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + N
Delete movie
This option lets you remove the current movie from the project. However, it is
still available on the hard drive and can be loaded again at any time.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + F4
Attach movie
Using this function you can attach a movie to an opened one. This is then
attached to the end of the movie and automatically takes on the original
movie's settings.
Import movie file
Use this option to load a movie into your disc project. Please note that all
media files associated with it must be accessible. MAGIX Video Pro X4 will
search for all used sounds and video files in the folders in which they were
located when the move was saved.
The "Select movie for editing" button lets
you switch between movies.
Export movie file
A dialog will open to enter a file name for the movie to be exported. The movie
may then be imported into other projects again.
Note: The movie file (*.mvd) includes all information about the media files used,
cuts, effects, and titles, but not about the image and sound material itself. This
is always contained in the recorded or imported media files, which remains
unchanged during editing with MAGIX Video Pro X4. In order to save a movie
in its own folder, e.g. for use on another PC, use the function "Copy film and
media to folder (view page 270)".
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + L
http://pro.magix.com
Menus 301
Export movie
This provides all export formats supported by MAGIX Video Pro X4 that aren't
covered by burning. Refer to "Exporting (view page 239)" for more information.
Project folder
Import media files into project folder
The files selected in the Media Pool (view page 50) will be imported into the
project folder (view page 57).
Clean up project folder
Unused media files will be removed from the project file.
Note: This function applies to the entire project.
Record audio / images / video
http://pro.magix.com
A selection window will open to choose the desired recording type. This may
also be accessed via the "Audio or video recording" button in the transport
controls.
Keyboard shortcut: R
302 Menus
http://pro.magix.com
Import Audio CD track(s)
A CD track may be imported via drag & drop from the Media Pool just like a
normal file. If this convenient method fails for some reason, then this menu
command may be accessed via the CD manager to insert tracks from audio
CDs directly into the arrangement. More about this is available in the section
"Import audio CD".
Scan image
Select scanner
The twain interface connects MAGIX Video Pro X4 with almost all current
scanners or digital cameras. Here's how to proceed the first time you scan via
the twain interface:
1. Install the twain software for the device.
2. Restart your computer.
3. Start MAGIX Video Pro X4.
4. Click on "File -> Twain scanner -> Select source", if the scanner works with
32-bit software.
5. Click the device that you want to use in the dialog. This step will no longer
be necessary as long as the same device is used.
Start the scanning process
The scan window of your scan software will appear. Specify the resolution and
color depth in this window. Once the scan process is finished, the twain
software will normally switch off by itself – the scanned image file will be added
to MAGIX Video Pro X4 automatically. If the twain dialog remains open, you will
be able to scan multiple images in succession.
Import edit list (EDL)
Import cut lists in EDL format (view page 271) may be opened via this menu.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + D
Output to device
This command opens the dialog for exporting finished video or its soundtrack
to analog or digital VCR/camcorder or various mobile devices such as
smartphones and tablets.
Please read the chapter "Output audio/video".
Keyboard shortcut: H
Menus 303
http://pro.magix.com
Batch conversion
This menu item accesses the batch processing (view page 295) function. This
quickly and efficiently converts multiple files, movies, or projects into various
video formats.
Keyboard shortcut: S
Burn CD/DVD
Manually compile files
Opens MAGIX Speed burnR to burn videos or other files onto CD/DVD. File
selection is done via drag & drop from MAGIX Speed burnR's Explorer.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + B
Copy CD/DVD direct
The dialog provides several options for creating a copy:
Copy: Here you can directly copy a non copy-protected CD or DVD.
Shrink: Compresses a DVD to the size of a regular single layer DVD+/-R/RW.
All files of the original DVD have to be on the hard drive.
Analog copy: Copies your video onto a disc via analog recording.
Read more about this in the chapter "Record (view page 66)".
Burn an already created (S)VCD/Video DVD
All necessary files, menus, and encoded video files needed to burn a CD/DVD
will be temporarily stored on your hard drive. After your disc is burned, these
are not automatically deleted. Using "Disc image" multi-copy, you can uses
these images to burn as many discs as you would like without having to
encode the files again.
In the dialog, choose the image you want. All necessary files are then
transferred to the MAGIX Speed burnR burning tool.
For more information on using MAGIX Speed burnR, read the program's help
file.
Internet
This is a list of menu entries regarding all of the services that are available
directly from within MAGIX Video Pro X4.
304 Menus
http://pro.magix.com
MAGIX Online Album/MAGIX Online Print Service/Catooh
For MAGIX Online World please read menu item Share!
Export to magix.info
This command allows you to export your movie to magix.info.
First, export your project in one of the following formats: asf, mov, mpg, mpeg,
mp4, wmv, 3gp, or avi. Next, access "File -> Internet -> magix.info -> Present
videos on magix.info" to reach a page where you can upload your video. You
may need to register with magix.info.
Online login details
In this dialog, you can save your login information (login and password) for
MAGIX Online Album and all other MAGIX Online World as well as for Catooh,
making it unnecessary to login each time you access MAGIX Online World.
The saved data are valid for all other MAGIX programs for the corresponding
computer user.
Youtube / Vimeo / Facebook
This is the direct connection between MAGIX and various communities such
as. YouTube and Vimeo.
Youtube / Facebook
Uploads the current film to the selected portal or to the selected community.
Enter the data for video into the fields provided, so that the search function for
this portal can also find this video.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 partially uses the H.264 format for this, which is a
component of the MPEG-4 codec. Since Flash supports this format directly
and most communities and portals use the format, the film does not need to
be re-rendered on the corresponding server. This avoids loss of quality.
When HD material is uploaded, a resolution of 720p is used for the HD format.
Upload all selected media in Media Pool
Uploads the media selected in the Media Pool to the corresponding portal or
the selective community.
Menus 305
Backup copy
Files must be saved to be able to be easily retrieved in case of a hard drive
crash or some other error.
For detailed information, read the Backup (view page 270) section in the "Video
project management" chapter.
Load backup project
This option loads an automatically created slideshow backup. This type of
automatic backup gets the file extension MV_ (underscore). This command is
only intended for use in emergencies, for example, if you unintentionally saved
your change and wish to return to the previous version of the movie.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + O
Clean-up wizard
The clean-up wizard helps delete projects from the hard drive, including all of
the media files used. Use this function to free up disk space for future projects.
Caution: If the files you used in the movie have also been used in other movies
(like trailers, opening music, etc.), then you should make backup copies of
these files beforehand.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + Y
http://pro.magix.com
For detailed information, read the clean-up wizard (view page 272) section in
the "Video project management" chapter.
Settings
Movie settings
Opens the movie settings of the currently selected movie.
Program settings
Opens the program settings (view page 260).
Keyboard shortcut: Y
306 Menus
http://pro.magix.com
Keyboard shortcuts...
This menu entry opens a dialog for editing keyboard shortcuts (view page 359);
this enables you to adjust MAGIX Video Pro X4 however you like.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + U
Preview rendering
This menu opens the dialog for the preview rendering (view page 268) settings
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + R
Reset Program Settings to Default...
Use this function to reset all program settings you made in MAGIX Video Pro
X4 to their original settings.
Exit
Closes MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + F4
Menus 307
Edit Menu
Undo
With this command you can undo the last changes you made. This
way, it's no problem if you want to try out critical operations. If you
don't like the result, then you can always revert to the previous state by
using "Undo".
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until
now, allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings
(view page 260). In general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Z
Redo
This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until
now, allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
http://pro.magix.com
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings
(view page 260). In general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Y
Empty undo and cache memory
Using this function, you can empty undo and cache memory in order to be
better able to conduct memory-intense processes such as exporting
Cut objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected object in
"Timeline" mode) and copies it to the clipboard. You can then use the
"Paste" command to copy it into any movie.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + X
308 Menus
Copying objects
This function copies the selected scene (or the selected object in
Timeline mode) to the clipboard. You can then use the "Paste"
command to place it into any movie.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + C
Paste objects
This command inserts the clipboard material (photo or object) at the
current position of the start marker.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + V
Duplicate objects
This command duplicates all selected objects. The copies appear beside the
original and can be placed in the correct position using drag & drop.
Keyboard shortcut: D
Delete items
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected object in the
Timeline mode).
Keyboard shortcut: Del
Select all objects
All objects in the arrangement will be selected.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + A
Cut
Editing functions are also accessible using the toolbar. The last selected
function will appear in the toolbar as a button.
Split scene
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker
is positioned. This way, two free-standing objects are created.
Keyboard shortcut: T
http://pro.magix.com
Menus 309
Remove scene start
This command cuts a scene at the point where the start marker is
positioned, and deletes all material that precedes the start position
simultaneously.
Keyboard shortcut: Z
Remove scene end
This command cuts a scene at the point where the start marker is
positioned, and deletes all material behind the start position
simultaneously.
Keyboard shortcut: U
Remove scene
If you want to cut a scene out of a movie retroactively, this option
automatically moves all objects, titles, and transitions on all tracks
forwards so that no gaps result.
Objects on other tracks which project into the area of the selected scene will
not be moved automatically; they will remain at the current position.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Del
Split movie
This command divides the movie into two individual movies at the
position of the playback marker.
http://pro.magix.com
The current arranger retains the portion that is located in front of the playback
marker. The latter part will be removed from the current arranger and placed as
a new film. You can find this movie by going to the "Window" menu.
Shortcut: Alt + Y
Musical cut adjustment
If you have edited your background music with the beat detection wizard and a
musical tempo was provided, then you can adjust the cuts to change
automatically in time with the beat using this command. All of the cuts (even
transitions) will be moved to correspond with quarter note positions.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + H
310 Menus
http://pro.magix.com
Range
MAGIX Video Pro X4 provides object-based functions as well as "band-
oriented" editing functions. These always refer to the whole arrangement from
the first to the last track as well as to the area between the start and end
marker.
Cut
The section between the in and out points is cut from the current arrangement
and placed on the clipboard. It can, for example, be pasted in again at a
different position.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + X, Shift + Del
Copy
The section between the in and out points is copied from the current
arrangement to the clipboard. If can be pasted back at another location.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + C
Delete
The section between the in and out points is deleted from the current
arrangement and not copied to the clipboard.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Del
Insert
The contents of the clipboard are inserted at the current arrangement's
position of the in point.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + V
Extract
The section between the in and out points is preserved, and all of the material
in front and behind it are deleted. Use this option to isolate a specific part of an
arrangement for further individual editing.
Shortcut: Shift + X
Menus 311
Insert blank space
An empty section the length of the period between the in and out point will be
added to the first track. The objects following this will be moved.
Keyboard shortcut: C
Group objects
All selected objects are assigned to a group which may then be selected
and edited jointly by clicking the mouse.
Keyboard shortcut: G
Ungroup objects
This command splits an object group into separate objects.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + G
Wizards
Slideshow Maker
Opens the Slideshow Maker (view page 290)
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + M
Soundtrack Maker
http://pro.magix.com
This command opens MAGIX Soundtrack Maker (view page 209).
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + S
Travel route animation
This menu entry opens the separate Travel route animation (view page 283)
program. This enables simple creation of animated travel routes with the help
of online maps.
Note: In order to be able to use current map data, maps are fetched by Travel
route animation directly from the Internet. This requires an active Internet
connection.
312 Menus
http://pro.magix.com
Audio mixdown
This option joins all audio objects in one audio file. Afterwards, the audio
material will only occupy one track and take up hardly any RAM (does however
take up space on the hard drive [ca. 10 MB/min in stereo]). This way you get a
clear overview of further objects and space for them.
MAGIX Video Pro X4 automatically normalizes the audio file, i.e. the loudest
part of the wave audio object is identical with the highest figure of the 16-bit
resolution ceiling. This guarantees the same sound quality, even if you repeat
the mix down procedure or you combine the mix down file with other wave
audio objects again and again. The mix down function is very helpful if you
want to go on using the mix down object.
Tip: Instead of using the mixdown function, use the various options found in
the "Export movie" submenu of the "File" to create the final *.avi or *.wav (or
another multimedia) file.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + D
Audio and video mixdown
In addition to the "Combine audio" function (see above), all video objects
including effects, fades, and edits are combined in a single MAGIX video file
(view page 241). If your computer starts to approach its limits, this enables you
to free resources for further editing.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + M
Start preview rendering
You can render a pre-defined area for the preview or automatically search the
material for critical areas. See "Preview rendering".
Shortcut: Ctrl + R
Remove areas for preview rendering
All rendered previews will be discarded; the video material will be rendered
again via the arrangement in real time and played back.
Menus 313
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring
automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough
with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects
exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now
be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap
to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a
specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap
point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another
position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
Marker
Set project marker
This option places a project marker at the current playback position. More
information about project markers is available in the chapter "Markers" under
"Set project marker (view page 111)".
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Enter
http://pro.magix.com
Delete project marker
Deletes the selected project marker (view page 111). Project markers can be
deleted and renamed via the context menu.
Set chapter markers
Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This
creates a chapter entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being
burned to disc.
You can rename the chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename".
The new name will appear in the chapter menu (view page 213).
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Enter
314 Menus
Set chapter markers automatically
This option automatically sets chapter markers in the arrangement according
to specific rules that will then appear in the film menu of a disc as chapters.
This is useful if a disc should be burned immediately after recording.
There is a selection of options available for automatic chapter generation:
At beginning of movie: The movie only contains one chapter in this case.
At beginning of object in track: Every object in a track creates a chapter; track
1 is preset.
At position of existing title objects: Subtitles, for instance, as faded-in
subheadings, give the position of the chapter markers.
Specified interval (minutes)/Specified amount: If the chapters are separated
without any particular method and are just needed for quicker navigation,
chapter markers may also be inserted in pre-defined intervals or as a pre-
defined number of chapter markers.
Naming of chapter markers: To title the chapter markers, a user-defined name
featuring consecutive numbers or the object name or text from the text objects
may be used.
http://pro.magix.com
Menus 315
http://pro.magix.com
Optionally, existing chapter markers may be deleted and the automatic chapter
marker function may be limited to the area between the start and end markers.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + Enter
Delete chapter markers/delete all chapter markers
Delete one or all chapter markers. This removes chapter entries in the disc
menu if the film is burned to disc.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + Enter
Marker -> Set range start/end
Sets a range start/end marker at the position of the playback marker.
Keyboard shortcut: I/O
Marker -> Jump to range start/end
Sets the playback marker at the position of the range start/end.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + I/O
Range above blank space
The start and end of the range in the film will be set to the respective borders
of the empty space that is clicked on.
Keyboard shortcut: X
Marker -> Reset selected range
Deletes the range start and the range end.
Move screen view
Using these commands, a viewable portion together with the start marker will
be moved in the timeline. You can quickly skip between different markers (skip,
chapter, scene, ad-marker) and object edges.
Keyboard shortcut: See "Keyboard shortcuts", "Arranger". (view page 354)
Search for gaps
MAGIX Video Pro X4 enables you to locate gaps between objects where no
image material is located. This hinders unintentional black spots from
316 Menus
http://pro.magix.com
appearing. This option is located under "Edit -> Find gaps". A corresponding
dialog opens.
Optimize view: Zooms to the selected gap.
Mark gap as range: Spans a section over the selected gap.
Edit selected gaps: The selected settings are applied but no additional action
is taken.
Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + C
Multicam
This command switches to Multicam mode.
Mute audio tracks (Multicam)
As soon as you switch into multicam mode, all audio files in the source tracks
will be muted. You will hear only the audio track of the final movie.
If you would like to deactivate this function, uncheck the box. You can now
mute audio tracks one by one in the track boxes.
Menu effects
Master effects
This menu item accesses the movie's effect settings (view page 163). The
settings affected here apply to the entire movie.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + H
Video object effects
Scene recognition
Calls up the automatic scene recognition, which "cuts up" longer videos into
scenes for storage in the "Takes" directory.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Z
Menus 317
http://pro.magix.com
Image stabilization
Opens the image stabilization dialog to correct "wobbly" recordings. Read
more about this in the chapter "Image stabilization (view page 161)".
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + L
Edit in external editor
Graphics files (BMPs or JPEGs) may be edited retroactively with an external
graphics program from the arranger. The selected image file will be loaded
automatically and used in MAGIX Video Pro X4 in place of the original material
automatically. MAGIX Video Pro X4 includes the high-performance image
editing program "MAGIX Photo Designer" for this purpose.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + D
Save photos with effects
This allows you to save photos used in the movie and add the object effects
used in MAGIX Video Pro X4 (e.g. StoryMaker) to the photo.
Create panorama...
Opens the dialog for setting a panorama. Place as many photos in the correct
order as you like, and align brightness and color settings to get the best
results. You should make sure that the photos harmonize at the transitions.
Video effects
Here you can find adjustable effects for video and photo objects. The effects
can be set only after selecting an object in the respective effects dialog. For
more information, go to the "Video effects in the Media Pool" (view page 128)
section in the "Effects" chapter.
Video effect templates
This features general templates that can be added to the video objects via
drag & drop and several video mix effects that can be quickly and easily
applied, e.g. bluescreen.
318 Menus
http://pro.magix.com
Movement effects
These are movement effects you can use to animate the frame by using zoom
or camera movements. For more information go to the "Effects" chapter,
section "Movement effects in Media Pool" (view page 138).
Movement effect templates
These are templates for movement effects. These can be added from the
Media Pool into the arrangement by double-clicking or via drag & drop.
Background design
Select a color, a picture, or any video on your hard disk which you would like
to serve as the background for the photo displayed. This function is especially
useful when photos have black bars around them, or if they are reduced in
size.
Reset background
Resets the background design (view page 318) settings to default settings.
Set as background
Uses the selected photo or video as the background.
Load video effects
This command enables a saved effects combination to be loaded for the
currently loaded object. If multiple objects are selected, then the effects
combination will be applied to each selected object.
Shortcut: Alt + Shift + O
Save video effects
This command saves the current effects combination for each object
separately.
Shortcut: Alt + Shift + S
Reset video effects
This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects. The material will
be reset to the state it was in before you applied the effect.
Shortcut: Alt + Shift + H
Menus 319
http://pro.magix.com
Copy video effects
Effects settings for an object may be copied to the clipboard to add (view page
319) them to other objects.
Keyboard shortcut: -
Insert video effects
Video effects may be inserted into the selected object from other objects. The
settings must be copied (view page 319) beforehand into the clipboard.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + -
Apply video effects to all
The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in your
movie.
Apply video effects to all of the following
The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in your
movie which lie behind the selected object.
Audio object effects
Normalize
The function "Normalize" raises the level of an audio object to the maximum
possible level without clipping the material. This searches for the largest signal
peak in the audio material and raises the level of the object so that this position
matches exactly 0 dB (maximum overdrive).
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + N
Automatic track damping
Please see Reduce volume (view page 190) in the audio effects chapter.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + L
Set volume
This function, located in both the effects menu and the context menu, controls
the sound volume for individual objects, just like the object handles in the
arranger.
320 Menus
http://pro.magix.com
Audio cleaning
Opens the "Audio Cleaning (More information can be found in the section
"Sound optimization" on page 176)" dialog.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + A
Echo/Hall
Please see "Reverb/Echo" in the chapter "Audio effects".
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + H
Timestretch/resample
Read more about this in Timestretch/resample.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Q
Surround
Surround, see Surround, chapter Audio effects
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + N
Load audio effects
This command enables a saved effects combination to be loaded for the
currently loaded object. If multiple objects are selected, then the effects
combination will be applied to each selected object.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + +
Save audio effects
This command saves the current effects combination for each object
separately.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + +
Reset audio effects
This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects entirely if you
want to undo the changes.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + +
Menus 321
BPM Wizard
Read the section concerning the Tempo and beat recognition in the chapter
"Audio" for more about this.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + K
Volume curve
The most important effect, the volume, is available here directly. The volume is
also available via the Media Pool under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General
(view page 145)", where it may also be animated.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + V
Title Effects
Title Editor
Opens the Title editor for the selected photo, video, or title
object.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + T
Load title template
Use this command to load previously saved title effects for the current object.
Shortcut: Alt + Shift + T
Save title template
http://pro.magix.com
You can save the current effect combination for each title object separately
and apply it to other title objects later.
Shortcut: Alt + T
Design elements
Picture-in-picture: Here you will find various presets for picture nestling.
Collages: work similarly to regular picture-in-picture effects, but employ
multiple objects. Depending on the collage, arrange the selected objects one
after the other and drag the collage onto the first object.
Test images: Professional test images for calibrating your system are included.
322 Menus
Backgrounds: Here you can find static and animated photo and video
backgrounds. Video backgrounds are capable of being looped, meaning that
their length can be extended by duplication. The special "User" template opens
a color selection dialog where you can choose the desired color.
Image objects: Here you will find various image objects such as black bars,
thought bubbles for cartoons and others.
You can find additional information in "Effects" chapter, in the section "Design
element in Media Pool".
Effects library
Using these menu choices, you can control the corresponding directories in
the Media Pool (view page 50).
Windows menu
Window arrangement
Switch between the classic Movie Edit Pro screen with a single monitor or the
normal MAGIX Video Pro X4 view. More information can be found in the
chapter "Notes for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro users (view page 17)".
Movie Edit Pro and Video Pro X each have default window arrangements.
However, you can save any other arrangement and combination of visible
windows. You can then easily switch between them using menus. Us the
"Save..." menu..
At the top you can select a
name for the window
arrangement.
In "Media Pool" you can
additionally determine
whether selected tabs (main
navigation) and sections
(subnavigation) should also
be saved.
http://pro.magix.com
Menus 323
http://pro.magix.com
Keyboard shortcuts F10, F11 and F12 are automatically assigned to the first
three window arrangements; by going to "File" > "Settings" > "Shortcuts..."
every other arrangement can be assigned a keyboard shortcut (view page
359).
Each user-defined window arrangement can also be deleted. You can select
the arrangement to be deleted in the dialog found under "Window
arrangement" . "Delete" and then press the "Delete" button.
Editing mode
This command switches the MAGIX Video Pro X4 screen into the simplified
basic mode (view page 62)
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make fine
adjustments to the position of the selected video or image objects and their
handles – as well as the transition characteristics (transition type, length).
Please read the "Fine adjustment of video ("Trimming")" chapter for more
details.
Keyboard shortcut: N
Object trimmer
Shows or hides the trim window. This enables the position of the selected
video or image object and its handles to be adjusted more finely. Read the
chapter "Adjusting videos precisely" ("Trimming").
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + N
Mixer
With this option you can open and close the real-time mixer. Further
information can be found in the Mixer (view page 195) chapter.
Keyboard shortcut: M
Master audio effect rack
Opens or closes the master effects rack; you can also use the "Master FX"
button in the mixer window for this.
Keyboard shortcut: B
324 Menus
http://pro.magix.com
Mastering Suite
This opens the Mastering Suite (view page 185).
Program monitor
Hides or shows the program monitor.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + V
Source monitor
The source monitor provides an opportunity to preview and edit files in the
Media Pool, and these can in turn be dragged into the project folder or the
arrangement from the source monitor.
For the exact options for cutting in the source monitor, please see the chapter
"Section markers in the source monitor (view page 112)".
Media Pool
With this option you can hide the Media Pool or make it visible again.
Keyboard shortcut: F
Project
Shows/Hides the arranger
Project folder
Hides or shows the project folder.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + B
Activate next window
You can switch between the various program windows (screen areas) back
and forth.
Show movie overview
With this option, you can display an overview of the entire arrangement on the
video screen. It is particularly suitable for long and complex arrangements to
prevent you from losing track. You can view the whole movie and you are,
despite this, able to access the object you're looking for in a split second – you
can zoom in directly on the video monitor or move around the clip displayed in
the arranger.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + A
Menus 325
Optimize movie view
The zoom level is set to 100% so that you can see every object and the
entire film.
The start and end markers are set to the beginning or end, so that the entire
movie can be played.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + F
Zoom horizontal
Here you will find a range of functions for altering the visible time axis section.
Zoom vertical
The number of simultaneously visible tracks can be changed here. The more
tracks are visible, the smaller they will appear.
Remove all movies from project
All movies are removed from the open project.
If you want to use these movies with the current changes such as effects and
titles again, export these movies first via "File > Manage movie > Export". This
saves the movie's editing state, but not the original material. If you were to
delete the source material, the editing state won't be restored.
Help Menu
http://pro.magix.com
Help
This command is available for almost every feature of the program, and it
opens the "Help" file for the corresponding topic. Use this command to get
help on any of MAGIX Video Pro X4's functions.
Keyboard shortcut: F1
Content
Use the command "Content" in the "Help" menu to open the start page of the
help file. You can read through the help file step-by-step and jump to specific
sections via the tree structure on the right hand side.
326 Menus
http://pro.magix.com
Context help
The mouse cursor will turn into an arrow with a question mark.
Click on any button of the main screen, to open program help which will
describe the control element in question.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + F1
Display Tool Tips
Tooltips are small information windows that open up automatically if the mouse
pointer stops briefly on a button or some other area. They provide information
about the function of the button. These information boxes can be switched on
or off with this option.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + F1
Open magix.info
Directly from within the program you'll be able to access magix.info, the
Multimedia Community from MAGIX. You'll find answers to all the most
frequently asked questions about MAGIX products and multimedia in general.
Were you unable to find a solution to your particular problem? No problem, just
ask the question yourself.
Online tutorials
Interesting tutorials and useful tips for working with MAGIX Video Pro X4 can
be found on the MAGIX website.
An online connection is required.
Get in contact with other users
MAGIX Screenshare allows you to transfer the contents of your screen to other
users (Screen transfer as guest) or view the screens of other users (Screen
transfer as host).
To transfer the contents of your monitor to another user, select the menu item
"Transfer screen as host". The MAGIX Screenshare start screen will appear.
Now click "Start session".
Note: Clicking your name allows you to change it as it appears in the session.
In the start screen, you can also set if you would like to view the guest's screen
as the host via the "Settings" tab under "Options".
Menus 327
Two windows will open. A large one which
shows other screen contents as required, and
a smaller one which displays your session ID.
Provide this number to all users who would
like to view your screen.
Note: The session ID changes with every new session.
If you would like to receive another user's screen contents, you will require the
session ID. Select the menu item "Transfer screen as guest". In the dialog that
opens, enter the session ID you received and click "Start session".
Register online
This option opens the MAGIX homepage for online registration where you can
register yourself as a MAGIX user.
Registration grants you access to the MAGIX support website
http://support.magix.net (see support) where various program updates and
help programs can be downloaded.
With the registration form supplied (start menu under "MAGIX Video Pro X4 ->
Service and support -> Register") you can register via post or fax. Simply print
it out, fill it in, and send it off!
Keyboard shortcut: F12
http://pro.magix.com
Online Update
Connects directly to the online update page where you can get the latest
version of your program.
Download video effects plug-ins
This command lets you download new video effects plug-ins.
About MAGIX Video Pro X4
Displays copyright info and version number of MAGIX Video Pro X4.
328 Context menu (right click)
http://pro.magix.com
Context menu (right click)
Context menu can be reached by right clicking on a selected object. It offers
functions which are available and can be expected in the given context.
Video objects
Audio and waveform display
Create wave form
In most cases, the waveform display of an audio file will not be required.
However, if you require this, e.g. to navigate while cutting video, a waveform
display can be produced manually via this function.
Video/audio on one track
Video material and the corresponding audio material (original sound) will be
displayed as one object on one track. Using the top object handle you can
adjust the video's opacity. The lower object handle adjusts the object's
volume.
Video/audio in separate tracks
Audio material will be displayed on a separate track below the corresponding
video material. This makes it easier to make advanced adjustments to audio
material that go beyond changing the soundtrack's volume.
Remove audio object
When you no longer need the audio object, remove it.
If you decide that you need the original sound after all, you can "Restore audio
object".
Create frame table (new)
Sometimes, rebuilding a frame table can get rid of problems in certain MPEG
files. For example, such problems can be present if the navigation (positioning
of the playback marker, transport) is bumpy or doesn't function at all.
Normally, when loading MPEG video, a frame table is not created in order to
speed up the loading process. If you do create one anyway, MPEG files are
normally noticeably faster and easier to edit.
Context menu (right click) 329
http://pro.magix.com
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make fine
adjustments to the position of the selected video or image objects and their
handles – as well as the transition characteristics (transition type, length).
Please read the "Fine adjustment of video ("Trimming")" chapter for more
details.
Keyboard shortcut: N
Object trimmer
Shows or hides the trim window. This enables the position of the selected
video or image object and its handles to be adjusted more finely. Read the
chapter "Adjusting videos precisely" ("Trimming").
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + N
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring
automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough
with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects
exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now
be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap
to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a
specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap
point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another
position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
Create still frame
MAGIX Video Pro X4 can create a still frame of an object at the position of the
start marker.
Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the "Video
effects" chapter.
330 Context menu (right click)
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read the "Video
effects" chapter for more details.
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a
movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 160)".
Interpolation for interlace material
Choose this option to remove interlace artifacts from your video image. If, for
instance, you extract freeze frames from a video, ridge structures appear in
sequences which feature movement.
Anti-flicker filter
Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and high contrast.
This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.
Border cropping adjustment:
Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your television.
Values stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 164)" ("Effects" menu) will
be applied.
Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.
Insert objects into the project folder
Every single object can be added to the project folder and used again later. All
of the object's properties will be maintained. This is useful, for example, if the
video material should be edited beforehand and then arranged in the next step.
http://pro.magix.com
Context menu (right click) 331
http://pro.magix.com
Fade in date as title
MAGIX Video Pro X4 is also able to insert the time and date into the image
material. To do this, select the option "Show date as title" in the video object's
context menu.
If a DV-AVI file is involved (e.g. a digital recording from a camcorder), then the
recording date for the selected position will be used. If another type of file is
involved, then the creation date of the file will be used as the timecode.
Following this, the title editor will appear to adjust the information.
The context menu of the program monitor also features the option "Show
playing time". This also creates a timecode.
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects
such as file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor
also defines the foreground and background color of every object in the
arrangement. Depending on the type of object, the elements displayed will
vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio
for the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information
is also displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video
material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Video Pro X4 automatically makes
suitable settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video
footage. If playback of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or
if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the source
material frames.
Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing"
does not have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and
passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Video Pro X4 will
perform high-quality interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is
assumed that the source material contains full frames.
332 Context menu (right click)
http://pro.magix.com
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 395).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen
motion during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or
halved here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they
will appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the
object.
Image objects
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring
automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough
with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects
exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now
be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap
to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a
specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap
point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another
position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
Change photo length
This dialog gives exact values regarding the display duration for the selected
photo. You may select multiple photos beforehand to change their display
duration at once.
Context menu (right click) 333
http://pro.magix.com
Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the "Video
effects" chapter.
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read the "Video
effects" chapter for more details.
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a
movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 160)".
Cut automatically to fit screen
This function ensures that images don't have black edges (in case they don't fit
into the given format).
Anti-flicker filter
Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and high contrast.
This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.
Border cropping adjustment:
Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your television.
Values stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 164)" ("Effects" menu) will
be applied.
Export to MAGIX Online Album
Log in to the MAGIX Online Album service and load images and music into the
album to share them with your friends and acquaintances in the Internet. The
assistant will lead you step-by-step through the uploading process. After the
process is finished, you can access your updated MAGIX Online Album.
Export to MAGIX Online Print Service
Use MAGIX Online Print Service to order high-quality photo prints or fantastic
printed photo gifts of your valuable digital photos simply with one click.
334 Context menu (right click)
Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.
Insert objects into the project folder
Every single object can be added to the project folder and used again later. All
of the object's properties will be maintained. This is useful, for example, if the
video material should be edited beforehand and then arranged in the next step.
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects
such as file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor
also defines the foreground and background color of every object in the
arrangement. Depending on the type of object, the elements displayed will
vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio
for the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information
is also displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video
material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Video Pro X4 automatically makes
suitable settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video
footage. If playback of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or
if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the source
material frames.
http://pro.magix.com
Context menu (right click) 335
http://pro.magix.com
Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing"
does not have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and
passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Video Pro X4 will
perform high-quality interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is
assumed that the source material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 395).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen
motion during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or
halved here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they
will appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the
object.
Transitions
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make fine
adjustments to the position of the selected video or image objects and their
handles – as well as the transition characteristics (transition type, length).
Please read the "Fine adjustment of video ("Trimming")" chapter for more
details.
Keyboard shortcut: N
Settings...
A dialog with the settings for the corresponding transition will be displayed.
Depending on the transition, different settings are available.
336 Context menu (right click)
http://pro.magix.com
Audio objects
Create wave form
In most cases, the waveform display of an audio file will not be required.
However, if you require this, e.g. to navigate while cutting video, a waveform
display can be produced manually via this function.
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring
automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough
with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects
exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now
be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap
to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a
specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap
point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another
position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
BPM Wizard
Read the section concerning the Tempo and beat recognition in the chapter
"Audio" for more about this.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + K
Insert objects into the project folder
Every single object can be added to the project folder and used again later. All
of the object's properties will be maintained. This is useful, for example, if the
video material should be edited beforehand and then arranged in the next step.
Edit wave files externally
Audio files from the arranger can be post-edited in an external wave editor
program. The selected audio file is loaded automatically and, once editing has
been completed, is used in the MAGIX Video Pro X4 instead of the original
Context menu (right click) 337
http://pro.magix.com
material. For this purpose, MAGIX Video Pro X4 comes with a powerful audio
editing tool: MAGIX Music Editor.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Z
Volume curve
The most important effect, the volume, is available here directly. The volume is
also available via the Media Pool under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General
(view page 145)", where it may also be animated.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + V
Audio effects curves
This feature provides direct access to diverse object effects, and these can be
automated using a curve. All of the audio effects listed here are found in the
Media Pool under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General".
Align other audio objects with this track
Video objects grouped with audio objects may be used to synchronize
recordings from different camera perspectives.
For more information, please see the topic "Synchronize video objects using
the audio track (view page 119)".
Split stereo objects into mono objects
An audio object in stereo format can be split into two mono objects very easily
using this function. The original track will then feature the audio object with the
left channel, and an automatically added track will feature the object with the
right channel.
This is useful if the channels were switched by accident during recording, i.e.
due to incorrect cabling. In this case, simply open the mixer and set the pan
setting to the correct position for each channel.
Display track curves
The most recently selected track curve is displayed on the object for editing.
Use of a curve causes the parameters set in the mixer to be disregarded.
Note: The track curves of audio objects can be animated in the same way as
video effects. Read more about this in the chapter "Animating objects (view
page 150)".
338 Context menu (right click)
http://pro.magix.com
Reset track curves
All track curves can be reset with this function. The settings made in the mixer
will be applied to the track again.
Caution! Before applying this function, make sure none of the track curves will
be need in the future.
Export to MAGIX Online Album
Log in to the MAGIX Online Album service and load images and music into the
album to share them with your friends and acquaintances in the Internet. The
assistant will lead you step-by-step through the uploading process. After the
process is finished, you can access your updated MAGIX Online Album.
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects
such as file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor
also defines the foreground and background color of every object in the
arrangement. Depending on the type of object, the elements displayed will
vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio
for the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information
is also displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video
material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Video Pro X4 automatically makes
suitable settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video
footage. If playback of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or
if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the source
material frames.
Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing"
does not have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and
passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Video Pro X4 will
Context menu (right click) 339
perform high-quality interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is
assumed that the source material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 395).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen
motion during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or
halved here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they
will appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the
object.
Text objects
Title Editor
Opens the Title editor for the selected photo, video, or title
object.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + T
http://pro.magix.com
Disable effects
All effects applied to the text will be deactivated.
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring
automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough
with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects
exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now
be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap
to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a
specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
340 Context menu (right click)
http://pro.magix.com
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap
point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another
position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
Load title template
A dialog for loading a title template will open.
Save as title template
This allows you to create your own templates using your title creations. The
function "Load title template" enables these templates to be used again
quickly.
Save as special effect
This function saves the title with all objects that have been grouped (view page
311) with the title object. This enables you to create title templates that contain
all required overlay objects.
Convert to 3D title
The title object will now be turned into a MAGIX 3D Maker object, and a limited
version of MAGIX 3D Maker will open.
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a
movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 160)".
Border cropping adjustment:
Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your television.
Values stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 164)" ("Effects" menu) will
be applied.
Insert objects into the project folder
Every single object can be added to the project folder and used again later. All
of the object's properties will be maintained. This is useful, for example, if the
video material should be edited beforehand and then arranged in the next step.
Context menu (right click) 341
http://pro.magix.com
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects
such as file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor
also defines the foreground and background color of every object in the
arrangement. Depending on the type of object, the elements displayed will
vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio
for the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information
is also displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video
material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Video Pro X4 automatically makes
suitable settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video
footage. If playback of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or
if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the source
material frames.
Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing"
does not have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and
passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Video Pro X4 will
perform high-quality interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is
assumed that the source material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 395).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen
motion during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or
halved here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
342 Context menu (right click)
http://pro.magix.com
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they
will appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the
object.
MAGIX 3D Maker objects
Edit settings...
A limited MAGIX 3D Maker version is opened to edit the selected object.
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring
automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough
with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects
exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now
be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap
to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a
specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap
point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another
position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
Create still frame
MAGIX Video Pro X4 can create a still frame of an object at the position of the
start marker.
Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the "Video
effects" chapter.
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read the "Video
effects" chapter for more details.
Context menu (right click) 343
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a
movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 160)".
Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.
Insert objects into the project folder
Every single object can be added to the project folder and used again later. All
of the object's properties will be maintained. This is useful, for example, if the
video material should be edited beforehand and then arranged in the next step.
Object properties
http://pro.magix.com
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects
such as file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor
also defines the foreground and background color of every object in the
arrangement. Depending on the type of object, the elements displayed will
vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio
for the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information
is also displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video
material.
344 Context menu (right click)
http://pro.magix.com
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Video Pro X4 automatically makes
suitable settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video
footage. If playback of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or
if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the source
material frames.
Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing"
does not have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and
passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Video Pro X4 will
perform high-quality interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is
assumed that the source material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 395).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen
motion during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or
halved here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they
will appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the
object.
Project folder
Rename
This command allows you to rename an object in the project folder. The name
is also used as a file name if you save the object as a take (*.tk2).
Save
This command enables an entry in the project folder (object or object group) to
be saved as a take file (*.tk2). More about this is available in the chapter
"Objects" under the section "Saving objects separately".
Delete
Removes the object from the project folder. The associated source file (photo,
video, audio, etc.) will not be deleted.
Context menu (right click) 345
http://pro.magix.com
Properties
Displays the properties of the object (view page 331) in the project folder.
Insert movie
Inserts the selected object into the movie.
Open in video monitor.
Displays the selected object in the source monitor.
Track
This menu opens by right clicking on an empty range in the track.
Paste objects
Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the click position.
Range above blank space
The start and end of the range in the film will be set to the respective borders
of the empty space that is clicked on.
Keyboard shortcut: X
Display track curves
This option hides or shows track curves for the corresponding track. Track
curves are only available fro the volume and panorama of an audio track.
These result if these are automated via the mixer. Read more about this in the
chapter "Audio tracks (view page 197)".
Shortcut: Alt + -
Reset track curves
The volume and balance track curves are reset; the automation for the
corresponding mixer settings (view page 197) is removed.
346 Problems and solutions
http://pro.magix.com
Problems and solutions
File will not load
If files cannot be loaded, this means that the format is either not supported by
MAGIX Video Pro X4, or the corresponding codec must be activated first. Read
the section "Import formats (view page 16)" for more information.
In case of AVI files, it is possible that the necessary codec in not installed. For
more, please refer to "General tips for AVI videos (view page 364)" in the
appendix "Digital video and storage devices".
Choppy or uneven playback
Don't panic if the picture on your screen is choppy or uneven. The finished
product will look perfect and play smoothly. Don't forget that MAGIX Video Pro
X4 calculates all effects in real time. This lets you see for yourself what sort of
influence each of the effects will have on your video footage. Some effects
make even today's high-performance PCs work quite hard, and often, a
steady, continuous video stream is simply not possible on your PC. The final
product, free from previous choppiness, is only available after rendering it to
DVD or exporting it. For that reason, you should first edit the movie in its raw
version without effects. The preview generally delivers a steady picture,
allowing you to work quickly and quietly. Towards the end, you can add effects
to your movies to give them a special touch of Hollywood!
Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto Remix
Assistant
Problem: The playback stutters, the metronome is suspended, the computer is
overloaded... (on older computers.)
Remedy: We recommend changing to wave drivers ("P" key, "Playback
parameter" dialog) instead of DirectSound.
Problem: The metronome does not work and there are no lines on the the
wave-shaped display.
Probable cause: The material does not contain beats or the song contains a
passage without beats.
Problems and solutions 347
http://pro.magix.com
Remedy: The song should be limited in such a way that only rhythmic
passages are contained.
Possible 2nd reason: Inaccurate tapping or a false BPM value has been
entered.
Remedy: Try the tempo correction buttons or tap until the "locked" condition is
attained.
Problem: The metronome sounds inaccurately or is jerky, the lines in the wave-
shaped display are irregular and thinly drawn.
Activation problems
Problem: The entered code is incorrect (telephone activation)
Make sure your entry is correct; in most cases a typo is to blame.
If the code is entered correctly, dial the number of our Call Center. Our support
staff will help you personally.
The MAGIX website won't open
Check your Internet connection; you may have to use manual dial-up.
The form for ordering via post/fax won't open
Check that an adequate text editing program is installed and activated (for
example, MS Word).
I still haven't received an email with the activation code
Check that your inbox isn't full.
Have a look in your spam folder.
You can always send questions via email to our support whenever you like.
Please have the following information at hand so that we can assist you as
quickly and as specifically as possible.
Complete product name
Exact version number (to be found in the about box in the "About" menu item
of the "Help" menu)
Encoder/Decoder name
Your user code (accessible via the "Activate via post/fax" dialog)
348 Online functions
Problem: I have installed MAGIX Video Pro X4 on a new computer, installed a
new hard drive in my old computer (sound card, memory...), or installed it
multiple times on the same computer. My activation code is no longer
accepted!
If the program cannot be activated again after it has been activated multiple
times, please contact the MAGIX customer service (view page 9).
Online functions
Integrated browser
The integrated browser offers many useful functions that help you collect
material for using in your project. All kinds of media can be collected – images,
videos, sound or simply text can be all integrated using the built-in browser
with great results.
Tip: You must have an Internet connection to use the full range of options
offered by the integrated browser.
Open browser
The integrated browser is opened by
clicking on the "Internet media" button in the
Media Pool (see Media).
Navigation in the browser
One page back: Switches to the previous page.
One page forward: Switches back to the page before the "One
page back" button was pressed.
http://pro.magix.com
Online functions 349
Stop: Stops loading the selected page.
Reload: The current page will be reloaded.
Home: Returns to the home page.
In the address header, next to the navigation buttons, you can simply enter an
Internet address like http://http://pro.magix.com. Press the enter button and
the corresponding page will be loaded.
Loading Internet media
The buttons described here are used to collect and load media directly from
the Internet into the current film. The corresponding functions can be found in
the context menu of the browser.
http://pro.magix.com
Save selected text: The selected text will be saved. It can
then be edited using the title editor.
Start screen capture: Opens the capture dialog for starting
screen capture.
Download selected images: The selected images will be
saved to your computer.
Import screen capture of the opened Internet page: The
loaded Internet page will be saved as an image file.
Start audio recording: A dialog for audio recording opens.
Hint: For recording from the Internet, it is important that the
sound card is selected as the sound source.
Accept media after download
This option makes sure that the downloaded media are loaded into the current
movie right away.
350 Online functions
Define the path for saving Internet media.
To define the path for saving Internet media, simply click on the folder symbol
and navigate to the desired folder. Confirm your selection with OK.
MAGIX News Center
The MAGIX News Center features links to current online tutorials and tips &
tricks on the software application examples. The "News" is indicated by color
according to content:
Green indicates practical tips & tricks for the software
Yellow reports the availability of new patches and updates
Red for special offers, contests and questionnaires
If no new messages are present, the button will appear gray. When the MAGIX
News Center is clicked, all of the available information will be displayed. Click
the messages to reach the corresponding website.
Embed Flash videos into your own web page
To do this, you will need a basic knowledge of HTML pages and all technical
requirements for uploading your files to your web page.
Tip: If you do not have HTML skills, we recommend using MAGIX Online
Album. Without any previous knowledge, you can present videos, photos and
music on your own web page – all completely for free. Videos from MAGIX
Online Album can also be embedded in other websites as well.
Please note that a Flash video cannot be directly embedded into an HTML
page like a picture in JPEG format. For a Flash video, you will need a Flash
player embedded in the website to play back your video.
MAGIX offers you a download package with some Flash player goodies. It can
be downloaded here http://support.magix.net/dl/flvplayer.php.
The package contains the following files:
http://pro.magix.com
Online functions 351
http://pro.magix.com
standalone_omk.swf - the Flash player
demo.html - a sample website, which demonstrated how the player can be
used
demo.flv - a demo video, which will be played by the Flash player on the demo
website
To reach your target quickly, simply adjust the demo website to your own
requirements and replace the demo video with your own. At the end, upload all
three files to your website.
If you need more information about the website's HTML code, we recommend
that you read an explanation of HTML documentation to better understand the
structure and functions of HTML.
If you understand HTML code, you will find another explanation of various
parameters using which you can influence the appearance and function of the
Flash player.
url The path to the video which is to be played back.
preview The path to an image in JPEG format. It is displayed as
a preview in stopped state before the video is played
back.
sound The sound contained in the video will be played back if
this parameter is "true".
loop The video will be automatically played back from the
start after reaching the end if this parameter is "true".
tooltip Changing the position of the position cursor will display
a tooltip with position information if this parameter is
"true".
swfborder A limiting line will be drawn around the player if this
parameter is true.
autoplay The video will be played back automatically when the
page or the player are loaded.
352 Keyboard shortcuts
http://pro.magix.com
Keyboard shortcuts
Tip: In Windows, keyboard settings are changed using the Alt + Shift key
combination. Those who often use keyboard shortcuts can accidentally
change their keyboard settings, so that they keys don't correspond to the
pictured symbols. To prevent this, you can remove the check mark found by
going to "Control panel" > "Regional and language options" > "Languages" tab
> "Details" > "Keyboard" > "Change keyboard combination" under "Change
input layout".
Playback functions
Start/stop Space bar
Increase playback speed in stages L
Shift + L
Stop playback K
Reduce playback speed in stages until
negative direction
J
Shift + J
Accelerate playback speed in positive
direction
Shift + left arrow
Accelerate playback speed in negative
direction
Shift + right arrow
Stop (playback marker is stopped at the
current position)
K
Restart beginning at playback marker Back
Playback marker back to the beginning Home
Playback marker to end End
1 frame back Left arrow
1 frame forward Right arrow
5 frames back Ctrl + left arrow
5 frames forward Ctrl + right arrow
Set project marker Ctrl + enter
Play from range start to range end #
Playback at current frame +
Keyboard shortcuts 353
http://pro.magix.com
Monitors
Program monitor
Other resolution Alt + G
Adjust video monitor to movie settings Ctrl + G
Adjust video monitor to selected video Ctrl + Shift + G
Show/hide playing time Alt + I
Time background transparent Ctrl + Alt + I
Anaglyph view Ctrl + .
View partially interlaced Alt + .
Standard (2D) .
Side-by-side display Shift + .
Source monitor
Comparison image: selected object without
effects
Alt + Shift + ,
Comparison image: selected object Alt + ,
Comparison image: in front of selected
object
,
Comparison image: behind selected object Ctrl + Shift + ,
Comparison image: select object Ctrl + ,
Remove comparison image Shift + ,
Arranger view
Zoom in Ctrl + up arrow / Ctrl + mousewheel
up
Reduce section Ctrl + down arrow / Ctrl +
mousewheel down
Play movie fullscreen Alt + Enter
Show/hide movie overview in the video
monitor
Shift + A
Optimize movie view Ctrl + F
Zoom 1 frame / 5 frames Alt + 1/2
Zoom 1s / 10s / 1min Alt + 3/4/5
Zoom 10 min Ctrl + Alt + 6
Zoom to selected range Alt + F
Zoom to complete movie length F
Preview rendering Ctrl + R
354 Keyboard shortcuts
http://pro.magix.com
Move view
To next object edge Alt + W
To previous object edge Alt + Q
To movie start Home
To movie end end cap
To beginning of range Ctrl + Home
To end of range Ctrl+End.
Page to right/left Page Up/Down
Grid unit to right/left Ctrl+PgDn/PgUp
To project markers 1-10 Ctrl + 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/0
To next/
previous project marker
Ctrl + Shift + PgDn/PgUp
To next/
previous scene marker
Shift + PgDn/PgUp
To next/
previous chapter marker
Alt + PgDn/PgUp
To next/previous ad marker Ctrl + Shift + W
Alt + Shift + W
Go to previous/next marker Q/W
Go to next empty range >
Go to previous empty range Shift + >
To next/previously selected object Shift + W
Shift + Q
Mouse modes
Mouse mode for individual objects 6
All tracks mouse mode 7
Single track mouse mode 8
Curve mode 9
Object stretch mode 0
Preview audio objects Alt + 6
Context help Alt + F1
Keyboard shortcuts 355
http://pro.magix.com
File menu
New project Ctrl + N
Open project Ctrl + O
Save project Ctrl + S
Save project as... Shift + S
Project folder -> Clean up project folder Alt + Shift + X
Record audio/images/video... R
Import edit list (EDL)... Ctrl + D
Export to device... H
Batch conversion... S
Burn CD/DVD -> Manually compile files... Ctrl + B
Clean-up wizard Ctrl + Shift + Y
Export to device H
Load backup project Ctrl + Shift + O
Exit Alt + F4
Manage movies
New Ctrl + Alt + N
Remove from project Ctrl + F4
Export Ctrl + Alt + L
Export movie
Export as AVI Ctrl + Alt + A
Export as DV AVI Ctrl + Alt+ D
Export movie as an MPEG Ctrl + Alt + P
Video as MAGIX video Ctrl + Alt + M
Video as QuickTime movie Ctrl + Alt + Q
Uncompressed movie Ctrl + Alt + U
Video as MotionJPEG-AVI Ctrl + Alt + O
Movie as a series of individual frames Ctrl + Alt + E
Windows Media Export Ctrl + Alt + V
Video as MPEG 4 video Ctrl + Alt + G
Audio as wave Ctrl + Alt + W
Export as transition Ctrl + Alt + T
Single frame as BMP file Ctrl + Alt + B
Single frame as JPEG Ctrl + Alt + J
Animated GIF Ctrl + Alt + F
Export movie information as EDL Alt + D
356 Keyboard shortcuts
http://pro.magix.com
Backup copy
Copy project and media into folder Alt + S
Copy movie and media into folder Shift + R
Settings
Movie E
Program Y
Keyboard shortcuts Ctrl + Shift + U
Preview rendering Alt + R
Edit menu
Back Ctrl + Z
Restore Ctrl + Y
Cut objects Ctrl + X
Copy objects Ctrl + C
Insert objects Ctrl + V
Duplicate objects D
Delete objects Del
Select all objects Ctrl + A
Save object groups Ctrl + Alt + Shift + F
Cut
Cut scene T
Remove scene start Z
Remove scene end U
Remove scene Ctrl + Del
Split movie Alt + Y
Musical cut adjustment Ctrl + Shift + M
Edit range
Cut range Shift + Del; Alt + X
Copy range Alt + C
Delete range Alt + Del
Insert range Alt + V
Extract range Shift + X
Insert empty space into selected range C
Group G
Ungroup Shift + G
Keyboard shortcuts 357
http://pro.magix.com
Wizards
Slideshow Maker Ctrl + M
Soundtrack Maker Ctrl + Shift + S
Mixdown audio Shift + D
Audio and video mixdown Shift + M
Start preview rendering Ctrl+R
Set snap point Ctrl + P
Markers
Set project marker Ctrl + Enter
Set chapter markers Shift + Enter
Set chapter markers automatically Alt + Shift + Enter
Delete chapter markers Ctrl + Shift + Enter
Delete all chapter markers Ctrl + Alt + Enter
Set range start I
Set range end O
Jump to range start Shift + I
Jump to range end Shift + O
Select range above blank space X
Move view see "Move view" (view page 354)
Search for gaps Ctrl + Shift + C
Mute audio track Alt + Shift + M
Effects menu
Movie effects settings Ctrl + Shift + H
Video object effects
Scene recognition Shift + Z
Image stabilization Ctrl + L
Edit with MAGIX Photo Designer Alt + Shift + D
Video effects
Brightness/contrast Alt + Shift + H
Color Alt + Shift + F
Color correction Alt + Shift + C
Sharpness Ctrl + Alt + S
Video effects plug-ins Ctrl + Shift + P
Video mix effects Ctrl + Alt + X
358 Keyboard shortcuts
http://pro.magix.com
Movement effects
Position/size Alt + Shift + I
Section Alt + Shift + P
Camera/zoom Ctrl + Alt + Z
Rotation/mirror Alt + Shift + R
Audio object effects
Normalize Alt + N
Volume reduction Alt + L
Audio cleaning Alt + A
Echo/reverb Shift + H
Timestretch/resample Ctrl + Q
Load audio effects Ctrl + +
Save audio effects Shift + +
Reset audio effects Ctrl + Alt + +
BPM wizard Alt + Shift + K
Edit wave files externally Alt + Z
Volume curve Ctrl + Shift + V
Title effects
Title editor Ctrl + T
Load title effects Alt + T
Save title effects Ctrl + Shift + T
Effects libraries
Audio and video effects Ctrl + Shift + E
Transition effects Ctrl + Shift + B
Title effects Alt + Shift + L
Windows menu
Edit trimmer N
Object trimmer Shift + N
Mixer M
Master audio effects rack B
Program monitor Shift + V
Media Pool Shift + P
Project folder Shift + B
Activate next window Tab
Reset window arrangement F9
Display settings Alt + Shift + V
Keyboard shortcuts 359
http://pro.magix.com
Film overview Shift + A
Optimize movie view Ctrl + F
Zoom horizontally/vertically see "Arranger view (view page
353)"
Help menu
Help F1
Context help Alt + F1
Display tooltips Ctrl + Shift + F1
About MAGIX Video Pro X4 Alt + Shift + F1
Edit keyboard shortcut
In this dialog you can specify keyboard shortcuts for all menu function of
MAGIX Video Pro X4. This allows you to adapt existing shortcuts to your
requirements or to add new ones.
The settings are automatically saved in a file upon closing the program, i.e.
they will be available the next time the program is used.
The display of the entire menu tree is the key function of MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Add keyboard shortcut
To add a keyboard shortcut, proceed as follows:
Look for the required menu point and select it with a simple mouse click.
Under "Current menu point" the currently selected menu point will be
displayed.
Then, click on the "New keyboard shortcut" field.
Type in the keyboard shortcut. You can also use combinations of any key with
"Shift", "Alt", and "Ctrl".
Then click on "Assign shortcut". If the shortcut should already have been
assigned a corresponding warning will be displayed.
Note! Please do not use the space bar, "Esc", or "Insert" key ("0" in the
number block), since the functions of these keys are permanently assigned in
MAGIX Video Pro X4 and can not be changed.
360 Keyboard shortcuts
http://pro.magix.com
Keyboard shortcut list
Reset: Activates all preset shortcuts again.
Load: Previously saved shortcuts are loaded and activated again.
Tip: MAGIX Video Pro X4 offers additional presets for those switching from
other programs. These settings make it considerably easier to switch to MAGIX
Video Pro X4.
If you have used MAGIX Video Pro X3 and want to use its keyboard shortcuts,
load Video_Pro_X3.ssc.
Warning: The current settings will be overwritten during loading! Save your
current keyboard shortcuts in advance if you would like to keep them.
Save: The current keyboard shortcuts can be saved after naming the file
appropriately.
List: This button opens a window where a complete list of current keyboard
shortcuts appears. The included Copy button can be used to copy this list to
the Windows clipboard and then edit and print it using a text editor.
Activate codecs 361
http://pro.magix.com
Activate codecs
You may activate encoders/decoders for various file formats as required. The
corresponding activation dialog will appear automatically when the codec is
used for the first time, e.g. when a DVD is burned and the MPEG-2 codec is
used.
Why does it have to be "activated"?
To import (decode) or export (encode) certain video and audio formats, you will
require a specific codec to be able to read in and export these formats. As
soon as the corresponding decoder or encoder is required, MAGIX Video Pro
X3 will notify you and ask you if you would like to activate it. Activation is only
possible for a valid registered version of MAGIX Video Pro X3. This is a copy
protection mechanism which ensures that only legal owners of the software
may use it completely.
Free activation of codecs
To be able to use MPEG-2, MPEG-4, Dolby Digital stereo import, and
Dolby Digital 5.1, you will have to activate the codecs for free.
Activation can be done online via telephone or via post/fax. The quickest and
easiest way to order an activation code is via the Internet.
Order activation code online
Click on "Order online..." (Field 1). MAGIX Video Pro X4 will automatically
contact the MAGIX server and load the corresponding codec.
Note: Activation of the codec checks the registration data as required.
Activation of the codec only functions if your version of the program has
already been registered in your name. If you haven't registered MAGIX Video
Pro X4, then you can do this at any time.
If your computer has no Internet access, you have the following options for
activation:
Order activation code in MAGIX Service Center
Use this option to conduct activation from a different computer which has
Internet access.
362 Activate codecs
http://pro.magix.com
Order activation code via post/fax
After clicking on "Order via post/fax" (field 2), your user code will appear. This
automatically assigns your personal activation code to your PC. Click on
"Continue to order form" to transfer your user code automatically to the
post/fax form. Now send the completed form as a print out to the address/fax
no. mentioned. Your activation code will be sent to you in just a few days via
post or fax. It can also be sent by mail if an email address is stated.
Enter activation code
After receiving your personal activation code, use the export or burn function
to reopen the activation dialog for the corresponding file format. Type or copy
the activation code into the input field in the dialog and click on "Activate...".
Fee-based DVCPRO and AVC-Intra activation
To use DVCPRO and AVC-Intra in MAGIX Video Pro X4, they must first be
activated. This involves a fee-based activation process.
Order activation code online
Click on "Order online..." (Field 1). The web browser will open for you to
register MAGIX Video Pro X4 first (if you have not already done so). You will
then be forwarded to a website where you can request the corresponding
activation.
If your computer has no Internet access, then you have the following options
for activation:
Order activation code in MAGIX Service Center
Use this option to conduct activation from a different computer which has
Internet access.
Order activation code via post/fax
After clicking on "Order via post/fax" (field 2) your user code will appear. This
automatically assigns your personal activation code to your PC. Click on
"Continue to order form" to transfer your user code automatically to the
post/fax form. Now send the completed form as a printout to the address/fax
no. mentioned. Once payment has been processed successfully, your
activation code will be sent to you in the post/via fax in just a few days.
Optionally, it can also be sent by email if an email address is stated.
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 363
http://pro.magix.com
Enter activation code
After receiving your personal activation code use the export or burn function to
reopen the activation dialog for the corresponding file format. Type or copy the
activation code into the input field in the dialog and click on "Activate...".
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Video Editing on the PC
Digital video processing with the PC is comparable to audio processing. The
analog medium that is video must first be digitized before it can be processed
by the computer.
Digital video processing functions quite similar to recording via a sound card.
The signal flow is measured in very short, regular intervals, and the values
resulting from it can then be processed by the computer. The accuracy of each
individual measurement results in the resolution, and the frequency of the
measurements results in the frame rate. The more precise and frequent the
signal is measured, the higher the quality of the digitized video, but also the
higher demands on the capture performance and the required storage space.
The Windows standard format for video files is AVI (audio and video
Interleaved).
Digitizing video adopts either the camera or the graphics card, a TV card (e.g.
Miro PCTV), or a video card (e.g. Fast AV Master). However, video handling
makes much higher demands upon the hardware if good image quality is
required. In order to be able to reasonably process video files on today’s PCs,
they must be compressed. Digital audio, on the other hand only uses
compression for saving storage space.
MPEG Compression
MPEG means "Moving Picture Experts Group" and defines a workgroup which
cooperates with the International Standards Organization (ISO) as well as the
international Electro Technical Commission (ETC) to develop standards for
video and audio coding.
Generally, the graphic data rate of the digital video standard is 167 megabits
per second, which, when not compressed, requires a far higher storage
capacity than a DVD can offer. A one-sided DVD 5 with 4.7 GB storage
364 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
http://pro.magix.com
capacity is enough for 4 Minutes. For this reason, the available pictorial
material must be effectively compressed – a function which is achieved with
the MPEG procedure.
This procedure is based on the simple fact that up to 96% of digital video data
consists of repetition and can be compressed without visible degradation of
the pictorial quality.
Each MPEG compression is, however, a data reduction and as such
connected with information loss. If the video consists of very extensive details,
or if the content changes very fast, then the picture may blur (dependent on
the strength of the compression and the quality of the encoder).
Errors can also result from so-called compression artifacts such as small color
defects or images that are too dark.
At average compression rates under 3 megabits per second it is probable that
you will notice reduced quality. At rates around 6 megabit per second the
degradation in quality becomes almost invisible.
General notes on AVI videos
The AVI format (Audio Video Interleaved) isn't actually a proper video format!
Rather, it is a so-called "container", where the conventions for transferring
audio and video files to the program are only loosely defined. The codec
(coder/decoder) actually defines what storage format is used. A codec
compresses audio/video data into its own unique format which can only be
read by the codec itself and is decoded when the film is played.
In concrete terms, a computer-generated AVI file can only be loaded by and
played on a different computer if the same codec is installed on it.
Many codecs (e.g. Intel Indeo® video) have now become standard components
of the Windows™ installation. Others like the popular DivX codec are not
standard. If you are generating an AVI file for future play on another computer
using one of these codecs, you should first install this codec on the other PC.
The best method available is to copy the codec installer to your export
directory and burn it every time you create a video disc (slideshow disc) for
play on computers.
You may encounter some problems when using older video editing cards with
codecs which only function with the card’s hardware. Such AVIs can only be
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 365
http://pro.magix.com
used on the computer which was used to create them. Try to avoid using this
kind of codec.
Overview of the different disc types
MAGIX Video Pro X4 supports numerous disc types, and these depend on
whether you want to burn a movie or slideshow and which disc type you are
using (CD, DVD, or Blu-ray Disc), or the type of playback device or quality
required.
The table below will explain which disc types are best for different cases, the
differences in quality, and how much storage space each format requires.
More detailed information, consult the chapters concerning the individual disc
types.
Disc type Data carrier Menu Quality Length (optimal
quality)
DVD DVD Yes *** 98 min.
Blu-Ray Disc
(view page
367)
Blu-Ray Disc Yes ***** 110 min.
AVCHD (view
page 367)
DVD/Blu-ray
Disc
Yes ***** 30 min./DVD
160 min./Blu-ray Disc
Multi Disc CD/DVD Yes **** 45 min./DVD
7min/CD
* The set duration for some DVD players may be determined by this table.
Depending on the original size (file size of the images) the number of images
that fit on a blank CD or DVD differs.
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)
Quality
Featuring a resolution of 720 x 576 (PAL) and encoded with MPEG-2, 25
frames per second provides very good results.
Writable data storage formats
The recordable DVD market is currently split into three types: "DVD-RAM",
"DVD+RW", and "DVD-RW".
DVD-R/+R: This medium may only be written to once. The DVD-R may be
specified with file structures for DVD video, DVD audio, or DVD-ROM.
366 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
http://pro.magix.com
DVD +RW: +RW drives allow re-writable DVDs to be created which may be
read by almost any commercial DVD-ROM or DVD player. The companies
involved are mainly Philips, Sony, HEWLETT PACKARD (as well as Ricoh,
Yamaha and Mitsubishi).
DVD-RW: This is a write/erase DVD technology promoted by Pioneer and
Sharp. This format was developed by the Pioneer company and should be
compatible with existing DVD players.
DVD-RAM: DVD-RAM technology is based on either Phase Change, MOs, or
hard disks, etc. and is now almost 100% incompatible with all available
players.
Due to the small storage capacity and incompatibility with DVD players, setting
on this standard is not recommended.
Note: MAGIX Video Pro X4 supports DVD±R and DVD±RW, but not DVD-RAM.
Blank discs: Single-sided recordable blank discs featuring a capacity of 4.7
GB and a duration of approx. 2 hours.
Copy Protection
Macrovision (APS): The movie industry claims that even DVD-ROM drives and
decoders or diagram cards with composite outputs or s-video outputs must
support the Macrovision analog copy protection (APS). Only some older DVD
players do not possess APS.
APS adds additional signals to a DVD’s stored graphical data. The data is
almost unchanged. These supplementary signals disturb the synchronization
and the automatic recording regulation of most video recorders to prevent
recording of the video. They are not noticeable on the television or the monitor,
however.
Content Scrambling System (CSS): CSS prevents saving and duplication of
DVD video tracks to hard disk. The VOB streams of DVDs without CSS can
otherwise (like other video files) be loaded via the Import Video button
There are further types of copy protection besides APS and CSS which ensure
that retail DVDs cannot be copied without distortion
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 367
http://pro.magix.com
miniDVD
The miniDVD is nothing more than the DVD data format burned onto a CD-
ROM. Thus the MPEG-2 encoder and all other specifications of the DVD data
format are used, and only the data carriers are different. Because the CD-ROM
can only save about a sixth of the quantity of data a DVD can hold, the
capacity of a miniDVD is accordingly limited to approx. 20 minutes of movie.
MiniDVDs are particularly suitable for playing on the computer. For stand-alone
devices they must be tested on an individual basis as to whether the device
can handle the DVD format on a CD-ROM.
AVCHD disc
Use this format to create a high-resolution video. You can burn Blu-ray (BD-
R/RE) blanks as well as conventional DVD±R/RWs. In contrast to Blu-ray Discs
(view page 367), MPEG-4/AVC codec (view page 371) is applied as the video
format, which requires less memory at a comparable image quality.
Compatibility
AVCHD disc on Blu-ray blank: Since this is a BD-conformant format, the disc
created can be played back in any conventional Blu-ray player. Playback
problems can almost always be traced to incompatibilities between Blu-ray
blanks and Blu-ray players. In this case, consult the instructions for your Blu-
ray player or ask the manufacturer which blanks are compatible with the
device.
AVCHD disc on DVD blank: The DVDs created with AVCHD video are not
supported by all Blu-ray players. The behavior of the devices is quite different.
Normal DVD players cannot replay AVCHD discs, since the AVC format is not
supported.
Blu-ray Disc
Since early 2008, Blu-ray Discs are viewed as successors to DVDs and offer
especially high storage capacity of up to 27 GB in a single layer (double-layer
up to 54 GB) with very few write errors.
The term Blu-ray Disc comes from the blue color of the laser. Because a color
cannot be registered as a trademark, the letter "e" was removed from the word
"blue".
The high storage capacity of the Blu-ray Disc suits high definition videos and
slideshows in high quality perfectly, since these are characterized by large file
sizes (depending on material approximately 40 MB/sec) and very high memory
use. The MPEG-2 codec is used to create video.
368 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
http://pro.magix.com
Companies that were involved in developing Blu-ray technology have united
themselves into the Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA).
Blu-ray Discs come in three varieties:
Only readable BD ROM (comparable to DVD video),
rewritable BD-RE (comparable to DVD±RW or DVD-RAM),
and as a disc that can be written to only once BD-R (comparable to DVD±R).
Super Video CD (SVCD)
The Super Video CD (SVCD) is a technological advancement of the video CD.
SVCDs are also like VCD-specified CD-ROMs which can be played using either
a Super Video CD player (connected to the television), or directly with the CD-
ROM drive of a computer. Many DVD players can also play SVCDs. MPEG-2
and the increase of the data transfer rate makes it hard to tell videos from
videos in DVD quality apart.
Resolution: SVCDs use the better MPEG-2 encoder in a standardized
resolution of 480 x 576 (PAL). The MPEG-2 format offers a maximum
resolution of up to 720 x 576 points and improved compression methods
characterized by excellent image definition and homogeneity.
Hard disk capacity: An average 90-minute movie must be spread across 3
CDs. On one SVCD you can get about 30 minutes of good-quality movie.
Encoder setting: Compared to the VCD with 1.3, the data transfer rate is
doubled to 2.6 Mbit/s.
MPEG-2 format introduces the so-called variable bit rate (VBR). In contrast to
the constant bit rate (CBR) of the MPEG-1 encoders, this encoder has the
option of using more bits for movement-intensive sections, as well as saving
bits if picture content remains the same.
Video CD (VCD)
Video CDs are specific CD-ROMs for storing videos in certain forms.
Compression takes place using the MPEG-1 codec. VCDs can be played on
either a video CD player attached to a television or directly via the computer's
CD-ROM drive. Most DVD players can play VCDs.
Resolution: VCDs can play movies with a maximum resolution of 352 x 288
pixels (PAL) or 352 x 240 (NTSC) at 25 pictures per second. The resolution of a
VHS cassette offers for instance 300 x 360 pixels. More important than the
resolution is the use of a good MPEG-1 encoder. Since video images
constantly change, errors cannot always be perceived by the viewer.
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage 369
http://pro.magix.com
Hard disk capacity: A VCD can store about 70 minutes of video. A typical
motion picture must therefore be stored on two VCDs. In order to get as much
video data on a normal CD as possible, one must forego correction information
on VCD/SVCD formats within the individual sectors (sub-ranges) of a CD. You
can therefore fit 720 MB of video data on a 650 MB blank CD. Due to
improved burning and scanning technology it is now possible to burn up to
985 MB video data on a 99min blank CD.
Encoder settings: Normally the video CD data is played at a data rate of 1150
kBits video and 224 kBits audio. By increasing the video bit rate to 3000kBits
you can get the same resolution and an better-quality audio bit rate. Movement
artifacts disappear almost completely at approx. 2000 kBits with the picture
appearing a little less sharp. This pre-supposes, however, that the player can
also play back such a bit rate. The fact that many DVD players can handle an
increased data rate is due to well written player software.
Experiment with higher data rates: If you do not need the full running time of
the VCD, then you can experiment with space to improve the quality of the
video!
JPEG disc
The "JPEG disc" is a special case for slideshows. No video file is created to be
burned, but rather every photo in the disc project is exported individually with
effects and burned to CD or DVD. Many modern DVD players can play JPEG
files directly.
If a project contains several slideshows, a subfolder will be created for each
one, and the corresponding images will be placed into each one. This means
that there are no menus, no sound, no animated effects or transitions –
although it does offer the best possible quality available for playback on TV.
This means that there are no menus, sounds, animated effects or transitions, it
does, however, offer the best possible quality available for TV playback.
Slideshow disc
All slideshow image and audio files will be burned onto CD or DVD, together
with any effect settings and the MAGIX Media Manager CDR player program. A
MAGIX Media Manager CD is designed especially for photo projects
(slideshows).
The original photos are burned onto CD; Ideal for backing up valuable
recordings. During playback on your PC, the highest possible picture quality is
made possible. The following photo effects can be played by Media Manager.
Brightness, contrast, gamma
370 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
http://pro.magix.com
Cropping and rotation
Title text (without text effects)
If your project uses more effects, they won’t be visible on the Media Manager
CD. A VCD or DVD is more suitable for such projects.
The MAGIX Media Manager CDR ensures that the CD-ROM can be played
back on any Windows PC regardless of the software installed. The disc will
automatically begin playing the slideshow after the CD-ROM has been inserted
into the drive, provided the auto-play feature is enabled on your PC. To enable
the auto-play feature on your PC, select the "Auto Insert Notification" option for
your CD-ROM drive from the Windows Control Panel.
If deactivated, you can also start your CD-ROM slideshow manually:
1. Place your home-burned CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
2. Open Explorer and click on the drive letter of the CD-ROM drive (usually
D:\).
3. Double-click "MediaManager.exe" to start the MAGIX Media Manager CDR.
4. In the Explorer window of MAGIX Media Manager CDR, open the slideshow
playlist file ending with *.PLR and start the slideshow.
Additional information can be found in the help feature of MAGIX Media
Manager CDR (F1 key).
WMV HD (Windows Media High Definition Disc)
WMV WMV HD (Windows Media High Definition Disc) is a type of disc
optimized for playback of slideshows on PC. The movies are converted into
high-resolution Windows Media 9 format and a menu is added, like with DVDs.
You must have Windows Media Player 9 or higher installed on your PC.
Video encoding will be preset for HDTV resolution (1280 x 720, also known as
"720p"). To select different resolutions, click on the button “Encoder settings”
and in “Presets” choose the following:
Standard PAL (720x576) or NTSC (720 x 480)
Standard PC resolutions (1024 x 768 or 1280 x 1024)
HDTV 720p (1280x720) or 1080i (1920x1080)
MPEG-4 encoder settings 371
http://pro.magix.com
Multi Disc
A multidisc is a combination of different disc formats on one DVD. It consists of
3 parts and offers the following advantages:
Maximum quality when played on a PC with WMV HD (Windows Media High
Definition Disc)
Fully compatible with DVD players due to a DVD part (Digital Versatile Disc)
(view page 365)
Greatest possible safety as a data backup of the project is added (burn option
(view page 234)).
Backup disc
Use this option to compile all movies in the current disc project, including all
connected media and burn them to disc.
Even larger projects can be burned straight to disc. The project, if necessary,
will be split up and burned automatically to multiple discs. A restore program
which is burned to the first disc of such a backup, guarantees easy re-
recording of the backup.
MPEG-4 encoder settings
Behind MPEG-4, you'll find a highly complex "academic" standard that
operates and is supported variably according to make.
Tip
: First, check if there is a suitable preset in the export dialog for your
purposes. Before changes are made in "Advanced settings", the effects and
interplay of the different parameters should be familiar.
The "Advanced settings" are divided into "Video", "Audio", and "Multiplexer".
Under "Video", there is a choice between "MPEG-4 (view page 372)" (H.263)
and "AVC/H.264 (view page 377)". Depending on the purpose of application of
the material to be exported, both of these encoder settings can be selected for
compressing the video material. It is important in this case to know how the
material will be played back.
Under "Audio", there is a choice between "AMR (view page 383)" and "AC
(view page 384)". The AMR format is more suitable for mobile devices that
don't necessarily require high playback quality. ACC is more flexible, on the
other hand, but it is supported by fewer mobile devices.
372 MPEG-4 encoder settings
http://pro.magix.com
For material that is not exactly specific, encoder qualities recommend AVC
image and AAC sound, since these encoders are equally suitable for all source
material.
The option "Export as website" also creates an HTML page in an integrated
Flash player that can play back the video created. Read the topic "Embed
Flash videos into your own web site (view page 350)".
MPEG-4
The MPEG-4 (H.263) codec is especially useful for video material with little or
only slower movements.
Generic
MPEG-4 preset
Different presets located within the encoder.
(A)SP@L0-L5: (Advanced) Simple Profile in Level 0-5
(Q)CIF (Common Intermediate Format): CIF is a video format produced as
soon as 1990 with the video compression format H.261. At that time, the
format was used for video telephone conferences.
The "Q" in QCIF stands for "Quarter", and since resolution is halved in terms of
height and width compared to CIF, the entire size is only a quarter of CIF.
QCIF was popular with mobile telephone manufacturers, since the resolution of
176 x 144 pixels was sensible for the first affordable SmartPhones (144 x 176).
(Half)D1: D1 corresponds with MPEG-2 DVD. HalfD1 has exactly half of the
entire number of pixels, meaning that the pixel number of the height and
weight is 2/3 of D1.
720p: Video stream with a resolution of 1280 x 720p (progressive).
Apple iPod: Apple iPod-compatible stream.
Sony PSP: Sony PSP-compatibler stream.
Profile/Level
So that profile and level are conformant with the other settings, pay attention to
the minimum and maximum values in the following tables.
MPEG-4 encoder settings 373
http://pro.magix.com
Note! In case the settings are not included in this information, problems playing
back the encoded videos can lead to problems.
Table 1: The levels of the MPEG-4 simple profile (SP)
Level Typical
visual
session
size
Max.
numbe
r of
objects
Maximum
number
objects per
type
Max.
unique
quant.
tables
Max. VMV buffer
size
(MB)
L0 QCIF 1 1 x simple 1 198
L1 QCIF 4 4 x simple 1 198
L2 CIF 4 4 x simple 1 792
L3 CIF 4 4 x simple 1 792
Continuation of table 1
Level Max.
VCV
buffer
size (MB)
VCV
decode
r rate
(MB/s)
Max. total
VBV
buffer size
(units of
16384
bits)
Max. VOL
VBV
buffer size
(units of
16384
bits)
Max.
video
packet
length
(bits)
Max.
bitrate
(kbit/s)
L0 99 1485 10 10 2048 64
L1 99 1485 10 10 2048 64
L2 396 5940 40 40 4096 128
L3 396 11880 40 40 8192 384
Table 2: The levels of the MPEG-4 advanced simple profile
(ASP)
Level Typical
visual
session
size
Max.
numbe
r of
objects
Max.
number
per type
Max.
uniqu
e
quant.
tables
Max.
VMV
buffe
r size
(MB)
Max.
VCV
buffe
r size
(MB)
VCV
decoder
rate
(MB/s)
L0 176x144 1 1x AS or
simple
1 297 99 2970
L1 176x144 4 4x AS or
simple
1 297 99 2970
L2 352x288 4 4x AS or
simple
1 1188 396 5940
L3 352x288 4 4x AS or
simple
1 1188 396 11880
374 MPEG-4 encoder settings
http://pro.magix.com
L4 352x576 4 4x AS or
simple
1 2376 792 23760
L5 720x576 4 4x AS or
simple
1 4860 1620 48600
Continuation of table 2
Level Max.
percentage
of intra
MBs with
AC
prediction
in VCV
buffer
Max total
VBV
buffer size
(units of
16384 bit
s)
Max. VOL
VBV
buffer size
(units of
16384 bit
s)
Max.
video
packet
length
(bits)
Max.
bitrate
(kbit/s)
L0 100 10 10 2048 128
L1 100 10 10 2048 128
L2 100 40 40 4096 384
L3 100 40 40 4096 768
L4 50 80 80 8192 3000
L5 25 112 112 16384 8000
Picture type
"Picture type" specifies which parts of a frame should be used as the basis for
the encoding:
Frame: A frame is a single image from a video sequence, also called a full
image.
Field: A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame. Read more
about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 395)".
Field order
Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Field" is selected for
"Picture type".
In case of interlaced streams, the half-image sequence is set. Read more
about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 395)".
MPEG-4 encoder settings 375
http://pro.magix.com
Pulldown
Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Frame" or "MBAFF" (only
for AVC/H.264)" is selected for "Picture type".
In normal cases, an image playback rate of 24 (or 23.976) frames per second
is use; the NTSC system however requires 30 (or 29.97) frames/s, and there is
a special algorithm for converting the video's frame rate. For compilations or
test purposes, switch this option to "No". In normal cases, the setting can be
set to "Auto".
Slice count
A frame can be divided into multiple slices for encoding. Specify the maximum
number of slices are permitted. If set to "0", then the number will be
determined automatically.
Bit rate control
The bit rate indicates how much data per second is saved in the video
(playback speed). This makes the bit rate the deciding parameter for the video
to be encoded.
Mode
Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate should only be used if the device used
to play the video supports constant bit rates.
Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies. For faster movements in the video, the bit
rate increases, and for still images or slow pans, a lower bit rate is sufficient for
creating the video in constant quality.
Constant quality: Similar to the "Variable bit rate" mode, the bit rate varies
according to the video material. The quality depends on the selected profile
and can be changed.
Constant quantizer: In this mode, a fixed colour quantization is used for the
macro blocks. Under Advanced settings, a value between 1 and 32 can be set
independent of the respective frame (I-Frame (view page 395), P-Frame, or B-
Frame (view page 396)). The higher the value, the stronger the quantization:
small values produce qualitatively high-quality images and the data rate
increases, and larger values produce a reduction in data, but the quality
suffers.
Bit rate (Bits/s)
In "Constant bit rate" mode: Exactly those values entered are applied to be
able to calculate the size of the video precisely.
376 MPEG-4 encoder settings
http://pro.magix.com
In "Variable bit rate" mode: The values entered here are applied to the video
as an average as a guideline. The size of the video to be exported can only be
approximated.
Max. rate
This is the maximum bit rate that should be present in the video stream, i.e.
maximum number of bits that may be transferred to the decoder.
Note: This option is only available in "Variable bit rate" mode.
VBV buf. size
VBV is the abbreviation for "Video rate buffer verifier definition" and the size of
the buffer (storage area) that is applied to the encoding.
The larger the buffer is, the better the results will be, but the processing will
also take much longer. The smaller the buffer is, the more parallel processing
can take place at the same time in RAM.
Pixel aspect ratio
Specifies the page ratio of the individual image points (pixels).
Meaning: Different television norms and the standard pixel ratio. Select a
setting and the results are displayed as "X" and "Y".
X/Y: The actual pixel ratio. If under "Meaning" the setting "Custom" is selected,
then a custom ratio can be set.
GOP structure
Max key interval
Determines the maximum GOP (view page 394) length. High values mean
improved compression. Lower values create stronger security protection and
enable improved access to individual frames for processing the video.
B-frames count
The number of B-Frames (view page 396). Several applications, e.g. video
conferences, require a setting of "0" for this, i.e. no B-Frames, in order to
enable the shortest possible reaction times for transfer.
MPEG-4 encoder settings 377
http://pro.magix.com
Scene change detection
If this option is activated the scenes will be detected during encoding, thus
allowing you to insert an I frame (view page 395) after a scene change.
Input info
Information about the incoming video stream is displayed here during live
recordings.
Statistics
Information about the encoder activity is displayed here during live recordings.
MPEG-4 H.264
The MPEG-4 H.264/AVC codec is suitable for all types of material; however, it
requires relatively higher CPU power for later decoding.
In the advanced encoder settings of the AVC encoder the "Generic" options in
"Main Settings" are mainly interesting.
The AVC preset and video format can be adjusted here. For instance, if DVD
quality is desired you should select "DVD". The video format should be
selected specific to the country so that the material can be played on the
devices most commonly available in these countries. For instance, you should
select PAL for Germany, SECAM for France and NTSC for the US.
MVC: Multiview Video Coding (MVC) is an addition for stereoscopic
applications. Activate it in order to export MVC files.
2-pass: The video to be exported will be encoded twice. The first run-through
serves to calculate the streaming rate for each section (for video this is per
frame). The second run-through is when the actual video is created with the
streaming rates that were calculated in the first run-through. The result is
improved image quality, but with nearly doubled encoding times.
Smart Render: Smart Rendering significantly reduces encoding times for
AVCHD files. When creating AVCHD files, only those portions of the movie are
encoded anew which were changed in the program (e. g. with video cleaning
or effects). The AVCHD files in the movie must have the same format, meaning
bit rate (variable or constant), image resolution and format must match.
378 MPEG-4 encoder settings
http://pro.magix.com
Note: If your graphics card also supports conversion on the card - hardware
acceleration, you will find the option to activate OpenCL, Quick Sync or CUDA
(view page 239), depending on what is supported by your graphics card, under
"Export settings > Advanced".
Ask your graphics card manufacturer whether your graphics card supports
hardware acceleration and make sure that all the necessary drivers are
installed.
Generic
AVC preset
This is where the actual video stream that will be exported is selected.
Baseline: According to ISO/ICE 11172-1/2 standard
CIF: Corresponds with MPEG-1 VideoCD
Main: Corresponds with ISO/ICE 13818-1/2 standard
SVCD: Corresponds with MPEG-2 Super VideoCD
D1: Corresponds with MPEG-2 DVD
High: HIGH profile 1920x1080i
DVD: DVD video
HD DVD: HD DVD video
Blu-ray: Blu-ray Disc
Blu-ray HD: Blu-ray Disc in high definition
Sony PSP: Sony PSP-compatible format
HD 1280 x 720p: High profile with a resolution 1280x720p (progressive)
HD 1440 x 1080i: High profile with a resolution of 1440 x 1080i (interlaced)
Apple iPod: Apple iPod-compatible stream.
Video format
Specifies where the video to be exported should be. The encoder optimizes
video material for the selected mode of playback.
Auto: The format from the MAGIX Video Pro X4 project.
PAL: Phase Alternating Line, or PAL, is a process for color transmission for
analog TV that is primarily used in Europe, but also in Australia, South America,
and many African and Asian countries.
The image repetition rate for PAL is 25 Hz.
NTSC: NTSC stands for "National Television Systems Committee". This is a US
institution that defined the first color carrier system for TV which is now used in
most of America and some East Asian countries.
The image repetition rate for NTSC is 29.97 Hz.
MPEG-4 encoder settings 379
http://pro.magix.com
SECAM: SECAM is a TV norm in France and eastern Europe for transferring
analog color video signal.
MAC: The MAC process (Multiplexed Analogue Components) involves TV
norms developed for satellite TV. They have also been developed for an HDTV
standard (HD-MAC).
Unspecified: This setting does not make any special optimization.
Tip: The best results are achieved with the setting "Auto", since this
automatically uses the project settings as a basis by MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Profiles
Defines which profile is applied in the AVC/H.264 stream.
Baseline profile: The basis of applications with limited computing
performance, especially for video conferences or videos on mobile telephones.
Main profile: This profile was originally intended for the broadcast industry and
for backup purposes. The process has however retreated somewhat from use,
since "High Profile" has been developed for these purposes.
High profile: This profile is used for broadcast and backup applications, and it
is also used sometimes in the HDTV industry (High Definition Television). For
example, this profile for HD-DVD and Blu-ray Discs.
Level
H.264 defines different levels. The higher the level, the larger the video's bit
rate. In this table, you can see the maximum permitted values for the
respective level in relation to the selected profile.
Level Max.
macro
blocks
per
seconds
Max.
image
size in
macro
blocks
Max. video
bit rate
(VCL) for
baseline
and main
profile
Max. video
bit
rate (VCL)
for high
profile
Examples
(Resolution /
image rate in Hz)
1 1485 99 64 80 128 x 96/30.9
1.1 3000 396 192 240 176 x 144/30.3
1.2 6000 396 384 480 320 x 240/10
1.3 11880 396 768 960 320 x 240/36
2 11880 396 2 Mbit/s 2.5 Mbit/s 320 x 240/36
2.1 19800 792 4 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s 352 x 480/30
2.2 20250 1620 4 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s 352 x 576/25.6
3 40500 1620 10 Mbit/s 12.5 Mbit/s 720 x 480/30
3.1 108000 3600 14 Mbit/s 17.5 Mbit/s 1280 x 720/30
380 MPEG-4 encoder settings
http://pro.magix.com
3.2 216000 5120 20 Mbit/s 25 Mbit/s 1280 x 1024/42.2
4 245760 8192 20 Mbit/s 25 Mbit/s 1920 x 1080/30.1
2048 x 1024/30
4.1 245760 8192 50 Mbit/s 62.5 Mbit/s 1920 x 1080/30.1
2048 x 1024/30
4.2 522240 8704 50 Mbit/s 62.5 Mbit/s 1920 x 1080/64
2048 x 1024/60
5 589824 22080 135 Mbit/s 168.75
Mbit/s
1920*1080/72.3
2048 x 1080/67.8
2560 x 1920/30.7
5.1 983040 36864 240 Mbit/s 300 Mbit/s 1920 x
1080/120.5
4096 x 2048/30
The setting "Level auto" specifies the encoder levels automatically, among
other things for the resolution of the video format specified under "AVC preset"
and the set profile bit rate. If a level is manually set in this case, then other
parameter values may not exceed the permitted maximum values.
Picture type
"Picture type" specifies which parts of a frame should be used as the basis for
the encoding:
Frame: A frame is a single image from a video sequence, also called a full
image.
Field: A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame. Read more
about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 395)".
MBAFF (macro block adaptive frame field): A macro block consists of 16 x
16 pixels. The encoder creates a "frame field" on this basis for encoding.
Field order
Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Field" is selected for
"Picture type".
In case of interlaced streams, the half-image sequence is set. Read more
about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 395)".
MPEG-4 encoder settings 381
http://pro.magix.com
Pulldown
Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Frame" or "MBAFF" (only
for AVC/H.264)" is selected for "Picture type".
In normal cases, an image playback rate of 24 (or 23.976) frames per second
is use; the NTSC system however requires 30 (or 29.97) frames/s, and there is
a special algorithm for converting the video's frame rate. For compilations or
test purposes, switch this option to "No". In normal cases, the setting can be
set to "Auto".
Slice count
A frame can be divided into multiple slices for encoding. Specify the maximum
number of slices are permitted. If set to "0", then the number will be
determined automatically.
Bit rate control
The bit rate indicates how much data per second is saved in the video
(playback speed). This makes the bit rate the deciding parameter for the video
to be encoded.
Mode
Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate should only be used if the device used
to play the video supports constant bit rates.
Constant quantizer:
Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies. For faster movements in the video, the bit
rate increases, and for still images or slow pans, a lower bit rate is sufficient for
creating the video in constant quality.
Pass
Single pass: The encoder process takes place without prior analysis. This
requires the least amount of time, however quality suffers.
Multi-pass analysis: The first encoding is carried out at the same time as the
analysis for the second encoding is calculated.
Multi-pass encode: The first encoding is carried out at the same time as the
analysis for the second encoding is calculated and updated. This produces the
best results, but the process requires the most time.
Bit rate (Bits/s)
In "Constant bit rate" mode: Exactly those values entered are applied to be
able to calculate the size of the video precisely.
382 MPEG-4 encoder settings
http://pro.magix.com
In "Variable bit rate" mode: The values entered here are applied to the video
as an average as a guideline. The size of the video to be exported can only be
approximated.
HSS rate
This is the maximum bit rate that should be present in the video stream, i.e.
maximum number of bits that may be transferred to the decoder.
Note: This option is only available in "Variable bit rate" mode.
CPB size
This sets the size of the "coded picture buffer“ in bits. This is the buffer where
the encoding is carried out. The larger the buffer is, the better the results will
be, but the processing will also take much longer.
Aspect ratio
In the film industry, this is an indication of the ratio between width and height of
a rectangle, monitor, or screen.
There are 3 different sizes available:
Picture Aspect Ratio (also Display Aspect Ratio, DAR): This indicates the
desired aspect ratio of the video to be exported. Here are some examples of
typical aspect ratios: at home 4:3, 16:9 (typical for TV sets) or 16:10
(widescreen-flatscreens, widescreen notebooks), 3:2 for 35mm films and
photos. In cinemas you mostly find 1.85:1.
Pixel Aspect Ratio (PAR, pixel aspect ratio: Indicates the aspect ratio of
individual pixels. The majority of computer monitors have quadratic pixels
(PAR=1:1), for analog television monitors (PAL at 4:3) 128:117.
Sample Aspect Ratio (SAR, also Storage Aspect Ratio): Aspect ratio of the
saved resolution (number of pixels), e.g. 720:576 at PAL. It also calculates
picture aspect ratio and pixel aspect ratio: SAR = DAR / PAR.
Note: In the standard case, the "Aspect ratio" remains set the way it is. You
should only change the settings if the resulting video is exported distorted or
stretched or if you need to correct the video because it is in the wrong aspect
ratio.
MPEG-4 encoder settings 383
http://pro.magix.com
GOP structure
Max GOP length
Determines the maximum GOP (view page 394) length. High values mean
improved compression. Lower values create stronger security protection and
enable improved access to individual frames for processing the video.
Max b-frames count
The maximum number of b-frames (view page 396). Several cases of
application, e.g. video conferences require "no b-frames" in order to achieve
the shortest possible reaction times during transfer.
Scene change detection
If this option is activated the scenes will be detected during encoding, thus
allowing you to insert an I frame (view page 395) after a scene change.
Input info
Information about the incoming video stream is displayed here during live
recordings.
Statistics
Information about the encoder activity is displayed here during live recordings.
AMR
AMR involves a parametric codec with different data rates between 4.75 and
12.2 kbit/s. The 12.2-kbit/s setting roughly corresponds with the GSM-EFR
codec in terms of algorithm and audio quality.
This audio format is used by mobile telephones for transferring the
conversation and is optimized for encoding conversation (voices). Low bit rates
provide compensation for mobile phones in case of transfer errors, i.e. bad
reception. Depending on the signal strength, the compression increases or
decreases to enable the best possible quality for a conversation. The AMR
sound, on the other hand, encodes a fixed sample rate of 8,000 Hz compared
to AAC sound.
The advanced AMR audio menu includes the following settings options:
The bit rate can be set between 4.75 and 12.2kbit/s. The higher the bit rate,
the greater the file size and the higher level of audio quality. The standard
384 MPEG-4 encoder settings
http://pro.magix.com
settings provide a bit rate of 7.4 kbit/s. The highest bit rate for this format is
more suited for transferring conversations.
AAC
The AAC audio was developed by MPEG, the Moving Picture Experts Group
(Dolby, Fraunhofer Institut für Integrierte Schaltungen in Erlangen, AT&T, Nokia,
Sony) as an audio data compression process, that was specified as a further
development of MPEG-2 Multichannel in the MPEG-2 standard.
It's also a further development of MPEG-2 audio. This format is equally suitable
for encoding general audio information and not especially optimized for certain
types of audio material. As with video material, the audio format should be
considered for playback later.
AAC audio can be encoded with a sample rate of 8,000, 16,000, 24,000,
32,000 or 48,000 Hz and in mono and stereo sound, respectively. By default,
the sound is set to 48,000 Hz stereo. The higher the sample rate is, the larger
the resulting file and higher the audio quality.
The advanced AAC audio menu includes the following settings options:
The bit rate can be set between 6 and 512 kbit/s. 160 kbits/s is active by
default. The higher the value is, the larger the resulting file and higher the audio
quality. After a certain limit, additional improvements to audio quality will not
be perceived. Bit rates under 64 kb/s are not recommended.
As an MPEG version, set MPEG-4 or the older, proven MPEG-2 format.
For the File Header Type, choose either RAW or ADTS. The "Header"
indicates an explanatory head for the beginning of the file segment, which in
fact takes up extra space, but is required for decoding under circumstances.
- RAW indicates material which does not include a file header in audio
format. The audio material is therefore transferred directly without any
special additional information (raw).
This requires that decoding routines are able to process the material
without the explanatory file header. Especially in case "exotic" sample
rates are set, this can lead to problems during RAW encoding.
- ADTS indicates a file header type which contains information for
encoded audio material. In case of doubt, select this file header type,
since fewer problems can be expected in this case.
Object type: This provides selection between "Main" and "Low complexity".
MPEG-4 encoder settings 385
http://pro.magix.com
Low complexity: Data is present in a form that hinders different decoding
algorithms (noise replacement), but enables others (temporal adjustment noise
formation).
Main: This sets other focuses in the encoding, and other decoder algorithms
can be used.
Note: For example, Apple iPod requires "low complexity encoding". However,
you don't need to worry if you select the right preset for Apple iPod in the
export dialog.
Multiplexer
The multiplexer is a component of the encoder which combines audio and
video streams.
Output format
MPEG-4 file: This is an MPEG standard (ISO/IEC-14496) with the original goal
of supporting devices with less computing performance. Currently, MPEG-4
has reached a wide bandwidth of application, from HD video to support for
mobile telephones.
JPEG2000 file: DCI (Digital Cinema Initiative) has been replaced by the
JPEG2000 format for encoding movies. The current distribution and
presentation of films has been taken over by digital projectors that play back
high-resolution Mj2 streams in outstanding image and sound quality.
3GPP file: A standard supported by plenty GSM and UMTS mobile telephones.
3GPP is very similar to the MPEG-4 standard, but also supports formats that
are not permitted by MPEG-4.
ISMA compatible
The "Internet Streaming Media Alliance" combines video codec standards (e.g.
MPEG) and continuous transfer within computer networks (e.g. RTP Real-time
Transport Protocol) to ensure that videos available online can be correctly
transferred and played back.
Note: This option can only be activated, if under "Format“ the entry "MPEG-4
file" has been selected.
386 MPEG-4 encoder settings
http://pro.magix.com
For Sony PSP
Switch on this option if the video should be played back with the Sony PSP.
Note: This option can only be activated, if under "Format“ the entry "MPEG-4
file" has been selected.
For iPod
Switch on this option, if the video should be played back with the Apple iPod.
Note: This option can only be activated, if under "Format“ the entry "MPEG-4
file" has been selected.
Live mode (get times from samples)
This option is only important for live transfers and is therefore not required in
MAGIX Video Pro X4.
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings 387
http://pro.magix.com
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
General settings
MPEG type: Set the output type of the created MPEG file. You can adjust the
encoder settings freely (to export your video in the corresponding format, for
instance) for further use in other programs or on your own website.
If you open the encoder from a burn dialog, or intend to use the exported
material for VCDs, SVCDs or DVDs, then select the corresponding option. This
will adjust the settings of the encoder according to the standards required for
the corresponding discs to be played in a compatible player.
Video format: Automatically specifies the video format, aspect ratio, and frame
rate (see video settings (view page 388)). You can choose between PAL or
NTSC.
Interlace mode: The movie is encoded interlaced (i.e. in two half-screens, so-
called fields). This is essential for later playback on TV screens. If you want to
view the exported movie on your PC only and like a "cinemascope" view, you
can also encode by frame (progressively). Some video projectors also support
playback of progressively encoded image material. See Interlace (view page
395).
Bit rate: The bit rate determines the memory requirement by the completed
video. The amount of data available can be used differently for different display
modes. 20 MB can be 4 seconds of DVD video, or 5 minutes of Internet
streaming at the thumbnail size. The quality of an MPEG video is measured by
the width of the created data stream, i.e. the bit rate. This is the amount of
transmitted data per time unit and is indicated in kBit/s or bit per second.
Quality: Determines the quality of the encoding process, or the quality of the
movement (view page 392) to be more precise. The higher the quality, the
better the finished video will look, but encoding will take considerably longer.
The preset value "10" is a good compromise between speed and quality.
Smart Rendering: Smart Rendering can considerably reduce the
encoding/processing strain of MPEG files. The production of MPEG files re-
encodes only those parts of the movie that were changed in the program (e.g.
by video cleaning or effects). Please note: The MPEG files contained in the
movie must have the same format, i.e. the bit rates (variable or constant),
audio formats, image resolutions, and video formats must match.
388 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
http://pro.magix.com
Quick, GOP-precise copying: This special Smart Rendering mode enables
MPEG material to be transferred without having to encode it for the target
medium, thereby greatly increasing the encoding speed. The video material
cannot appear to have been altered in any way; only hard cuts (without fades)
are permitted. These won't be executed precisely to the frame, but will rather
take place at the next GOP borders. For this reason, cuts should be set
somewhat more generously.
To burn DVDs in original 5.1 Surround Sound (Dolby Digital Audio) without
having to re-encode, this option has to be activated.
Allows you to rip the necessary settings from an existing MPEG file. This can
be useful if you want to merge MPEG files together without re-rendering via
Smart Rendering.
Video settings
Frame rate: PAL requires 25 frames/sec, NTSC 29.97 frames/sec. Please
note: encoding NTSC material as PAL or vice versa may be possible; however,
it will result in jittery images.
Aspect ratio: Lets you set the image side or pixel ratio. With MPEG 2 the
image format is displayed as image ratio; correspondingly there is 1:1 (square
screen, not recommended), 4:3 (regular video) an 2.21:1 (cinemascope). This
applies irrespectively of the selected video format.
With MPEG 1 the pixel format is specified instead. There is 1:1, CIR601
(corresponds to regular video) for 625 lines = PAL and 525 lines = NTSC and
the same in 16:9. When selecting the output format Video CD the pixel format
is automatically adjusted to the selected video format. Use with caution, even if
you only want to export MPEG 1.
The option Auto is set as default. Here you can adjust the Movie settings (view
page 311) accordingly.
Resolution: Width and height of the video corresponds with the settings in the
export dialog.
GOP structure: Here you can change the settings of the GOP (view page 394)
sequence, i.e. the number of P frames per I frame within a GOP. Please note
that the total length of the GOP must not exceed 15 frames, which
corresponds to the default setting (1 I frame + 4 P frames + 5*2 B frames = 15
frames).
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings 389
http://pro.magix.com
However, you can reduce the length of the GOP sequence (while
compromising the image quality at the same bit rate). This speeds up the
encoding process considerably as the motion estimation while encoding P and
B frames requires high CPU performance. The speed of decoding, i.e.
playback, is also increased.
If I frame is set to 1, each frame is an I frame. If the value is set larger, the
setting describes the total length of the GOP.
Auto GOP: Closed GOPs do not contain relations to frames from subsequent
GOPs. MPEGs where all GOPs are closed, make MPEG editing easier as the I
frames only can be edited alone if the GOP is closed. Auto GOP closes GOPs
at scene changes, whereby two different and complex procedures ("fast" and
"VSCD") are used.
Bit rate mode
In "constant bit rate" mode a bit rate that constantly remains the same is used.
This option should be used for Video CDs, as it is only required here. With a
constant bit rate the full power of MPEG compression can not be used
properly as bandwidth for non-moving scenes is lost.
"Variable bit rate" mode attempts to adjust the available storage space to the
requirements of the video you want to encode. The actual bit rate fluctuates
around a mean value. During calm sections of the video it may drop to a
minimum value, if there are movements in the scene it may rise to the
maximum value. There are two different regulation processes (mode 1 and
mode 128).
Advanced video settings
MPEG profile and level: The MPEG-2 standard defines so-called "profiles" and
"levels". For creating SVCDs and DVDs you can use "Main profile and Main
level". The high profile adds additional properties to the data stream like the
option to display an image at a reduced resolution for restricted transmission
quality (SNR-scalable profile), or locally scaled, for instance an HDTV data
stream on a standard TV set. The 4:2:2 profile is used if the image data is to
be encoded for alternative chroma scanning. However, these profiles are
supported by very few encoders, and mainly only for professional use.
These levels define the restrictions to the image resolution and the maximum
data rate. Low level can only reach a reduced resolution (352x2888 = CIF);
high level, or High 1440, enables encoding in HDTV format.
390 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
http://pro.magix.com
Estimate movement: These parameters are controlled via the quality controller
(see General Settings).
Other
Noise sensitivity: This factor defines how sensitive the encoder will react to
noise in the source material. If the source material only contains a little noise
(digital recordings, computer animations, or material already de-noised by
video cleaning), then you don't have to change the default value 4, or you can
even reduce to increase the quality further. However, if you want to encode
noisy material, then too low of a factor will considerably increase the encoding
time at the cost of quality. For an unedited analog video you can increase the
factor to 8-14.
Noise reduction (click on noise sensitivity): A noise filter is used with adjustable
settings from 1-31.
Advanced parameters
Additional expert settings are available in the tree to the right of the window.
These should only be changed by experienced users. They have been
optimized for general applications to such an extent that changes are only
necessary in exceptional cases.
Audio settings
Audio Type: You can use MPEG -1/-2, PCM (WAV), or Dolby Digital. You can
also select "No audio" in the export dialog.
Sample rate: You can set a sample rate of 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz for the audio
track. VCDs and SVCDs require 44.1 kHz, DVDs require 48 kHz. To reduce the
size of audio data it is recommended to lower the bit rate instead of the sample
rate.
Mode: You can use mono, stereo, joint stereo, or dual channel. If audio type
"Dolby Digital" is used, then "5.1 Surround" mode may also be selected.
Dual channel enables encoding of two mono tracks (e.g. different language
sound tracks) that can be switched during playback.
Joint stereo is an optimized stereo encoder which takes advantage of the fact
that the signal of both stereo channels is largely identical. Use joint stereo if
you can only use small audio bit rates, but still require a stereo signal.
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings 391
http://pro.magix.com
5.1 Surround is available only for surround projects for burning DVDs. During
this process, all 6 surround channels in the audio stream are encoded.
Note! For Surround projects "Dolby Digital" should be selected under "Audio
type", and "5.1 Surround" under "Mode".
Bit rate: Here you can set the audio signal bit rate. The higher the bit rate, the
better the playback quality. VCD requires 224 kBit/s, and for SVCDs and DVDs
select a value between 384 kBit/s and 448 kBit/s.
Dolby Digital Details
Hint: These functions are available only in the "5.1 Surround" mode.
Dialog normalization: Set the dB level of spoken dialog. This value will be used
to adjust the total volume of DVD movies and different programs that can be
received by the DVB. To do this, you must first measure the volume of spoken
dialogs in your movies. The values 1-31 correspond to volume levels of -1 to -
31 dB.
Hint: Use the mixer's peakmeter to set the volume level. This process
produces only approximate results, because the exact measurement requires a
mean value and this cannot be easily measured with MAGIX Video Pro X4.
The displayed value serves also as a reference value for "Dynamic Range
Control". Some areas are softer so that speech can be made louder, and
louder areas will be made softer to avoid overmodulations.
Background: Action-filled movies have larger volume differences between
spoken dialogs and loud scenes (during explosions, for example). Because of
this dialogs are softer than in quieter films which can be modulated higher.
Surround mix level / Center mix level: These settings lead to an additional
damping of the surround channels and the central channel. Usually both
settings are set to -3 dB.
LFE channel: Switch off the LFE channel (Low Frequency Effect), e.g. if you
want to eliminate undesirable rumbling sounds in the low frequency range.
Normally, you should leave this option activated.
392 MPEG glossary
http://pro.magix.com
LFE filter: The LFE filter is a low pass filter, which lets through only the lowest
frequencies. If you are dubbing a project in Samplitude/Sequoia, and have
applied the LFE filter, you can switch off this function here, since this filtering
has already been accomplished.
MPEG glossary
Motion estimation
Motion estimation is a further element for reducing data used in MPEG
encoding.
Motion estimation also occurs in the B and P frames. The image difference that
still exist after prediction (view page 397) are examined. Complex algorithms
are used to search for an original occurrence of the macro block in the
reference frame of each macro block of the P or B frame (these are units of
2x2 blocks specially combined for this purpose), which have been moved
either by movement or by camera pan. They can then be left out in the P and B
frame. Only the information by how far and to where the macro block has been
moved is saved instead. This vector is called the motion detector.
In the General encoder settings (view page 387), you can specify the quality of
the final MPEG video. This factor also influences the time required for
encoding. The longer it takes, the better the quality.
Bit rate
MPEG is a format used for storage and transferring. With older formats (e.g.
AVI) you could predict that 20 seconds of movie would result in 20 MB of data.
The file size is this a direct measurement of quality.
This is different for MPEG: The amount of data available can be used differently
for different display modes. 20 MB can be 4 seconds of DVD Video or 5
minutes Internet streaming in thumbnail format. The quality of an MPEG video
is measured by the width of the created data stream, the bit rate. This is the
amount of the transmitted data per time unit; it is stated in kBit/s or bit per
second.
MPEG glossary 393
http://pro.magix.com
Bits, not bytes are used, since the data word width has to address the
transmission restrictions.
The file size can be calculated from the average bit rate, if its length is known:
F = (BRV + BRA) * t
F=File size BRV=
Video bit rate
BRA=
Audio bit rate
t=Length in s
Block
For almost all image file editing techniques the image is subdivided into 8 x 8
pixel blocks (image points). This should be noted if you would like to used
user-defined image resolutions (width/height), and they should always be a
multiple of 8.
Chroma format
The color value of each image point consists of the color values for the primary
colors red, green, and blue (RGB), and for traditional and technical reasons it is
transformed into one brightness value (Y = 0.299*R = 0.587*G + 0.114*B) and
two color difference values (U = R - Y, V = G -Y).
The Y value alone produces the black and white picture. These signal
components allow brightness and color information to be handled separately.
The first data reduction occurs when single rows comprising a picture are
read. Because the human eye has a lower color resolution than a brightness
resolution, the color components are recorded only for every other point of a
row (4:2:2) for each four pixels grouped (4:1:0), i.e. color signal under-reading.
4:2:2 This corresponds to the established TV standard. One piece of color
information is transmitted per row for two pixels which corresponds to a 2/3
compression of the output data.
4:1:0 This is the color coding used for DVDs and most other consumer video
applications. For each 4 pixels grouped together on two rows, one unit of color
information is saved. This corresponds to a output data compression of 1/2.
394 MPEG glossary
http://pro.magix.com
Field
A half-image, i.e. two halves which combine to produce a frame (see de-
interlacing (view page 395)).
Frame
A frame is a single image from a video sequence which also called a full image.
PAL video, for example, contains 25 frames per second, NTSC 29.97 frames.
Video recordings, with the exception of computer animations and still frames,
don't contain full images. Instead, they have double numbers of half-images
(fields) which are transmitted in an interlaced state. However, we still refer to
frames, since many predecessors of MPEG compression are based on such
frames. Video editing literature usually refers to frames.
GOP
Group of Pictures: The sequence of I frames and the P and B frames that
belong to them.
e.g. I B B P B B P B B I ...
(This GOP has a length of 9, with 2 P frames and 2 B frames)
I frames contain the entire image information of a frame, while P and B have
part of the information. So-called prediction (view page 397) and movement
approximation are methods used for reduction.
The combination P B B is called a subgroup.
I frames must appear in regular intervals in the data stream for image and
sound to be synchronized. Between the I frames only a limited count of P and
B frames is allowed. This explains a few things: Since P and B frames contain
only differential information, these differences will be larger with time, since
more and more changes takes place from frame to frame. A large count does
not make much sense, since GOP has a maximum length of 15 (4P, 2B) in PAL
and 18 (5P, 2B) in NTSC. (More than 2 B frames between P frames is not
allowed).
MPEG glossary 395
In a closed GOP, B frames of the last subgroup may contain only backward
predictions or references to the preceding P frame, but no references to the
following I frame, since it belongs to the next GOP.
I frames
Intra-frames: In these pictures, the entire image information of a frame is saved
and only information from this frame is used ("intra-frame encoded"). In
contrast to the I frame, P and B frames save only the differences between the
current frame, and preceding and/or following frame are also found in MPEG
video (P frame = "predicted frame", B frame = "bidirectional frame", see
Prediction (view page 397)).
Interlace
For historical reasons, pictures in a movie are always recorded and transmitted
in the form of two fields; first the lines with even numbers and then those with
odd numbers. These fields are alternatively displayed with double the frame
rate. The (lazy) eye of the viewer or the processing of the TV tube puts the two
frames together to form one.
http://pro.magix.com
The output image First field Second field
You normally don’t have to worry about field processing. The video material
goes through the entire processing chain as fields and is exported again as
fields or burned onto DVD or shown on TV when played back on a DVD as a
full picture. Only in certain rare conditions is it necessary to go deeper into this
process. Two problems can occur:
1. Interlace artifacts
To be displayed on a computer monitor (during recording, in your TV/VCR, and
in the arranger during editing), the two fields must be combined to form a full
screen.
396 MPEG glossary
These two fields are not the same, since two fields are created during the
recording between which a 1/50 of a second gap is evident. Moving objects
can therefore produce artifacts on vertical edges.
Typical interlacing errors
You can use so-called de-interlacing to avoid this type of artifact. De-
interlacing places a picture in between the two fields (interpolated). If you want
to create stationary pictures from movies, then you should definitely use a de-
interlace filter.
In the system settings ("File" menu -> Program settings) you can set the
preview monitor display to use hardware de-interlacing during video recordings
for the video recorder and for display in the arranger.
2. Incorrect field rate
If you move around the series of fields in a movie data stream, then you will
see strong jitter and flicker effects. Picture objects move in a backward
movement – two steps forwards, one back – since a delayed field is shown
before the previous one. This can happen in the processing chain if you export
video material improperly with the wrong field order and then import it into
different material. We use MXV or MPEG "Top field first" format for all analog
recordings ("odd" in other programs).
DV-AVI on the other hand is saved with “Bottom Field First”.
You can correct the field series for each video object in its object settings. See:
"Menu -> Effects -> Object properties"
P frames and B frames
P frames save only the difference between the current picture and the
preceding I frame. The "P" comes from the term "prediction" which describes
this process.
B frames save the differences between the current picture and the I or P frame
preceding and following. This includes the information that was the same
http://pro.magix.com
MPEG glossary 397
http://pro.magix.com
before and remained the same after the current frame. Both directions are
analyzed (indicates the "B" in the name, i.e. "bidirectional-predicted"). You can
read more under prediction (view page 397).
Prediction
Prediction is a method of data reduction used by the MPEG format. The image
elements already known from the previous or following frames are removed
from the data stream.
How does it work?
The encoder has a precisely defined GOP, for example IBBPBBPBB. This
sequence is transmitted together with the encoder, which always knows
exactly which kind of frame comes next. I, P, and B frames are differentiated.
Hint: When we talk about pictures, we mean frames of the video output, and I,
P an dB frames are the frames of the encoded video. Just as in movement
approximation, blocks (8x8 pixels) are united into macroblocks (16x16 pixels)
during prediction.
The first frame is always the I frame. It is completely encoded from the first
picture. Afterwards, the 4th picture is analyzed for the creation of the first P
frame. (As already said, the encoder, and later the decoder, will know that two
B frames belong between them.) This image will also be completely encoded,
and afterwards all macroblocks that haven't changed in comparison to the I
frame will be deleted. They will be replaced by corresponding references for
the decoder that tell it "you already know what should be shown here, and you
can get it from the last I frame".
Now, the 2nd will be completely encoded, and all macroblocks identical to the
first I frame and the following P frame will be removed. References to previous
frames are called backward predictions, and references to following frames
are called forward predictions. The third picture will be edited in exactly the
same fashion.
The fourth picture we have already explained, and now we need the next P
frame, or picture number 7. Pictures 5 and 6 are B frames again, which are
compared to P frames to both sides of them (picture 4 and 7); these are
followed by the last two B frames. These have a special place, since in closed
GOPs, they may contain only backward predictions, and no references to the
next I frame, because it belongs to the next GOP.
398 MPEG glossary
http://pro.magix.com
Something else: Since the decoder is no prophet, the P frames are always
transmitted before the B frames! The GOP explained above will be encoded
and transmitted in the order it is written.
Original
GOP
I0 B01 B02 P01 B11 B12 P02 B21 B22 I1
Data
stream
I0 P01 B01 B02 P02 B11 B12 B21 B22 I1 ... for closed GOPs
I0 P01 B01 B02 P02 B11 B12 I1 B21 B22 P11... For open GOPs
Due to this nested structure, it is easy to see that during direct editing of
MPEG material, complicated computations have to take place! These are made
easier using a frame table. A frame table contains a list, where the information
of every frame in the data stream is found, identifying the type of frame it is.
Using Movement prediction (view page 392) P and B frames are likewise
reduced.
Quantization scaling
The single pictures in MPEG are saved using a compression method
comparable to JPEG with bitmaps and associated with quality loss. For this
single images are divided into 8 x 8 blocks (view page 393).
Each one of these blocks is then transformed into an 8 x 8 matrix (a table with
rows and columns) using a DCT (discreet cosinus transformation) mathematical
method. Each of these values is produced using all 64 individual pixels of the
block, but the values in the matrix are ordered in such a way that the image
information is ordered according to its importance.
This matrix will then be multiplied by another matrix, i.e. the quantization
matrix. Exactly how and why this matrix must be created is the biggest secret
of encoder programmers, since this determines the quality of the whole
encoding process. What is known is that the result should contain as many
zeros as possible! These zeros correspond to the "unimportant" image
elements mentioned and will not be transmitted in the data stream.
Depending on the encoder parameters regarding the target bit rate, fewer or
more values of the matrix will be declared unimportant by dividing the
quantization matrix by the quantization scaling factor. Since only whole
numbers are used, a division can produce a zero is the remainder is discarded.
MPEG glossary 399
http://pro.magix.com
This factor is also a direct measure of the sought image quality of the MPEG
data stream, since the "Q" in "Q" factor stands for quantization and quality.
400 Glossary
http://pro.magix.com
Glossary
Symbols & Numeric
720p
This is the "small" HD resolution, which is sized at 1280 pixels x 720 pixels.
The "p" stands for "progressive", i.e. full images are always displayed.
A
Aliasing
Aliasing, or alias effects, are mistakes that appear during digital scanning of
sounds, videos or images when the sample frequency (in audio editing) or
resolution (in video editing) used are too low.
ATN:
This abbreviation stands for "Absolute Track Number". Which is the actual time
code of DV and HDV recordings recorded using the helical scan method.
Audio
This is then referred to as "audio" when the sound signal is saved directly as
such on the PC. The actual sound is recorded or played back here.
audioid
audioid is a process used to determine the title and artist name base on
musical properties. An Internet connection is required to access the audioid
database.
AVCHD
Stands for "Advanced Video Codec Definition". It is an HD format for video
cameras which has been developed by Panasonic and SONY. In comparison
to the HDV format, a meaningful quality improvement can be seen here.
For the video recording MPEG 4 AVC/H.264, and for audio recording Dolby®
Digital or Linear PCM are used. The maximum bit rate is 25 Megabits/sec.
AVI
The AVI format (Audio Video Interleaved) isn't actually a proper video format!
Rather, it is a so-called "container" for which the conventions for transferring
Glossary 401
http://pro.magix.com
audio and video files to the program are only loosely defined. More in this topic
can be found in General notes on AVI videos. (view page 364)
B
Backup disc
Copying of files to a different file storage medium to secure these files is called
backing up, or creating a backup.
Browser
A browser (also known as web browser, or Internet browser) is a computer
program that displays websites. The best-known browsers are Internet
Explorer, Firefox, Safari, and Opera.
Button
Refers to an element of the graphic user interface of a program. The button
initiates an action in the program via left mouse click.
Button
Refers to an element of the graphic user interface of a program. The button
initiates an action in the program via left mouse click.
C
Cache
Simply stated, this is a temporary folder where frequently accessed files are
saved so that they can be quickly launched while you are working.
CC
CC stands for "Connectivity Co-ordination" and describes how the change of a
domain name from one provider to another occurs (domain transfer).
Clip level
Signifies the volume level at which the recorded signal is overmodulated, or
"clipped".
Clipboard
The clipboard is used to temporarily store objects during execution of
commands like "copy" and "cut".
402 Glossary
http://pro.magix.com
Clipboard
The clipboard is used to temporarily store objects during execution of
commands like "copy" and "cut".
Compatible
Different devices are compatible with each other if they operate together
without any errors occurring.
Context menu
Context menu can be reached by right clicking on a selected object. It offers
functions which are available and can be expected in the given context.
Copyright
Protection of intellectual and creative property against unauthorized copying.
Copyright
Protection of intellectual and creative property against unauthorized copying.
CPU
Central processing unit: The name for the main processor of the computer
(CPU). Modern computers have even two or more processors, or one
processor with several cores.
Crossfade
Transitions, crossfades. Can be used to fade between objects.
D
Dialog
A dialog opens in a new window and lets the user interact with the program.
This means that the dialog can present information to the user and/or expects
to receive input from the user.
A dialog can contain various user elements which can be manipulated by a
simple mouse click. Keyboard entries are also possible.
Glossary 403
http://pro.magix.com
Disc project
A "Disc project" includes everything that you want to put on your CD and DVD.
This normally contains one or more movies and includes a menu
structure/menu design which allows you to choose a movie later on the CD or
DVD.
Disc types
The disc types determines the format and medium (CD, DVD, Blu-ray disc,
etc.) to which the current project will be burned.
DNS
The abbreviation DNS stands for Domain Name Service and refers to a
provider of Internet services that registers domain names for customers.
Domain
A domain is the website's Internet address. It consists of the name of the
Internet protocol (usually http://), the computer or network name (such as
www), the second-level domain (such as magix), and the top level domain (like
.com, .net).
Altogether we have: protocol://networkname.second-level-domain.top-level-
domain (such as "http://www.magix.com").
Domains are allocated by a country's so-called NIC (Network Information
Center). In Germany the DENIC is responsible for the release of domains.
Domain transfer
See CC. If you already have a domain, you can move it from your previous
provider to another provider.
Downmix
A method developed for audio technology to turn a Surround Sound recording
into a version with fewer channels. Most often (as is the case with MAGIX
Video Pro X4) this will be a stereo version.
404 Glossary
http://pro.magix.com
Drag & drop
Enables files and objects to be moved freely between various applications (or
within an application) by dragging the object and letting it drop using the
mouse cursor.
F
Fader
Used for visual input of values. Similar to volume control on a mixing board,
you can control various parameters by sliding the fader. A very common
example for this is the zoom slider that lets you see a picture in more detail.
Field
A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame (see interlace).
Flip menu
Drop down menus create menus consisting of lists of selectable choices. They
look very similar to text input fields, but have a button with a downward-
pointing symbol on the right-hand side.
Frame
A frame is a single image from a video sequence which also called a full image.
A PAL video contains 25 frames per second; NTSC contains 29.97 frames.
H
Handles
Handles are the five little rectangles at the edges of selected objects. All curve
points can be moved by holding down the left mouse button.
Length handles: Bottom right and bottom left. You can use them to change
the length of an object.
Fade handles: Top right and top left. These can be used to softly fade an
object in or out.
Volume/Brightness handle: Above-center. You can use it to adjust the volume
or the brightness.
Glossary 405
http://pro.magix.com
Hard disk
Storage medium with the largest storage capacity where the operating
system(s), programs, and files are saved. A hard disk can be built into the
computer, but there are also external hard disks which can be used with
different computers via a USB connection (portable drives or external hard
disk).
Hard disk drive
Storage medium with the largest storage capacity where the operating
system(s), programs, and files are saved. A hard disk can be built into the
computer, but there are also external hard disks which can be used with
different computers via a USB connection (portable drives or external hard
disk).
Hardware
The all-encompassing name for all internal components of a computer. For
example hard disk, graphics card, mainboard, etc. External peripheral devices
are also considered hardware, i.e. printer, scanner, monitor, etc. The
synchronization of single hardware components is coordinated by the
software.
HDD
Storage medium with the largest storage capacity where the operating
system(s), programs, and files are saved. A hard disk can be built into the
computer, but there are also external hard disks which can be used with
different computers via a USB connection (portable drives or external hard
disk).
HDTV
This acronym stands for "High Definition Television.
HTTP
Stands for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol and is used for transferring websites
onto the Internet (from web server to the browser). For this reason, the
abbreviation http:// always comes before the Internet address. This is
automatically inserted and does not have to be entered when entering the
Internet address.
406 Glossary
http://pro.magix.com
Hyperlink
Hyperlinks (or in short "links") are references to other websites/online
documents (or other computer networks). They build the base of the World
Wide Web (WWW) as it is only via these hyperlinks that networking or
interlinking between the billions of website out there is actually possible.
I
ID3 tags
ID3 tags contain title information that can be added to a music title. This
includes the title, artist, album, as well as the genre, year of release, and other
criteria that can help searching through a database. The database is created
using this information.
Info: Title information will only be saved for MP3s in the so-called ID3 tags
(Identify an MP3), but other formats offer similar possibilities, like "Vorbis
comment" for the OGG Vorbis format, for example.
Image
An image is a representation of a CD, DVD, hard drive, or another storage
medium that is saved as a file.
The difference from a copy or backup is that an image contains information
about the structure of the original storage medium, and not just individual files.
This enables 01:01 copies of complete storage media to be created.
Caution! Copyright laws forbid copying of commercial CDs/DVDs, and for this
reason, this process can be prohibited by copy protection.
IMAP
Stands for Internet Message Access Protocol and is an advanced process of
receiving emails.
Interlace
Describes the creation of a full image from 2 half-images (fields).
In this process, even and odd lines are alternately assigned to one of the two
fields.
Glossary 407
http://pro.magix.com
The human eye perceives both of the projected half-images as a single full
image, so that despite the slow image repetition rate (25 Hz for PAL, 29.97 for
NTSC) a subjectively fluid image is seen.
Intro
"Intro" means the introduction or opening credits of a movie.
J
jpx
A format developed by MAGIX which is used for photo editing. It enables free
experimentation with effects without altering the original file. The effects
settings are also displayed when the photos are opened using a different
MAGIX program.
M
Menu
Menus contain practically all function of a program. They can be opened using
a simple mouse click on the corresponding menu. Keyboard shortcuts, if
available, are also found at the end of menu entries.
The graphical surface of a CD/DVD will also be represented as a menu.
Menu bar
Almost every program has a menu bar. It can normally be found underneath
the title line of the program. A simple mouse click opens a corresponding
menu.
MIDI
MIDI files do not contain the actual sounds like audio files, but only the note
control information which can be interpreted during playback by the
synthesizer chip on the sound card or an external synthesizer.
MMC
MMC stands for MIDI Machine Control and is part of the MIDI protocol.
Transport control and position data is conveyed using MMC.
408 Glossary
http://pro.magix.com
Motherboard
This is the centerpiece of hardware components of a computer. All other
hardware components like CPU, RAM, hard disk, additional drives, graphics
cards, as well as other cards for specialized uses are connected to the
motherboard.
Motherboard
This is the centerpiece of hardware components of a computer. All other
hardware components like CPU, RAM, hard disk, additional drives, graphics
cards, as well as other cards for specialized uses are connected to the
motherboard.
Motherboard
This is the centerpiece of hardware components of a computer. All other
hardware components like CPU, RAM, hard disk, additional drives, graphics
cards, as well as other cards for specialized uses are connected to the
motherboard.
MOV
MOV is a video and audio format developed by Apple, which has since
become widely used with Windows. QuickTime supports lots of compression
technology, which make it possible to optimize audio and video and even
graphics for the Internet and multimedia/video applications. Conventional
(hardware) DVD players are not able to play this format.
Movie
In MAGIX Video Pro X4, an arrangement of various objects (videos, photos,
text, sound, etc.) is called a movie. A movie file has an "mvm" extension.
MP3
MP3 (actually MPEG-1 layer 3) is currently the most important standard for
compressing audio files.
MPEG
MPEG is short for "Moving Picture Experts Group" and refers to a committee
concerned with the standardization of video and audio data compression as
well as container formats.
Glossary 409
http://pro.magix.com
MS audio
A process developed by Microsoft for compressing audio files with properties
similar to those of MP3.
MTC
MTC stands for MIDI Time Code and it transmits the exact playback position
via MIDI. In this way, programs and devices can be synchronized with each
other.
MXV
This is the MAGIX video format for quicker processing with MAGIX products. It
offers very low loss of quality, but it cannot be played via conventional DVD
players.
N
Noise Sample
Sample of a noise that is to be removed
NTSC (USA, Japan)
NTSC stands for "National Television Systems Committee". This is a US
institution that defined the first color carrier system for TV which is now used in
most of America and some East Asian countries.
The image repetition rate for NTSC is 29.97 Hz.
Numeric keypad
Also known as the numpad, or the number block.
O
Offset
With an offset of 60:00:00 (1 hour) you can, for example synchronize a tape
whose time code that starts at 1 hour, MAGIX Video Pro X4 however, still
starts the tape beginning at 0.
OGG VORBIS
This is a new, royalty-free format with similar properties to MP3.
410 Glossary
http://pro.magix.com
P
PAL (Europe)
Phase Alternating Line, or PAL, is a process for color transmission for analog
TV that is primarily used in Europe, but also in Australia, South America, and
many African and Asian countries.
The image repetition rate for PAL is 25 Hz.
Play marker
The play marker is a red vertical line which moves from left to right during
playback. It indicates the current play position.
Playlist
Arrange your songs in playlists from various sources in different formats and in
whatever way you like, sometimes updated daily.
Important: Playlists are only links to songs on your hard drive or in your CD
drive.
When you add a song to your playlist whose real source is a CD in your
computer's drive, the song will no longer be playable when the CD is removed
from the drive.
Similarly, when you move a folder on your hard drive, the playlist will no longer
be able to play the song, since the link is no longer valid.
For the latter, however, there is a simple solution: If you know where the song
has been saved, then you can redefine the path. A corresponding dialog
window is provided for this purpose. You can reset the path by navigating
through the Explorer folders. The playlist is now correct once again.
Plug-in
Plug-ins are additional programs that expand the functionality of the main
program. They are inserted into the main program.
POP3
Stands for Post Office Protocol (version 3) and is used in standard email
programs for receiving email (for example, Outlook Express). POP3 enables
Glossary 411
http://pro.magix.com
email to be collected by the provider's email server and loaded into your email
program.
Project
A "Disc project" includes everything that you want to put on your CD and DVD.
This normally contains one or more movies and includes a menu
structure/menu design which allows you to choose a movie later on the CD or
DVD.
Provider
A provider or ISP (Internet Service Provider) offers Internet services like
webhosting or domains (DNS). In relation to the MAGIX Website Service,
MAGIX is the provider.
R
RAM (Random Access Memory)
This is a hardware component of a computer. RAM is needed to temporarily
save files. This type of storage is erased when the computer is shut down or
reset. The larger this storage is, the faster you can work with programs to
change and save files.
Ratio:
The aspect ratio is the ratio between the height and width of a rectangle. In
practice these are photos, screens or projection screens. This method can also
be used to describe the aspect ratio of pixels.
Here are some examples of typical aspect ratios: at home 4:3, 16:9 (typical for
TV sets), or 16:10 (widescreen flat screens, widescreen notebooks), 3:2 for 35
mm films and photos. In cinemas you mostly find 1.85:1
Red Book
Specific standards have been established for the different CD types in order to
unify their data structure and to make them compatible with the different CD
drives. Their names refer to the color of the books where these standards were
written.
The term "Red Book" is common language for the Compact Disc Audio
Standard. The requirements listed here have to be observed for industrial CP
production. Audio CD players only read CDs created according to the Red
412 Glossary
http://pro.magix.com
Book format. It is therefore necessary to first convert PC files into this format
before writing them onto an audio disc compatible with any audio CD player.
Restore
Restoration of files originating from a backup will be called "Restoring".
RM
RealMedia includes all of the media formats from software developer
RealNetworks. RealMedia especially refers to the "RealVideo" video format and
the "RealAudio" sound format. The quality of RealVideo files is comparably
good at high compression rates, but does have some loss of quality. These
formats cannot be played back by (hardware) DVD players.
S
Scene
Freely definable section of a video in MAGIX Video Pro X4.
In general, a scene is a segment of a film that is a product of various settings
and conveys a certain action.
Screenshot
A screenshot is an image composed of all visible screen elements (messages,
open dialogs, etc.) at a certain time. By pressing the "Print screen" key on the
keyboard, this image is saved into the clipboard. Next, open a program which
can edit images and select "Insert" (shortcut "Ctrl+V") in a new document to
add the screenshot for editing and saving.
Note: Press "Alt + Print screen" on the keyboard to capture the active window
only.
Slider
Used for visual input of values. Similar to volume control on a mixing board,
you can control various parameters by sliding the fader. A very common
example for this is the zoom slider that lets you see a picture in more detail.
SMTP
Stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol and enables the exchange of emails
across computer networks.
Glossary 413
http://pro.magix.com
Software
The name for all non-physical functional components of a computer. This
primarily includes computer programs and files that are meant to be used by
computer programs.
Storyboard mode
The Storyboard mode is the default edit screen view. This view offers an easy,
streamlined interface to simplify the editing process. The alternative Timeline
mode offers a more detailed interface for more extensive editing and scene
arrangements, the scene overview mode offers a complete overview of all
scenes on a small scale. You can toggle between the three view modes using
the Tab key.
Submenu
Besides normal entries, a menu can contain submenus that offer additional
functions. This makes menus more comprehensive.
Super Video CD (SVCD)
The Super Video CD (SVCD) is a technological advancement of the video CD.
SVCDs are also like VCD-specified CD-ROMs which can be played using either
a Super Video CD player (connected to the television), or directly with the CD-
ROM drive of a computer. Many DVD players can also play SVCDs. MPEG-2
and the increase of the data transfer rate makes it hard to tell videos from
videos in DVD quality apart.
Resolution: SVCDs use the better MPEG-2 encoder in a standardized
resolution of 480 x 576 (PAL). The MPEG-2 format offers a maximum
resolution of up to 720 x 576 points and improved compression methods
characterized by excellent image definition and homogeneity.
Hard disk capacity: An average 90-minute movie must be spread across 3
CDs. On one SVCD you can get about 30 minutes of good-quality movie.
Encoder setting: Compared to the VCD with 1.3, the data transfer rate is
doubled to 2.6 Mbit/s.
MPEG-2 format introduces the so-called variable bit rate (VBR). In contrast to
the constant bit rate (CBR) of the MPEG-1 encoders, this encoder has the
option of using more bits for movement-intensive sections, as well as saving
bits if picture content remains the same.
414 Glossary
http://pro.magix.com
T
Toolbar
Here you will find small buttons that provide a function when clicked. For
example, you can cut out a selected object by clicking on the scissors.
Toolbar
All basic functions of the corresponding program can be found here. The
corresponding functions can be called up via mouse click.
Top-level domain
Top-level domains (TLD) are always those separated by a dot at the end of an
Internet address (for example, "http://www.magix.com" < here, .com is the
top-level domain). Among these are also country top-level domains, such as
.co.uk, .us, .de as well as so-called generic top-level domains like .net, .org,
.biz, and so on.
Traffic
Traffic (data transmission) occurs within your MAGIX Website Service as soon
as data is transferred across the Internet: for example, when uploading or
downloading files to your website or when someone else opens your website.
U
Universal Plug & Play; UPnP
Universal Plug ‘n’ Play (UPnP) is a network protocol which enables data
exchange between different devices (PCs, hi-fi systems, video cameras, PDAs,
and webservers). UPnP allows various devices to participate in network-wide
communication, i.e. the initialization of functions and other device functions.
Long-winded configuring or installing of drivers is not required as the devices
can handle their own functions and data sources by themselves. Find out more
at www.upnp.org.
Hint: To work with UPnP you have to activate it first. This can be found under
"Options" ("Y" -> UPnP).
URL
URL stands for Uniform Resource Locator and describes where a source can
be found online (for example, a website). The address or the path to the
storage location of a file on your computer is known as a URL. Often the term
Glossary 415
http://pro.magix.com
URL is used as a term for the domain. The URL for the MAGIX website is:
http://www.magix.co.uk
V
VirtualDub plug-in
Plug-ins are additional programs that expand the functionality of the main
program. They are inserted into the main program.
VirtualDub plug-ins are also referred to "VirtualDub filters" and have the "VDF"
file extension. You can use them to apply additional video effects to video
objects.
VST and DirectX plug-ins
Plug-ins are additional programs that expand the functionality of the main
program. They are inserted into the main program.
Two standards exist for audio editing: VST (Steinberg) and DirectX (Microsoft).
VST has asserted itself stronger in the current market.
W
WAV
Wave (*.WAV) is a standard uncompressed audio format.
Wave
Wave (*.WAV) is a standard uncompressed audio format.
Wave file
Wave (*.WAV) is a standard uncompressed audio format.
Webhosting
This means that an Internet Service Provider makes domains and webspace
available to its customers. With the MAGIX Website Service, MAGIX provides
webhosting to its customers.
Webmail
Webmail enables the customer to view and receive the contents of their email
inbox without having to install email software on their computer. Customers of
the MAGIX Website Service can use MAGIX Webmail for this.
416 Glossary
http://pro.magix.com
Webmaster
A webmaster is responsible for the administration and maintenance of a
website. Often, the webmaster is also the owner of the website as well as the
domain that belongs to it. Once you have registered a domain in the MAGIX
Website Service, an email account will automatically be set up, for example:
"mailto:webmaster@domainname.co.uk".
Webserver
Webserver refers to the computer on which your host saves your website's
pages and which makes your pages accessible on the Internet 24-hours a day.
WMA
A process developed by Microsoft for compressing audio files with properties
similar to those of MP3.
WMV
Windows Media Video (WMV) is a trademark video codec from Microsoft. If you
have Windows installed on your PC, then playing WMV files shouldn't be a
problem. Only a few (hardware) DVD players are able to play this format. Read
more about this in your DVD player's manual.
This video format is very good for web videos as it allows relatively high
compression rates.
World Wide Web (WWW)
WWW stands for "World Wide Web" and is the most used service of the
Internet. On the WWW, web browsers (for example, Internet Explorer) are used
to display information via websites. The process is colloquially called "Surfing
the Internet".
If you still have questions 417
http://pro.magix.com
If you still have questions
Tips for program help
The "Help" file features hints on how to use the program and additional
information. Many important terms are indicated in the text in italics and an
explanation to them is reached by clicking on them.
Context help: Press the "F1" key at any point in the opened program and the
help file will open with the matching topic (context help).
Search function: Use the search function to find out information about specific
words. Enter either the individual word or use logical operators (OR, AND,
NEAR) to refine your search if you have several search words.
"OR" (between two words): All topics which contain both words or one of the
words will be listed.
"AND" (between two words): Only those topics will be listed which contain
both words.
"NEAR" (between two words): Only those topics will be listed which contain
both words. A maximum of six other words may be added between the search
terms.
"NOT" (before a word): Topics which contain this word will not be listed.
Print: Use the help program's print function to make a printout of individual
topics or entire sections. The print button is located at the top of the help
window in the toolbar.
418 Index
http://pro.magix.com
Index
3
3D 166
3D morph 144
3D series 103
3D transitions 102
5
5.1 Surround 198, 206
A
Abbreviations 352
Adapt length to music 290
Add music 82
Additional effects 147
Adjust brightness 129, 163, 195
All tracks mouse mode 29, 32, 41
Alpha keying 102, 245
Analog video recording 79
Animate effects 150
Animated GIF 245
Anti-interlace filter 165
Arranger 45, 260, 353
Artistic filter 135
Attach to picture position in the video 161
Audio cleaning 176
Audio effects 55, 175
Audio recording 82
Audio track export 245
Audiomenü 217
Automate 197
Automatic scene detection 274
Automatic volume damping 85
Automatically cut 274, 290
Automation 197, 202
AVCHD 16, 68
AVCHD disc 367
AVC-Intra 68
Index 419
http://pro.magix.com
B
Background music 190
Backup 270, 271
Backup copy 270
Basic view 49
Batch Capturing 74
Batch recording 74, 75
Beat detection 275
Blu-ray 367
BMP-Export 245
Border cropping adjustment 165
Bounce 211
Burn 62, 231
Burn CD 303
C
Camera/zoom 141
Chapter markers 40, 112, 217
Chroma key 133
Clean-up wizard 272
Codec 361, 364
Color 130, 164
Color correction 132
Compare 125
Compressor 179, 185
Computer 52
Context menu 27
Continue 234
Continue burning 234
Contrast 129, 163
Copy 95
Create disc menu 213, 215
Create menus 213, 215
Create new project 37, 250
CUDA 239
Curve mouse mode 41
Curves 150, 197
Customer service 10
Cut 29, 42
Cut trimmer 99
420 Index
http://pro.magix.com
D
DeClipper 176
Decorate 321
DeHisser 178
Deinterlace 268
Delete 39, 308
DeNoiser 177
Design 290
Design buttons 219
Design elements 321
Design page 218
DirectX Plug Ins 195
Disc formats 17
Distortion 136
Dolby Surround 198
Driver selection 260
Dub 82
Ducking 85, 190, 319
DV 71, 72
DV as MPEG 77
DV-AVI 240
DVCPRO 68
DVD 365
Burn DVD 303
DVD with surround sound 198
Import DVD 92
E
Edit 36, 91, 307, 356
Edit after recording 89
Edit list 246, 271
EDL 246, 271
Effects 54, 124, 175, 198, 291, 316, 357
Effects curves 152
Effects masks 156
Effects settings 124, 163
Equalizer 178, 184
Exchange 44
Export 34, 199, 240
Export formats 240
Export movie 34, 240
Export video 34, 240
Index 421
http://pro.magix.com
F
File 299, 355
File formats 16, 364
File import 50
Film menu 217
Film overview 59
Folder 262
Four-point cut 108
Full screen 59
G
Grid 40
Group 40, 94
H
H.264 68
Handles 27, 96
Hard drive camera 68
HDV 71, 72
Help 38, 325, 359
Hints 265
I
Image stabilization 161
Import 50, 199
Import Formats 16
In point 31, 93, 111
Insert 43, 91
Insert date 123
Installation 12
Interfaces 36, 62
Interlace 262
Interpolation for interlace material 165
J
JPEG export 245
422 Index
http://pro.magix.com
K
Kapitelmenü 217
Key frames 150
Keyboard shortcuts 352
L
Limiter 190
Load 37, 50, 92, 259
Load CD titles 302
Load project 37, 259
Logging 78
M
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro 17
MAGIX tools 53
MAGIX Video CD 241
Mastering 176, 185, 197
Mastering Suite 185
Media Pool 50
Mirror 143
Mixdown 211
Mixer 45, 184, 195, 201
MMC 255
Modes (Storyboard/Timeline/Overview) 64
MotionJPEG-AVI 242
Mouse modes 40, 354
Move 95
Move objects on all tracks 41
Movement effects 55, 138
Movie selection 38
MPEG 241, 363
Multicam editing 115
Multicam mode 16, 115
Multimax 188
Multisound tracks 204
Mute 44
My Media 52
N
Navigation 216
Index 423
http://pro.magix.com
News Center 38
O
Object editing 91
Object grid 40
Object handles 96
Object mouse mode 40
Object trimmer 98
One track mouse mode 29, 32, 41
Open files 16, 259, 271, 302, 305
OpenCL 239
Optimize image 129, 163, 165
Out point 31, 93, 111
Output video 248
Overview 49, 324
Overview mode 49, 93
Overwrite 44
P
Package contents 12
Panorama 294
Panorama automation 197
Personalized templates 147
Pitch shift 182
Play 21, 352
Playback markers 110
Polarizing filter 169
Prelisten mouse mode 42
Preview 212
Preview rendering 269
Program monitor 58
Program settings 38, 260
Project folder 57
Project markers 111
Projects 52, 257
PSD 216
Q
Quick Start 20
424 Index
http://pro.magix.com
R
Real time 175
Record 67
Record sound 82
Recording 67
Redo 39
Remote control 212
Remove end 42
Remove scene 43
Remove start 42
Rewrite 234
Rotation 143
Rotation & Mirror 143
Run of the panorama and volume curve 197
RW 234
S
Save 37
Save project 37, 259
Scene markers 114
Scene recognition 274
Screen capture 88
Scroll 47
Scrubbing 208
Search function 21, 51
Secondary color correction 132
Section & zoom 140
Serial number 13
Settings 38, 258, 260
Sharpness 137, 164
Shortcuts 352
Show grid 40
Show text 54
Shutter mode 169
Single frame export 242
Single-frame recording 75, 85
Size 138
Size & position 138
Slideshow Maker 290
Snap to other audio objects 119, 337
Sound restoration 176
Soundtrack 174, 209
Index 425
http://pro.magix.com
Source monitor 58, 112, 125
Spacebar 260
Specify TV image 164
Speed 137
Split 42
Split movie 43
Start dialog 20
Stereo FX 179
Stereo3D 166
Storyboard Mode 64
StoryMaker 50, 54
Stretch mouse mode 41
Support 10
Surround 198, 206
Synchronization 252
System requirements 14
T
The burn dialog 233
Three-point cut 106
Timeline mode 27
Timer 86
Timestretch/pitchshift 182
Title 54, 120
Title Editor 39
Tools 37
Track effects automation 197, 202
Tracks 195
Transitions 54, 101, 245, 290
Transport functions 60
Travel route animation 283
Trimmer 97
Two-point cut 104
U
Uncompressed video 242
Undo 39
Uninstall 12
Use plug-ins 147, 175, 195
Using MAGIX Video Pro X4 20
426 Index
http://pro.magix.com
V
Video Comping 115
Video effects 55, 129
View 56, 325, 354
Vimeo 247, 304
Volume automation 197
Volume reduction 85, 190
VST plug-ins 195
W
Wave (WAV) 245
Window 322, 358
Windows Media video 242
Workshop 20
Workspaces 62
Y
YouTube 247, 304
Z
Zoom 47, 141

Navigation menu